You are on page 1of 949

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00

Maintenance Guide
Issue Date 03 2012-07-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 950 iManager U2000 Version V100R005C00 V100R006C02

Intended Audience
This document provides the guidelines to maintaining the OptiX RTN 950. It also describes the alarms and performance events that are required for troubleshooting during the maintenance. This document is intended for: l l l Network planning engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Convention { x | y | ... }*

Description Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00
This document is the third issue of the V100R005C00 product version. Update 8.9.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board 8.9.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board 8.9.3 Performing a PRBS Test for the Smart E1 Processing Board Description Added the operation of saving report.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00
This document is the second issue of the V100R005C00 product version.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Update 3 Routine Maintenance 4 Emergency Maintenance 5 Troubleshooting 7 Database Backup and Restoration 8 Supporting Task A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)

Description Added the routine maintenance. Added the emergency maintenance. Added the troubleshooting. Added the database backup and restoration. Added the supporting task. Added the SSL_CERT_NOENC alarm to the system control, switching, and timing boards. Added the ERPS_IN_PROTECTION alarm to the Ethernet boards and IF boards (except for IF1).

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00
This document is the first issue of the V100R005C00 product version.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3 1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................7 1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................7 1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................9 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................11 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................11 1.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................11 1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12 1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................13 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................13 1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14 1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................16 1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................19
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................20 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................22 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables...................................................................................................................23 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24

3 Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................26 4 Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................28
4.1 Definition of Emergency..................................................................................................................................29 4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance...............................................................................................................29 4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................29

5 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................36
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure.................................................................................................................38 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions.............................................................................................................40 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.......................................................................................................................46 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services..................................................................................................51 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.............................................................................................................57 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment............................................................................61 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment............................................................................64 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults..............................................................................................68 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane..........................................................................75 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels....................................................................................................................81 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services.......................................................................................................................85 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services.....................................................................................................................90 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs......................................................................................94 5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults................................................................................................................102

6 Part Replacement.......................................................................................................................105
6.1 Removing a Board..........................................................................................................................................107 6.2 Inserting a Board............................................................................................................................................110 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board..................................................................................................112 6.4 Replacing the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board...................................................................................113 6.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board...............................................................................................................114 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board........................................................................................................115 6.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board..........................................................................................................116 6.8 Replacing the IF Board...................................................................................................................................117 6.9 Replacing the CF Card...................................................................................................................................119 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board...........................................................................120 6.11 Replacing the Auxiliary Board.....................................................................................................................122 6.12 Replacing the Fan Board..............................................................................................................................123 6.13 Replacing the Power Board..........................................................................................................................125 6.14 Replacing the SFP........................................................................................................................................126 6.15 Replacing the ODU......................................................................................................................................128 6.16 Replacing the IF Cable.................................................................................................................................129

7 Database Backup and Restoration.........................................................................................131
7.1 NE Database...................................................................................................................................................132 7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually...............................................................................................................133 7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy...............................................................................................................135 7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy...............................................................................................135 7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device...............................................................................................137 7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device..............................................................................................138 7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS....................................................................................................................139

8 Supporting Task........................................................................................................................142
8.1 Hardware Loopback.......................................................................................................................................145 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.......................................................................................................145 8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners.....................................................................145 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue................................................................................147 8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.................................................................148 8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events.....................................................................149 8.3.1 Checking the NE Status.........................................................................................................................149 8.3.2 Checking the Board Status....................................................................................................................151 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms......................................................................................................................151 8.3.4 Browsing Current Performance Events of the radio link.......................................................................154 8.3.5 Browsing Historical Performance Data of a Radio Link.......................................................................155 8.3.6 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance..............................................................................................156 8.3.7 Browsing Historical Ethernet Performance Data..................................................................................159 8.3.8 Browsing Abnormal Events...................................................................................................................163 8.3.9 Browsing Current Performance Events.................................................................................................164 8.3.10 Browsing History Alarms....................................................................................................................165 8.3.11 Browsing History Performance Events...............................................................................................167 8.3.12 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records.........................................................168 8.3.13 Browsing UAT Events.........................................................................................................................169 8.4 Using the RMON............................................................................................................................................170 8.4.1 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance..............................................................................................170 8.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Performance Threshold-Crossing Parameters....................................................173 8.4.3 Configuring the Parameters for Monitoring Historical Ethernet Performance.....................................176 8.4.4 Browsing Historical Ethernet Performance Data..................................................................................177 8.5 Setting Alarm and Performance Management Functions...............................................................................180 8.5.1 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs......................................................................180 8.5.2 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms.........................................................................181 8.5.3 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects..........................................................................................182 8.5.4 Suppressing Alarms for NEs.................................................................................................................183 8.5.5 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports......................................................................................................184 8.5.6 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion.........................................................................................185 8.5.7 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion.....................................................................................186 8.5.8 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports......................................................................................187 8.5.9 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events....................................................188 8.5.10 Setting Performance Thresholds..........................................................................................................189 8.5.11 Resetting Performance Registers.........................................................................................................190 8.6 Querying a Report..........................................................................................................................................190 8.6.1 Querying the Board Information Report ..............................................................................................191 8.6.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report ......................................................................193 8.6.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report...............................................................................194 8.6.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report.........................................................................................195 8.7 Software Loopback.........................................................................................................................................196 8.7.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board........................................................................196 8.7.2 Setting Loopback for the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board.........................................................198 8.7.3 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board............................................................................................200 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

8.7.4 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board.......................................................................202 8.7.5 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board......................................................203 8.7.6 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board.............................................205 8.7.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board........................................................................................................208 8.7.8 Setting Software Loopback for the NE..................................................................................................211 8.7.9 Setting Software Loopback for the Microwave Link............................................................................212 8.7.10 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations.......................................................................213 8.8 Reset...............................................................................................................................................................214 8.8.1 Cold Reset..............................................................................................................................................214 8.8.2 Warm Reset...........................................................................................................................................215 8.9 PRBS Test.......................................................................................................................................................216 8.9.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board.................................................................................216 8.9.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board.............................................................................................218 8.9.3 Performing a PRBS Test for the Smart E1 Processing Board...............................................................220 8.10 Querying the License Capacity.....................................................................................................................222 8.11 Scanning Interfering Signals........................................................................................................................222 8.12 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser...........................................................................................................223 8.13 Setting the ALS Function.............................................................................................................................224 8.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function......................................................................................................225 8.15 Querying Power Consumption of Boards.....................................................................................................225 8.16 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel..................................................................................................226 8.17 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring.................................................................................226 8.18 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................228 8.19 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.......................................229 8.20 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization...............................................................230 8.21 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port..........................................................231 8.22 Using the Ethernet Test Frames....................................................................................................................232 8.23 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit................................................................233 8.24 Using IP Ping Commands to Locate Ethernet Service Faults......................................................................234 8.25 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services.............................................................237 8.25.1 Expanding/Collapsing Fibers and Cables............................................................................................237 8.25.2 Querying Optical Power of Fibers and Cables....................................................................................238 8.25.3 Querying the Radio Link Information.................................................................................................239 8.25.4 Querying the Radio Link Performance................................................................................................239 8.25.5 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode.....................................................240 8.25.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.............................................................................241 8.25.7 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services........................................................................................241 8.25.8 Verifying Native Ethernet Services.....................................................................................................242 8.25.9 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.............................................................................244 8.25.10 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode.....................................................................246 8.25.11 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode)..............................248 8.25.12 Performing Intelligent Service Fault Diagnosis for Ethernet Services..............................................251 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................253
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)...............................................................................................................254 A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)....................................................................................................276 A.2.1 CST.......................................................................................................................................................278 A.2.2 CSH.......................................................................................................................................................278 A.2.3 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................280 A.2.4 IFU2......................................................................................................................................................280 A.2.5 IFX2......................................................................................................................................................281 A.2.6 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................282 A.2.7 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................282 A.2.8 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................283 A.2.9 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................283 A.2.10 EM6FA...............................................................................................................................................284 A.2.11 EFP8...................................................................................................................................................284 A.2.12 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................285 A.2.13 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................286 A.2.14 AUX....................................................................................................................................................286 A.2.15 PIU......................................................................................................................................................286 A.2.16 FAN....................................................................................................................................................286 A.2.17 ISU2....................................................................................................................................................286 A.2.18 ISX2....................................................................................................................................................287 A.2.19 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................288 A.2.20 ODU....................................................................................................................................................289 A.2.21 PMU....................................................................................................................................................289 A.2.22 TCU....................................................................................................................................................289 A.2.23 CQ1.....................................................................................................................................................290 A.2.24 ISV3....................................................................................................................................................290 A.2.25 EG4.....................................................................................................................................................291 A.2.26 EG4P...................................................................................................................................................292 A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures..................................................................................................................292 A.3.1 A_LOC.................................................................................................................................................292 A.3.2 ACR_LOCK_FAIL..............................................................................................................................293 A.3.3 ALM_E1RAI........................................................................................................................................295 A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dCSF.................................................................................................................................295 A.3.5 ALM_GFP_dLFD.................................................................................................................................296 A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LIF....................................................................................................................................298 A.3.7 ALM_IMA_LODS...............................................................................................................................299 A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................300 A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................302 A.3.10 ALM_IMA_RFI.................................................................................................................................303 A.3.11 AM_DOWNSHIFT............................................................................................................................305 A.3.12 APS_FAIL..........................................................................................................................................306 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.13 APS_INDI...........................................................................................................................................307 A.3.14 APS_MANUAL_STOP......................................................................................................................308 A.3.15 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC..................................................................................................309 A.3.16 AU_AIS..............................................................................................................................................310 A.3.17 AU_LOP.............................................................................................................................................311 A.3.18 B1_EXC..............................................................................................................................................312 A.3.19 B1_SD.................................................................................................................................................314 A.3.20 B2_EXC..............................................................................................................................................317 A.3.21 B2_SD.................................................................................................................................................319 A.3.22 B3_EXC..............................................................................................................................................321 A.3.23 B3_EXC_VC3....................................................................................................................................323 A.3.24 B3_SD.................................................................................................................................................325 A.3.25 B3_SD_VC3.......................................................................................................................................327 A.3.26 BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................330 A.3.27 BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................331 A.3.28 BD_NOT_INSTALLED.....................................................................................................................332 A.3.29 BD_STATUS......................................................................................................................................333 A.3.30 BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL................................................................................................................335 A.3.31 BIOS_STATUS..................................................................................................................................336 A.3.32 BIP_EXC............................................................................................................................................337 A.3.33 BIP_SD...............................................................................................................................................338 A.3.34 BOOTROM_BAD..............................................................................................................................340 A.3.35 BUS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................341 A.3.36 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN...................................................................................................................343 A.3.37 CES_APS_INDI.................................................................................................................................345 A.3.38 CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP............................................................................................................347 A.3.39 CES_JTROVR_EXC..........................................................................................................................348 A.3.40 CES_JTRUDR_EXC..........................................................................................................................349 A.3.41 CES_K1_K2_M..................................................................................................................................350 A.3.42 CES_K2_M.........................................................................................................................................351 A.3.43 CES_LOSPKT_EXC..........................................................................................................................352 A.3.44 CES_MALPKT_EXC.........................................................................................................................353 A.3.45 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC.............................................................................................................354 A.3.46 CES_RDI............................................................................................................................................355 A.3.47 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC....................................................................................................................356 A.3.48 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT......................................................................................................357 A.3.49 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI.................................................................................................................358 A.3.50 CFCARD_FAILED............................................................................................................................358 A.3.51 CFCARD_OFFLINE..........................................................................................................................359 A.3.52 CHCS..................................................................................................................................................361 A.3.53 CLK_LOCK_FAIL.............................................................................................................................362 A.3.54 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE................................................................................................................364 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.55 COMMUN_FAIL...............................................................................................................................365 A.3.56 COM_EXTECC_FULL......................................................................................................................367 A.3.57 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT....................................................................................................................368 A.3.58 DBMS_DELETE................................................................................................................................370 A.3.59 DBMS_ERROR..................................................................................................................................370 A.3.60 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE...............................................................................................................371 A.3.61 DCNSIZE_OVER...............................................................................................................................372 A.3.62 DDN_LFA..........................................................................................................................................373 A.3.63 DOWN_E1_AIS.................................................................................................................................374 A.3.64 DROPRATIO_OVER.........................................................................................................................375 A.3.65 E1_LOC..............................................................................................................................................376 A.3.66 E1_LOS..............................................................................................................................................377 A.3.67 ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL...............................................................................................................379 A.3.68 ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.............................................................................................................380 A.3.69 ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................381 A.3.70 ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................382 A.3.71 ERPS_IN_PROTECTION..................................................................................................................383 A.3.72 ETH_APS_LOST...............................................................................................................................385 A.3.73 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH.......................................................................................................386 A.3.74 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL...............................................................................................................387 A.3.75 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH........................................................................................................388 A.3.76 ETH_CFM_AIS..................................................................................................................................389 A.3.77 ETH_CFM_LOC................................................................................................................................390 A.3.78 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE...................................................................................................................393 A.3.79 ETH_CFM_RDI.................................................................................................................................396 A.3.80 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI....................................................................................................................398 A.3.81 ETH_EFM_DF...................................................................................................................................401 A.3.82 ETH_EFM_EVENT...........................................................................................................................402 A.3.83 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK...................................................................................................................403 A.3.84 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT...................................................................................................................404 A.3.85 ETH_LOS...........................................................................................................................................405 A.3.86 ETH_NO_FLOW...............................................................................................................................406 A.3.87 ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL..............................................................................................................408 A.3.88 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL..........................................................................................................409 A.3.89 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT.......................................................................................................410 A.3.90 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP....................................................................................................................411 A.3.91 ETHOAM_RMT_SD.........................................................................................................................413 A.3.92 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP...................................................................................................................414 A.3.93 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP.........................................................................................................416 A.3.94 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS...................................................................................................................417 A.3.95 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT.......................................................................................................419 A.3.96 EXT_SYNC_LOS..............................................................................................................................420 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.97 EXT_TIME_LOC...............................................................................................................................421 A.3.98 FAN_AGING.....................................................................................................................................422 A.3.99 FAN_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................423 A.3.100 FCS_ERR.........................................................................................................................................424 A.3.101 FLOW_OVER..................................................................................................................................426 A.3.102 HARD_BAD.....................................................................................................................................427 A.3.103 HARD_NONSUPPORT...................................................................................................................428 A.3.104 HP_CROSSTR.................................................................................................................................429 A.3.105 HP_LOM..........................................................................................................................................431 A.3.106 HP_RDI............................................................................................................................................432 A.3.107 HP_REI.............................................................................................................................................432 A.3.108 HP_SLM...........................................................................................................................................433 A.3.109 HP_TIM............................................................................................................................................434 A.3.110 HP_UNEQ........................................................................................................................................435 A.3.111 HPAD_CROSSTR............................................................................................................................436 A.3.112 IF_CABLE_OPEN...........................................................................................................................437 A.3.113 IF_INPWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................438 A.3.114 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED..........................................................................................................440 A.3.115 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN..............................................................................................................441 A.3.116 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN.............................................................................................................442 A.3.117 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH............................................................................................................443 A.3.118 IN_PWR_ABN.................................................................................................................................444 A.3.119 IN_PWR_HIGH...............................................................................................................................446 A.3.120 IN_PWR_LOW................................................................................................................................447 A.3.121 INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...............................................................................................................449 A.3.122 J0_MM..............................................................................................................................................450 A.3.123 K1_K2_M.........................................................................................................................................451 A.3.124 K2_M................................................................................................................................................452 A.3.125 LAG_BWMM...................................................................................................................................454 A.3.126 LAG_DOWN....................................................................................................................................455 A.3.127 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN................................................................................................................455 A.3.128 LAG_PORT_FAIL...........................................................................................................................457 A.3.129 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL...................................................................................................................459 A.3.130 LAN_LOC........................................................................................................................................461 A.3.131 LASER_CLOSED............................................................................................................................462 A.3.132 LASER_MOD_ERR.........................................................................................................................463 A.3.133 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX.................................................................................................................464 A.3.134 LASER_SHUT.................................................................................................................................466 A.3.135 LCAS_FOPR....................................................................................................................................467 A.3.136 LCAS_FOPT....................................................................................................................................468 A.3.137 LCAS_PLCR....................................................................................................................................470 A.3.138 LCAS_PLCT....................................................................................................................................471 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.139 LCAS_TLCR....................................................................................................................................473 A.3.140 LCAS_TLCT....................................................................................................................................474 A.3.141 LCD..................................................................................................................................................475 A.3.142 LCS_LIMITED.................................................................................................................................477 A.3.143 LFA...................................................................................................................................................479 A.3.144 LICENSE_LOST..............................................................................................................................481 A.3.145 LINK_ERR.......................................................................................................................................482 A.3.146 LMFA...............................................................................................................................................483 A.3.147 LOOP_ALM.....................................................................................................................................484 A.3.148 LP_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................487 A.3.149 LP_R_FIFO......................................................................................................................................488 A.3.150 LP_RDI.............................................................................................................................................489 A.3.151 LP_RDI_VC12.................................................................................................................................490 A.3.152 LP_RDI_VC3...................................................................................................................................491 A.3.153 LP_REI.............................................................................................................................................492 A.3.154 LP_REI_VC12..................................................................................................................................493 A.3.155 LP_REI_VC3....................................................................................................................................494 A.3.156 LP_RFI.............................................................................................................................................495 A.3.157 LP_SLM...........................................................................................................................................495 A.3.158 LP_SLM_VC12................................................................................................................................496 A.3.159 LP_SLM_VC3..................................................................................................................................497 A.3.160 LP_T_FIFO.......................................................................................................................................498 A.3.161 LP_TIM............................................................................................................................................499 A.3.162 LP_TIM_VC12.................................................................................................................................500 A.3.163 LP_TIM_VC3...................................................................................................................................501 A.3.164 LP_UNEQ.........................................................................................................................................503 A.3.165 LP_UNEQ_VC12.............................................................................................................................504 A.3.166 LP_UNEQ_VC3...............................................................................................................................505 A.3.167 LPS_UNI_BI_M...............................................................................................................................506 A.3.168 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT.................................................................................................................507 A.3.169 LPT_INEFFECT...............................................................................................................................508 A.3.170 LPT_RFI...........................................................................................................................................510 A.3.171 LSR_BCM_ALM.............................................................................................................................511 A.3.172 LSR_NO_FITED..............................................................................................................................512 A.3.173 LSR_WILL_DIE..............................................................................................................................513 A.3.174 LTI....................................................................................................................................................514 A.3.175 MAC_EXT_EXC.............................................................................................................................515 A.3.176 MAC_FCS_EXC..............................................................................................................................517 A.3.177 MOD_COM_FAIL...........................................................................................................................518 A.3.178 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................519 A.3.179 MP_DELAY.....................................................................................................................................520 A.3.180 MP_DOWN......................................................................................................................................521 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.181 MPLS_PW_AIS...............................................................................................................................523 A.3.182 MPLS_PW_BDI...............................................................................................................................524 A.3.183 MPLS_PW_Excess...........................................................................................................................525 A.3.184 MPLS_PW_LOCV...........................................................................................................................526 A.3.185 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH................................................................................................................528 A.3.186 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE.................................................................................................................529 A.3.187 MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL....................................................................................................................529 A.3.188 MPLS_PW_RDI...............................................................................................................................531 A.3.189 MPLS_PW_SD.................................................................................................................................531 A.3.190 MPLS_PW_SF.................................................................................................................................532 A.3.191 MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG................................................................................................................533 A.3.192 MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP................................................................................................................534 A.3.193 MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER.................................................................................................................535 A.3.194 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN.................................................................................................................536 A.3.195 MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS.....................................................................................................................537 A.3.196 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI.....................................................................................................................537 A.3.197 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess.................................................................................................................538 A.3.198 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI.....................................................................................................................539 A.3.199 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV.................................................................................................................540 A.3.200 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH......................................................................................................541 A.3.201 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE.......................................................................................................542 A.3.202 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL..........................................................................................................543 A.3.203 MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI.....................................................................................................................544 A.3.204 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD.......................................................................................................................545 A.3.205 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF.......................................................................................................................546 A.3.206 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG......................................................................................................547 A.3.207 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP......................................................................................................548 A.3.208 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER.......................................................................................................549 A.3.209 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN.......................................................................................................549 A.3.210 MS_AIS............................................................................................................................................550 A.3.211 MS_CROSSTR.................................................................................................................................552 A.3.212 MS_RDI............................................................................................................................................553 A.3.213 MS_REI............................................................................................................................................554 A.3.214 MSAD_CROSSTR...........................................................................................................................555 A.3.215 MULTI_RPL_OWNER....................................................................................................................556 A.3.216 MW_AM_TEST...............................................................................................................................557 A.3.217 MW_BER_EXC...............................................................................................................................558 A.3.218 MW_BER_SD..................................................................................................................................561 A.3.219 MW_CFG_MISMATCH..................................................................................................................565 A.3.220 MW_CONT_WAVE........................................................................................................................566 A.3.221 MW_E1_LOST.................................................................................................................................567 A.3.222 MW_FEC_UNCOR..........................................................................................................................568 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.223 MW_LIM..........................................................................................................................................571 A.3.224 MW_LOF.........................................................................................................................................573 A.3.225 MW_RDI..........................................................................................................................................578 A.3.226 NESF_LOST.....................................................................................................................................579 A.3.227 NESOFT_MM..................................................................................................................................581 A.3.228 NO_BD_SOFT.................................................................................................................................584 A.3.229 NP1_MANUAL_STOP....................................................................................................................585 A.3.230 NP1_SW_FAIL................................................................................................................................586 A.3.231 NP1_SW_INDI.................................................................................................................................587 A.3.232 NTP_SYNC_FAIL...........................................................................................................................588 A.3.233 OCD..................................................................................................................................................589 A.3.234 ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN..............................................................................................590 A.3.235 ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN......................................................................................................592 A.3.236 ODC_DOOR_OPEN........................................................................................................................594 A.3.237 ODC_FAN_FAILED........................................................................................................................596 A.3.238 ODC_HUMI_ABN...........................................................................................................................597 A.3.239 ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN..............................................................................................................598 A.3.240 ODC_MDL_ABN.............................................................................................................................601 A.3.241 ODC_POWER_FAIL.......................................................................................................................603 A.3.242 ODC_SMOKE_OVER.....................................................................................................................605 A.3.243 ODC_SURGE_PROTECTION_FAIL.............................................................................................606 A.3.244 ODC_TEC_ALM.............................................................................................................................608 A.3.245 ODC_TEMP_ABN...........................................................................................................................609 A.3.246 ODC_WATER_ALM.......................................................................................................................611 A.3.247 OUT_PWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................612 A.3.248 OUT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.........................................................................................................614 A.3.249 OUT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.........................................................................................................615 A.3.250 PASSWORD_NEED_CHANGE.....................................................................................................616 A.3.251 PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT...............................................................................................................617 A.3.252 PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT..........................................................................................................618 A.3.253 PATCH_PKGERR...........................................................................................................................618 A.3.254 PG_LINK_FAIL...............................................................................................................................619 A.3.255 PG_PRT_DEGRADED....................................................................................................................620 A.3.256 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH.................................................................................................................621 A.3.257 PORTMODE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................622 A.3.258 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC....................................................................................................................623 A.3.259 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE...........................................................................................................625 A.3.260 POWER_ABNORMAL...................................................................................................................626 A.3.261 POWER_ALM.................................................................................................................................627 A.3.262 PPP_LCP_FAIL...............................................................................................................................628 A.3.263 PPP_NCP_FAIL...............................................................................................................................630 A.3.264 PTP_SOURCE_SWITCH................................................................................................................630 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

Contents

A.3.265 PTP_TIMESTAMP_ABN................................................................................................................632 A.3.266 PW_DROPPKT_EXC......................................................................................................................633 A.3.267 PW_NO_TRAFFIC..........................................................................................................................634 A.3.268 PWAPS_LOST.................................................................................................................................635 A.3.269 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................636 A.3.270 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL.................................................................................................................637 A.3.271 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................638 A.3.272 R_LOC..............................................................................................................................................639 A.3.273 R_LOF..............................................................................................................................................640 A.3.274 R_LOS..............................................................................................................................................642 A.3.275 R_OOF..............................................................................................................................................644 A.3.276 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF...........................................................................................646 A.3.277 RADIO_MUTE................................................................................................................................647 A.3.278 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH............................................................................................................648 A.3.279 RADIO_RSL_HIGH........................................................................................................................649 A.3.280 RADIO_RSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................650 A.3.281 RADIO_TSL_HIGH.........................................................................................................................652 A.3.282 RADIO_TSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................652 A.3.283 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL........................................................................................................653 A.3.284 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE...........................................................................................................654 A.3.285 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR.............................................................................................................655 A.3.286 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR.............................................................................................................655 A.3.287 RMFA...............................................................................................................................................656 A.3.288 RPS_INDI.........................................................................................................................................657 A.3.289 RS_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................659 A.3.290 RTC_FAIL........................................................................................................................................661 A.3.291 S1_SYN_CHANGE.........................................................................................................................661 A.3.292 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL...........................................................................................................663 A.3.293 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL.......................................................................................................................664 A.3.294 SECU_ALM.....................................................................................................................................665 A.3.295 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD..................................................................................................................666 A.3.296 SSL_CERT_NOENC.......................................................................................................................667 A.3.297 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT..................................................................................................668 A.3.298 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH..........................................................................................................669 A.3.299 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH.....................................................................................................669 A.3.300 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL..................................................................................................................670 A.3.301 SWDL_INPROCESS.......................................................................................................................671 A.3.302 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK..................................................................................................................672 A.3.303 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT..............................................................................................................673 A.3.304 SWDL_PKGVER_MM....................................................................................................................673 A.3.305 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL.............................................................................................................674 A.3.306 SYN_BAD........................................................................................................................................675 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

.............................................3..................727 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...............................................722 A......334 VCAT_LOM_VC12.............3........3.3...............3..........................318 TIME_NO_TRACE_MODE....................................................................................................................................3.........................727 B.............................................340 VP_LOC.............................716 A...............................3...............................681 A....................701 A...............................................................................312 TEM_LA...............338 VOLT_LOS......342 W_R_FAIL..........................................................................................................678 A...................................................................1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.........699 A......................314 TEMP_OVER.......3........................................3............3...........3..........................................................706 A.............. Ltd....723 B Abnormal Event Reference...............................................................................................................328 UP_E1_AIS. xviii ................................................................................315 TF.........................................341 VP_RDI....................720 A..............................................309 T_ALOS.................................................323 TU_LOP......................................................................................................337 VCAT_SQM_VC3...............................3.........................................................................................................702 A.........................................3............691 A........3.........................................................................1 Major Abnormal Events List...............3......................................................................................................................3.....................................3.........................................................................................................693 A...........2 Abnormal Events and Handling Procedures........................319 TR_LOC................................................................................................688 A.....................................................3......................3...................................................332 VC_RDI.......3..335 VCAT_LOM_VC3............................................................................................................................................680 A.......................................................................................................330 VC_AIS.317 TIME_LOCK_FAIL...686 A..............676 A.....705 A..................................................................326 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED...........OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide Contents A.............................................3....................307 SYNC_C_LOS...........................708 A................697 A................................3...........................320 TU_AIS................................................................339 VP_AIS....................................................................................3.....711 A...........................2................................................................................................................................................3...........727 B............714 A...726 B.............3...........................................................3.............700 A.............................................................3..............................................682 A...........................................................................336 VCAT_SQM_VC12..311 TEM_HA..........................................................683 A....712 A.................................................................322 TU_AIS_VC3............................................................................................................331 VC_LOC..................................................................316 THUNDERALM......................................................................................329 V5_VCAIS.........................310 T_LOC.................690 A............................685 A.................................................3.............3...................3..........................................327 UHCS.................709 A......................................................................................................................................................3.308 SYSLOG_COMM_FAIL.................................................................................324 TU_LOP_VC12..........................................................................687 A.........................................723 A..............................715 A....718 A........................................677 A..........................................3................................333 VCAT_LOA........................3........................................................................................................313 TEMP_ALARM............................................................................................679 A..................................................................................................................................................321 TU_AIS_VC12............................................................................696 A.....................................3......................................................3..........3..........................................................................................................................................................3...........................343 WRG_BD_TYPE................3...........................................................................................344 XPIC_LOS...........................................................................703 A................................................684 A.................................695 A........325 TU_LOP_VC3..........................................................................................................

..............2.....................................2.................................................................................................................. HPFEES......................................3......................3 SNCP Switching............................7 System Control Board Switching.....3.............. IF_CSES...................................................................3.....................3 IFU2/ISU2.......... IF_ES.....................................................................................................2......................764 C........................................................787 C...................................741 C Performance Event Reference......................................781 C....12 SP3S/SP3D........792 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...............................................2.................10 EFP8.............................7 EM6TA........................................................ Ltd.....................................................3 RSBBE....................................................................................... TUPJCLOW....................................1............................ AUPJCLOW...1 AUPJCHIGH........781 C... MSFESES...... LPSES....6 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events.5 MSBBE...............................................9 EM6FA........................................2...........................................................756 C.............................5 Status Change of an APS Protection Group..........1 CST/CSH....2.............................. and HPFEUAS............................................1.....................................................................771 C....743 C.............................2..747 C................................729 B.3................4 RSOOF and RSOFS..........................................................................................................................................................780 C.........769 C.....9 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit...........................5 SL1D/SL1DA.........772 C..........3...........................733 B..............2 IF1................................10 LPBBE.....................750 C........................................782 C.........................2 TUPJCHIGH.......................................................................................740 B....2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)..............................................................................6 MSFEBBE.................785 C.......................................................737 B.................................................3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures...............2..............................................735 B................................. and HPUAS....................................................... MSFEES....... MSFECSES................................9 IF_BBE............................... RSES.......................13 ML1/MD1...................... HPES..................................8 EM6F...........................3..........768 C. xix ..................................2......................767 C.....731 B...................1 SDH/PDH Performance Event List..............2....... and MSFEUAS.... MSSES...............................7 HPBBE..... and LPUAS....754 C........................790 C...... LPCSES.................... RSSES..........................................................................................................751 C..........................................................................................................................786 C..............................................................2.................................... HPSES................ and TUPJCNEW.................................... MSCSES.................................................................................................................................................................3..........17 EG4/EG4P.........................3........2.742 C.................766 C................................... and RSUAS.......................................................................... HPCSES......................2...................3.......................................767 C.........788 C.............. MSES..................................................... RSCSES......760 C... and MSUAS............................................................................................................................2 Radio Performance Events..............................789 C..........................................................777 C...............................................................................................773 C...................................6 EM6T.............3..............2........11 EMS6.............2 N+1 Protection Switching..............................OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide Contents B.......................................2....................8 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit.......2......................................16 ISV3.......................................................2.783 C.......................................................................................... HPFECSES..........2....................... and AUPJCNEW..................2...................................774 C.743 C............................................................2.................15 CQ1......................................768 C.......................2... IF_SES.............................2..738 B.......................... HPFESES.....................................2.............................2.. and IF_UAS...........................14 ODU.....................4 IFX2/ISX2......1....................................................................................2.................................4 Linear MSP Switching..............................................................3 Other Performance Events...............................................................................1 Performance Events (by Event Type)..........................................752 C............ LPES............8 HPFEBBE.........................

..................................3..................................... E1_SES...............................851 D........................................... and TPLCUR............................................................. TPLMIN.........4......................... LPFECSES................3................ QAMWS1024........ QAM_S_WS16.......809 C..............3...........17 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST...........................30 CURPOSITIVEPDV and CURNEGATIVEPDV...........................................................808 C............ and E1_LSES_SDH........................................... and RSL_AVG...............816 D.. IF_SNR_MIN.3...................807 C.............................................................3............................ and IF_SNR_AVG.8 ETHFRG...............3...........................796 C............4.........855 D................2 ETHEXCCOL........................... MINFREQDEV............3..842 D................. and AVGPOSITIVEDELAY..........20 TPLMAX................ and OSPITMPCUR........... and E1_UAS.......853 D....1 List of RMON Alarm Entries..................... MPLS_PW_SLS................................12 E1_LCV_SDH...810 C.7 ETHOVER.801 C...... QAMWS128........ PG_IF_SES...3..................................795 C.......16 QPSKWS.....3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH Plane. and TLBCUR.............2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-Plane................................4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.................. OSPITMPMIN.....................854 D................... QAMWS256.................810 C......... RSL_MIN................................................... MINPHASEOFFSET...........................4..... and PG_IF_UAS................. E1_CSES. QPSK_S_WS..........................23 XPIC_XPD_VALUE.................33 MPLS_PW_LS.......4........... TSL_MIN.........................................................9 ETHJAB...................... LPFESES.........4...3................. QAMWS512..... TLLTT.799 C.....................3..................................................... FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT........................................................ LPFEES.....11 LPFEBBE............................... E1_LES_SDH...31 MAXPOSITIVEDELAY........... and LPFEUAS........................................... E1_LLOSS_SDH....................................................... QAMWS64................26 IF_SNR_MAX.15 FEC_BEF_COR_ER.......................................13 TSL_MAX............ QAMWS32.........................3............4 RXBBAD........................... and MPLS_PW_UAS.....19 RLHTT................................34 TLBMAX................................................3.......... MINMEANPATHDELAY...................................................4............................3..........................850 D......14 RSL_MAX................3..............................852 D............796 C.........................850 D....................................................21 RPLMAX.......................................... TLHTT.........................28 MAXMEANPATHDELAY....................... and AVGMEANPATHDELAY... PG_IF_ES.......32 MAXFREQDEV........................................................ and BDTEMPCUR..................... and QAM_L_WS1024........................803 C........800 C.........................29 MAXPHASEOFFSET.............................797 C..........................................4..............806 C.25 E1_BBE..................................................... QAM_L_WS512...24 PG_IF_BBE...............856 D... RLLTT.........................27 OSPITMPMAX...................857 D.....1 ETHDROP............3.794 C............................................3...................................... RSL_CUR....... RPLMIN..................................4...3.......................................798 C.... and AVGFREQDEV..18 AMDOWNCNT and AMUPCNT.....802 C............................................4................................3 ETHLATECOL..................3..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide Contents C..806 C....................................................................................................11 ETHFCS................................858 D............3.................... Ltd.... BDTEMPMIN................4.............................................................................................802 C...........3.......6 ETHUNDER.................4................................ and RPLCUR..................... MINPOSITIVEDELAY.................................................... PG_IF_CSES...... and TSL_AVG....................................................... and AVGPHASEOFFSET...........813 D...........859 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..................................3.................. xx ........................................................... QAMWS16........4........811 D RMON Event Reference....858 D...3....................804 C............................................ TLBMIN................. E1_ES..................800 C............5 TXDEFFRM.... MPLS_PW_CSLS...............3.....808 C.......................................... TSL_CUR...................................................12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS.793 C........22 BDTEMPMAX.............................................................................10 ETHCOL.......................................................................................................812 D.....855 D.3......................

..................................................................19 CES_MALPKTS......2 Board Performance Event Management.........................................................................7 UNEQ Insertion......2......................................21 CES_JTROVR................................... xxi ............................22 CES_LOSPKTS...........2 Board Alarm Management.........................................................................................................................4..........................................................865 D....................................870 E.................................................4.....................................................................................................864 D....874 F.................................................................................................869 E..................................2..........................860 D.......14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS............869 E..............................................................................................4..................................2 Alarm Suppression...........................................866 E Alarm Management.....................4..............................................865 D...............................................................................2.................................................................................................................................................................4.............................................4 Alarm Reversion............6 AIS Insertion...........................................................................................................................1 NE Alarm Management........................................874 G Alarm Suppression Relationship.............................................................................................20 CES_JTRUDR...............................871 E...................................4........................................................................4...................861 D..........869 E....................................873 F.................................................15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR...................................................................................................2................2....862 D...............................................................................................................5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold...............4.869 E....................................1 Setting the Alarm Severity..........................................................870 E............................3 Alarm Auto-Report............................................872 F Performance Event Management............................................................................4.............................861 D.......................879 I Glossary........868 E.............................................................................863 D....................................................................................17 CES_MISORDERPKTS...........................................................13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS...........................................................................900 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........................................................................4........................................16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR................OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide Contents D.............................................863 D........... Ltd.......................................................................2...875 H Indicators of Boards..........1 NE Performance Event Management...............................................18 CES_STRAYPKTS..........................................................869 E.2............................

3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions 1 About This Chapter Safety Precautions This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. operating. note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. operating fans. 1. Ltd.. 1. and routing cables. operate. 1. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. handling sharp objects. and carrying heavy objects.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. and maintaining Huawei devices. lightning strikes. and ESD. fuses. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1 . high leakage current. 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and maintain Huawei devices. 1. power cables. binding signal cables.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment. 1.

operating. When removing the device. Ltd. unplug the AC power connector. Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software).OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions 1.. operate. Before operating the device. always comply with the local laws and regulations. do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables. always disconnect the grounding facilities last. always connect the grounding facilities first. Local Laws and Regulations When operating a device. and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install. and to troubleshoot and maintain the device. 2 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. "WARNING". l l l l When installing the device. Grounding Requirements The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. All Safety Precautions To ensure the safety of humans and a device. The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector. and ensure that the device is properly grounded. Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor. and maintain Huawei devices. check the electrical connections of the device. The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge. They are supplements to the safety precautions. Basic Installation Requirements The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact. follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing. Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities. The "CAUTION". When there is risk of a lightning strike. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations. operate. and maintaining a device. and maintain a device. Human Safety l l When there is a risk of a lightning strike. l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT This symbol is for the laser class. Otherwise. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation. When the system is working. install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects. it may damage you eyes or skin. l Device Safety l l l l Before any operation. if required. clean up the packing materials.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment. When installing the front panel. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Otherwise. you may cause damage to the board. you need to get off the conductive objects. 1. In addition. ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 Symbol Indication This symbol is for ESD protection. Before operating the device.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 1 Safety Precautions The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals. Ltd. use a tool to tighten the screws firmly. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings. l l l To avoid electric shocks. note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. such as jewelry and watches. wear an ESD protective coat. ESD gloves. After installing the device. LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.. such as on a wall or in a rack. 3 . Otherwise. Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. and an ESD wrist strap. escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. human eyes may be hurt by laser beams. to prevent electric shock and burn. In case of fire.

or both. DANGER Do not perform operations on high voltage.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage. fuses. Ltd. towers. Thunderstorm The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders. 1.. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. High Voltage DANGER l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. 4 . power cables. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. 严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN ! This symbol is for fan safety. lightning strikes. AC power.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Symbol Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded. and ESD. ATTENTION 警告 CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗 A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically. high leakage current. or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

5 . Before connecting a power cable. place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark. which may cause fire or eye injury. the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. Otherwise. Short Circuits When installing and maintaining devices.. you must power off the device. DANGER Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on. Device with Power On DANGER Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on. ground the device. you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions High Leakage Current WARNING Before powering on a device. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l Before installing or removing power cables. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device. Power Cables DANGER Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. Ltd. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time. wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. circuit boards. Electrostatic Discharge CAUTION The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board. 6 . or ASICs.. clothing friction. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap. Fuse WARNING If the fuse on a device blows. such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). friction between shoes and the ground. Ltd. CAUTION Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body. plastics in the hand. l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement. do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack. replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions CAUTION To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver). Before operating a device.

The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard. and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage. it causes potential hazards to the device. prevent any shortcircuit.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap 1. 1. 7 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Misoperations may cause a short-circuit. During operation. DANGER Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. and ultimately damage the circuit boards. l l l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DANGER Before operating a storage battery.. A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. If the electrolyte overflows.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. which leads to human injuries.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. Ltd.

Battery Temperature CAUTION If a battery overheats. take appropriate measures immediately. Therefore. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited. If possible. Short-Circuit DANGER A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C. Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which may cause fire or device erosion. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. ensure that its electrodes are upward. note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l l l l l Use special insulation tools. 8 . disconnect the working battery before performing other operations. Before installing or maintaining the storage battery. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Ltd. ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery. you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows. and the electrolyte may overflow. ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed. When handling the storage battery. Hazardous Gas CAUTION Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. the battery may be deformed or damaged.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Basic Precautions To ensure safety. Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte..

When handling a leaky battery. 9 . When you find the electrolyte leaks. 1. the person must be sent to a hospital immediately. If a person contacts battery electrolyte. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. In case of a severe situation.. neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces CAUTION If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated. avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. Therefore.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. DANGER When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers.6.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Battery Leakage CAUTION In the event of acid overflow or spillage. Hence. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment. optical power commissioning is seriously affected. protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. Ltd. you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) In the event of acid overflow or spillage. clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. 1.

. Propyl alcohol. Ltd. Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface. Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. however. Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface. Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface Slanting optical interface Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. can also be used. Connecting Optical Fibers l l l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap. Replacing Optical Fibers When replacing an optical fiber. A high received optical power damages the optical interface. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin. used with the recommended cleaning solvent Special magnifier for fiber connectors For cleaning steps. 10 . Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton) Special cleaning roll. and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port. see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l l l l l l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol.

WARNING When handling optical fibers. or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection.6. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator. 1.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers. if in the transmit direction. 11 . If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay.. A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area. Ltd. do not stand close to. CAUTION Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.6. l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-3 Level optical interface Level optical interface 1. l 1.6.

viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei. the eyes may be damaged. if an optical tool such as a microscope. however. Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off. 12 .. Before cutting or splicing a fiber. and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device. magnifying glass.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. When a beam of light enters eyes. After disconnecting the fiber.6. cap to the fiber connectors. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials. switch off the transmitter in advance. follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment. Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. 1. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers To avoid laser radiation. or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber. or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals. Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off. Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: l l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers. WARNING Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. In normal cases. a magnifying glass. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light. ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. Eye injury may occur. obey the following instructions: l l l l l l l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses. Ltd.

. Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations. l l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations. do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing. 1. ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity. Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas. be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. 13 . Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work. WARNING When heavy objects are being hoisted. Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting. must be taken. Before hoisting heavy objects. as shown in Figure 1-4. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. and ensure that they are intact.7. Before hoisting heavy objects. Safety measures. operating. such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt. and maintaining Huawei devices. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l l l l l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions 1. Ltd. Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down. WARNING When working at heights. check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition.

ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward. Avoid overweighing the ladder. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. check whether the ladder is damaged.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms.. When using a ladder. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects 1. Before using a ladder. you can use the ladder. Ltd. to prevent the ladder from sliding. you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. or take protection measures for the ladder feet. 14 .7. Checking Ladders l l Before using a ladder. as shown in Figure 1-5. Placing Ladders The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. After checking that the ladder is in good condition.

Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down). Ltd. 15 . If you want to climb up a roof.. pay attention to the following points: l l l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder Climbing Up a Ladder When climbing up a ladder. Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks. as shown in Figure 1-6. Before operations. ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof.

place the objects such as the parts. operating fans. screws. and tools properly. keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Drilling Holes WARNING Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions 1. Carrying Heavy Objects Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. 16 . handling sharp objects. In addition. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps. if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet. Wear protection gloves when drilling holes. Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. l l l l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet. the hands or the boards are damaged. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device. Ltd. When replacing the parts near fans.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes. Sharp Objects WARNING Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans. Otherwise. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. Fans l l When replacing parts. After the drilling. clean up the metallic scraps.. Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent hands from being hurt. the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. which damages the fans or device. remove the cables inside the cabinet.

components. connectors. Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage. Binding Signal Cables CAUTION Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down. l Generally. l l l Slide the board along the guide rails. or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components. Routing Cables In the case of extremely low temperature. the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained. heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. do not touch the board circuits. l 1. pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. fan modules. wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. and routing cables. and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. To ensure the construction safety.. such as the power modules.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions WARNING l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. and boards.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards. comply with the following requirements: Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 17 . Ltd. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. Removing and Inserting a Board CAUTION When inserting a board. When carrying a chassis. When holding a board in hand. two persons are needed to carry a chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis. which may hurt you. hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. binding signal cables. When moving or lifting a chassis. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet.

ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C. the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70°C. Handle the cables gently. you must wear the protection gloves. for example. Do not perform any improper operations. IF Cables WARNING Before installing or removing an IF cable. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions l l When installing cables. Ltd. l High Temperature WARNING If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C. If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C.. especially in a low-temperature environment. 18 . transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. you must turn off the power switch of the IF board. pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

2. Ltd. 19 .4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations About This Chapter This topic provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment.. turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2. shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before installing or removing IF jumpers. 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables Before installing or removing IF cables. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.

1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. 20 . Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch O: OFF I : ON Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2. Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.. as shown in Figure 2-1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

21 . Ltd. Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2. Release the toggle lever switch. 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Turn it to the right. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.. Turn it to the left. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3.

22 . Release the toggle lever switch. Ltd.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before installing or removing IF jumpers.. Procedure Step 1 Follow instructions in 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 3. shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch to power off the ODU.

Ltd.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch to power off the ODU..3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables Before installing or removing IF cables. shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 1 2 DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper. Procedure Step 1 Follow instructions in 2. Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper. 23 . ----End 2.

Step 2 Install or remove the IF cables. For details. Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board. Ltd.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch. see 2. ----End 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 24 . turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 1 2 DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 1 2 3 3 DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.. 25 . ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. Ltd.

Ltd. field maintenance items for indoor equipment. Routine Maintenance Items Carried Out on the NMS Recomm ended Mainten ance Cycle Every day Every day Every week Every week Every week Every week Every week Remarks Checking the NE Status Browsing Current Alarms Browsing History Alarms Browsing Abnormal Events Browsing Current Performance Events Browsing History Performance Events Browsing History Transmit Power and Receive Power - Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For the . and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment. Routine maintenance operations are preventive measures. routine maintenance items are classified into routine maintenance items carried out on the network management system (NMS).OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 3 Routine Maintenance 3 Maintenance Item Routine Maintenance Routine maintenance operations are performed to detect and rectify hidden faults before the hidden faults cause damage to equipment and affect services. 26 ..

the protected services are interrupted. During the 1+1 protection switching. or other exceptional circumstances. Applies only to the equipment that is configured with N+1 protection. 27 . it is recommended that you perform the 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 3 Routine Maintenance Maintenance Item Recomm ended Mainten ance Cycle Half a year Remarks Testing IF 1+1 Switching Applies only to the equipment that is configured in 1+1 protection mode. Hence.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. an earthquake. Testing the IF N+1 Switching Half a year Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment Maintenance Item Checking the Telecommunications Room Maintaining the Environment of Outdoor Cabinets Recommended Maintenance Cycle Every two months Half a year Remarks - Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment Maintenance Item Recommended Maintenance Cycle Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Remarks Checking the ODU Checking the Hybrid Coupler Checking the Antenna Checking the IF Cable Checking the LOS Condition Carry out a complete check after a level-8 or higher hurricane.

4. 28 . 4. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance 4 About This Chapter Emergency Maintenance Emergency maintenance operations are performed in the case of emergencies or natural factors that may result in emergencies during the operation of the equipment.1 Definition of Emergency For microwave equipment.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance The procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure for field troubleshooting. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance Emergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults. an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services. 4.. This is different from troubleshooting.

4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance Emergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. Ltd. and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. 29 . This is different from troubleshooting. whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance The procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure for field troubleshooting.. NOTE In the case of emergency events. an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services. the customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center of Huawei at 400-830-2118. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance 4.1 Definition of Emergency For microwave equipment. 4.

Ltd. 30 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance Main Procedure for Emergency Maintenance Figure 4-1 Main procedure for emergency maintenance Start 1 Is there an incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel the operation 2 Service interruoted by external causes? Yes Contact related departments to handle the problem 3 No Query NE status and alarms by using the NMS 4 NE access successful and alaarms cleared? No Rectify the fault on site Yes Clear the alarm Proceed with the next step No Is the service restored? Yes Is the service restored? Yes 5 Check the troubleshooting result No Contact Huawei engineers End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

LP_UNEQ.. NESF_LOST. APS_FAIL. ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI. ensuring that subsequent faults can be handled in time.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance Table 4-1 Description of the main procedure for emergency maintenance Comment No. the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS: APS_MANUAL_STOP. including the power supply. HP_TIM. LP_SLM. HP_UNEQ. IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN. ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL. Check the alarms. proceed as follows: 1. If alarms are reported on the NE. WRG_BD_TYPE. LOOP_ALM. 2. and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) The procedure is as follows: 1. LP_TIM. 2. record the fault symptoms and troubleshooting results. Ltd. J0_MM. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows: l Modifying data configuration l Performing loopback operations l Shutting down the laser l Muting the ODU l Replacing boards/cables l Loading the software 2 3 Faults owing to external factors. Table 4-2 shows the field maintenance operation sheet. DBMS_ERROR. NESOFT_MM. ETH_APS_LOST. browse the current alarms. Check the NE status. environment. Assign personnel to monitor the operation of the system during the peak service hour. After the fault is rectified. 5 Table 4-2 Field maintenance operation sheet Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Entire Procedure Maintained by Troubleshooting Result Remarks Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH. LPS_UNI_BI_M. ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK. RADIO_MUTE. 31 . cables. and then send them to Huawei. Fill in the field maintenance operation sheet. If the NE is unreachable to the NMS. MW_CFG_MISMATCH. IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN. 3. and ensure that the system is running properly. perform field troubleshooting according to Figure 4-2. BD_NOT_INSTALLED. 4 Generally.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Entire Procedure Maintained by Troubleshooting Result Remarks Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 32 ..

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance Field Troubleshooting Sub-Procedure Figure 4-2 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure Start Obvious equipment Yes damage? No Repair or replace the equipment Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on? 2 Yes Browse alarms locally by using the LCT 3 Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 Yes Yes No 1 Troubleshoot the power input Clear the alarm Clear the alarm High order path alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm 6 Low order path alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm Faulty interconnection with SDH/PDH equipment? No Yes 7 Troubleshoot the inter-connection faulty 8 Packet service fault? No Yes Troubleshoot the packet service fault Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Proceed to the next step No Is the service restored? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 33 .. Ltd.

especially the connectors of the power cables. replace the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. and timing board. NOTE The recommended fuse capacity of 10 A can meet requirements under the maximum power consumption. 2. 3. 34 . Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect. Checking Alarms. NOTE If you fail to log in to the created NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance Table 4-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure Comment No. The following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity: Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1. Logging In to an NE (Web LCT). see the IDU Hardware Description. 1 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. 3. find the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity). and rectify the fault accordingly. For details about the indicators. The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -72. 2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1.0 V. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. Ltd. contact power engineers for troubleshooting. If the circuit breaker is automatically turned off. ensure that the operations you performed are correct. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements. switching. 4. 2.5) / (Rated voltage x 87. Check the power cables. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. 3 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HARD_BAD l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l IF_CABLE_OPEN l VOLT_LOS Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system control.5%).

9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults. 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs. 35 . 5. 5..7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment. and 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 4 Emergency Maintenance Comment No. Ltd.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services. 4 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l PG_LINK_FAIL l PG_PRT_DEGRADED l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC l MW_BER_EXC 5 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HP_LOM l B3_EXC l HP_UNEQ 6 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TU_AIS l TU_LOP l BIP_EXC l LP_UNEQ l T_ALOS l E1_LOC 7 8 See 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services. See 5.

regenerator section (RS). 5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure When handling a fault. higher order path (HP).6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH equipment. there are pointer justification faults.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link When an NE reports MW_LOF.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault. there are bit errors in services. there is a radio link fault. 5. 5. 5. 5. Ltd.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH equipment.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU) pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer. MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118. 36 . or lower order path (LP).8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration. and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. 5.. make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. multiplex section (MS). Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board. 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 5 About This Chapter Troubleshooting This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedure and the methods of rectifying the common faults. MW_BER_EXC. 5.

37 .14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal.11 Troubleshooting CES Services This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded. 5. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 5. 5. 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or MPLS Ping/Traceroute function.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and transmitted in the PSN. 5. there is an orderwire fault. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and service degradation.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM network. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted or deteriorate. 5.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. Ltd..1 General Troubleshooting Procedure When handling a fault. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118. 38 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure Start 1 Record the fault phenomena 2 Caused by external factors? No Yes Other troubleshooting procedures 3 Analyze fault causes and locate the fault Is the fault rectified? 4 Yes No Report to Huawei Make a solution together Attempt to rectify the fault No Is the service restored? Yes Observe the operation No Is the fault rectified? Yes Fill in the troubleshooting report End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 39 .

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure Comment No.. Ltd. l l The transmission NE or link is faulty. and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. Fault Causes l The operation is improper. 2. If the fault cannot be located through the alarm analysis method.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions. and lower order path alarm. 1 Description When recording the fault phenomena. environment. You can use the clickto-collect function on the NMS to collect data. If multiple NEs report alarms. Record the exact time when the fault occurs and the operations performed before and after the fault occurs. and other important information. line alarm. 40 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . and then locate the fault based on the alarm analysis. To provide feedbacks or obtain technical support. and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) If the fault is caused by the equipment. or the board is replaced. The configuration data changes. see 5. analyze the alarms in the following order: equipment alarm. Faults owing to external factors. 2 3 4 5. Fault Locating Methods 1. 3. customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118. performance events. If the transmission equipment functions normally and the connection is normal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. including the power supply. the loopback is performed. Check the operations before the service interruption to determine whether the service interruption results from an incorrect operation. Query alarms on the centralized NMS or the NMS that is used on the site.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault. Save the alarms. check whether the interconnection between the transmission equipment is proper and whether the switch equipment is faulty. cables. the cable is replaced. higher order path alarm. The interconnection is improper. locate the fault by performing loopback section by section or replacing the corresponding parts. make a true and detailed record of the entire process of the fault.

. Ltd. Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-2 General procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption Start 1 Incorrect operation? Yes Cancel the operation No 2 Service interrupted by external causes? No Query NE status and alarms by using the centralized NMS Yes Contact related departments to solve the problem 3 4 NE access successful and alarms cleared? No Yes Clear the alarm Rectify the fault on site Proceed with the next step No Service restored? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 41 . restore the services quickly by adjusting the service route or performing a forced switching.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting CAUTION If the fault cannot be rectified immediately.

LP_SLM..3 Browsing Current Alarms. J0_MM. Generally. and WRG_BD_TYPE Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS: APS_MANUAL_STOP. including the power supply. BD_NOT_INSTALLED.3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-2 Description of the general procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption Comment No. MW_CFG_MISMATCH. NESF_LOST. APS_FAIL. and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) For details. HP_TIM.1 Checking the NE Status and 8. LPS_UNI_BI_M. DBMS_ERROR. 42 . Ltd. RADIO_MUTE.3. LP_TIM. NESOFT_MM. LOOP_ALM. environment. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows: l Modifying the data configuration l Loopback l Shutting down the laser l Muting the ODU l Replacing the board or cable l Loading the software 2 3 4 Faults owing to external factors. HP_UNEQ. LP_UNEQ. see 8. cables.

Ltd. 43 ..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Figure 5-3 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure Start Obvious equipment Yes damage? No Repair or replace the equipment Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on? 2 Yes Browse alarms locally by using the LCT 3 Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 Yes Yes No 1 Troubleshoot the power input Clear the alarm Clear the alarm High order path alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm 6 Low order path alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm Faulty interconnection with SDH/PDH equipment? No Yes 7 Troubleshoot the inter-connection faulty 8 Packet service fault? No Yes Troubleshoot the packet service fault Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Proceed to the next step No Is the service restored? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

see the IDU Hardware Description. The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges from -38. The following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity: Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1.5%). replace the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables. NOTE The fuse capacity should meet the requirement of actual power consumption. ensure that the operations you performed are correct. contact power engineers for troubleshooting. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. find the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity).5) / (Rated voltage x 87. and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system control. Ltd. 2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. and rectify the fault accordingly. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU 2. If the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect. 3. especially the connectors of the power cables. and timing board. 1 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Logging In to an NE (Web LCT) 4. 44 . For details about the indicators.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure Comment No. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements..4 V to -72. 3 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HARD_BAD l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l IF_CABLE_OPEN l VOLT_LOS Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check the power cables. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. 2. If the circuit breaker is automatically turned off. switching.0 V. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method 3. Checking Alarms NOTE If you fail to log in to the created NE.

12 Troubleshooting ATM Services.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs. 45 .8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults. Ltd. Experience and Summary The maintenance personnel need to perform the routine maintenance operations periodically.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment. 5. See 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane. 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.. 5. to detect and rectify faults before the faults affect the services and therefore to reduce the equipment fault rate. 4 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l PG_LINK_FAIL l PG_PRT_DEGRADED l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC l MW_BER_EXC 5 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HP_LOM l B3_EXC l HP_UNEQ 6 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TU_AIS l TU_LOP l BIP_EXC l LP_UNEQ l T_ALOS l E1_LOC 7 8 See 5. and 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services.

Link fading is more difficult to locate and handle than hardware faults. Ltd. MW_BER_EXC. MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link. and poor waterproofing Figure 5-4 Radio link faults Causes of radio link faults Propagation faults Poor construction quality Equipment faults Interference Fading Poor LOS Antenna installation Cables External interference Over-reach interference Rain fading Multipath fading Reflection LOS not achieved Near-field blocking Antennas not aligned Antennas loosened or offset Poor grounding Hardware Faults Power faults Poor waterproofing Damaged cable components Fading Phenomena and Causes During microwave network maintenance. Fading Cause l Multi-path fading l Duct-type fading l Rain fading Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. cable faults. Table 5-4 Fading phenomena and causes Fading Type Classifie d by RSL Down fading Fading Phenomena The RSL is lower than the RSL after free space fading. including fading.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link When an NE reports MW_LOF.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 5. Radio Link Faults Radio link faults are classified into: l l l Equipment faults. 46 . link fading is the main cause for radio link faults.. The difference can be tens of decibels. including poor antenna/component installation. there is a radio link fault. poor grounding. including outdoor component faults. interference. and power supply faults Propagation faults. and poor line of sight (LOS) Poor construction quality.

The fading lasts from several milliseconds to tens of seconds. To be specific. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Slow down fading is caused by rain. It occurs periodically. Ltd. The difference can be 10-odd decibels.. and therefore is also called rain fading. 47 . l Generally. Rain fading occurs on links working at a frequency of 10 GHz or in areas where heavy rain occurs. Fading Cause l Interference l Long delay caused by terrain reflection l Multi-path fading l Duct-type fading l Long delay caused by terrain reflection Classifie d by fading duration Fast fading Slow fading The fading lasts from tens of seconds to several hours. fast fading occurs in the period from 18:00 to 20:00 of a day or in a certain season of a year.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Fading Type Up fading Fading Phenomena The RSL is higher than the RSL in the free space. Generally. fast fading is caused by multipath fading. slow up fading is caused by interference.

2 Hardware alarms exist? No Yes Rectify equipment faults. Rain fading Troubleshoot the fault as a non-radio link fault.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-5 Procedure for troubleshooting the radio link Start 1 Is there an incorrect operation? No Yes Undo the operation. Ltd. Passive components like hybrid couplers or flexible waveguides are faulty. 6 Is the RSL value always less than the designed value? No 7 Yes Yes The antennas are offset. Yes Multipath fading Terrain reflection 9 Is the fault rectified? No Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 48 . RSL greater than the receiver sensitivity? No Yes Is it raining when the fault occurs? No 8 Does the fault occur regularly? No Troubleshoot the fault by replacing the suspected faulty parts. 3 Are there IF or RF alarms on the link? No Yes 4 Analyze the historical RSL records and the current RSL value 5 Co-channel or adjacentchannel interference Long delay caused by terrain reflection The link is blocked.

4 Browsing Current Performance Events of the radio link and 8. If there is an intensively reflective terrain. 49 .3.11 Scanning Interfering Signals or use a frequency spectrum analyzer to locate the possible interfering frequencies. If the RSL value is larger than -90 dBm. which caused the local or remote NE to be unreachable to the NMS l Muting the radio transmitter. MW_BER_SD. which caused the MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm to be reported l Enabling an AM self-check. always at midnight). 1. MW_LIM. replan the route to avoid the intensively reflective terrain. which caused the MW_AM_TEST alarm l Enabling IF consecutive wave output 2 Hardware fault alarms include: l HARD_BAD l RADIO_TSL_HIGH. Alternatively. 5 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Follow instructions in 8. RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH l AM_DOWNSHIFT 4 RSL is the major reference for locating and handling propagation faults.15 Replacing the ODU. If a third-party RF device is the interfering source. 3 IF and RF alarms include: l MW_LOF. there may be co-channel interference that affects long-term availability and error-second performance of the system.3. Ltd. RADIO_TSL_LOW 6. Check whether there are rivers or lakes on the propagation trail.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-5 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the radio link Mark 1 Description Check whether any misoperation has been performed: l Shutting down the power supply. which caused the RADIO_MUTE alarm to be reported l Looping back IF ports. 2. contact the local frequency spectrum management department to clear the interference. Follow instructions in 8. MW_FEC_UNCOR l RADIO_RSL_HIGH.5 Browsing Historical Performance Data of a Radio Link to browse and analyze the historical RSL records and the current RSL value. adjust the mounting height of the antenna to change the link elevation. there may be a fault caused by terrain reflection. If receive power changes radically within seconds (fluctuation range varying from more than 10 dB to dozens of dB) and the change occurs periodically (for example.. If interference is caused due to improper route planning. which caused the LOOP_ALM alarm to be reported l Configuring incorrect radio link data. Mute the opposite NE and check the RSL at the local NE. therefore minimizing reflection impacts. MW_RDI l MW_BER_EXC. modify the frequency plan to minimize the interference impacts.

the refractivity gradient. no special handling operations are required. adjust antennas to move reflection points out of the strong reflection areas or mask the reflection by using landforms. and the planning algorithm are incorrect. l Reduce the path clearance. fast fading occurs. l Check whether loss increases because the antenna. 2. and bold mountain tops. Fast fading may occur due to: l Multi-path fading: Faults occur periodically. l Reduce surface reflection. l Check whether there are any blocks in the radio transmission trail or in the near field of the antenna. and flexible waveguide are not intact or are wet. check whether the link fading margin is insufficient. proceed as follows: l Increase the path inclination: That is. replace the faulty components. for example. l Duct-type fading: random fast fading To handle fast fading. flat lands. for example. Ltd. If yes. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. re-align the antenna. Before re-planning a radio link. Calculate the actual link availability. the link fading margin is insufficient. For a fault caused by weather fading.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Mark 6 Description If the RSL value had been smaller than the designed value for a long time before the fault occurred. Calculate the total link fault time within one year or half a year. If yes. 8 If the receive power fluctuates greatly and fast (by more than 10 dB or several 10 dB within several seconds or several 10 seconds).. lower antenna mount heights as much as possible. at the day-and-night alternating time period. the fault cause was weather fading. or foggy) and was rectified after the conditions disappeared. If yes. l Use a frequency band on which rain fading has smaller impacts. large areas of water. Proceed as follows: l Check whether the antenna connection is loose or the antenna is unaligned. hybrid coupler. check whether the rain zone parameters. replan the radio link route. With LOS conditions guaranteed. l If the actual link availability is lower than the designed value by an order of magnitude. 50 . l If the difference between the actual link availability and the designed value is small. adjust the antenna mount heights at both ends to increase the height differences between the antennas at both ends. the propagation trail is faulty. 7 If a radio link fault occurred in poor weather conditions (such as rainy. 1. snowy. adjust the mounting height of the antenna to avoid blocks. For apparent strong reflection surfaces. The practicable measure could be as follows: l Increase the transmit power or replace the original antenna with a new one having a larger diameter to increase the system gain and the fading margin. Re-plan the radio link parameters. Calculate the actual link availability using the following formula: <Link availability> = <Total fault time>/<Calculation period>.

. Ltd. multiplex section (MS). 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Mark 9 Description If all preceding actions cannot rectify the fault. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) B1_EXC B1_SD RS_CROSSTR RSBBE RSES RSSES RSCSES Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or lower order path (LP). there are bit errors in services. replace the ODU at both ends. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l l MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH MW_LOF IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_CSES IF_UAS The RS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that works in SDH mode through the B1 overhead byte in the RS overhead. Fault Phenomena The IF bit errors refer to the bit errors that the IF board detects through the self-defined overhead byte in the microwave frame. replan the radio link by changing the operating frequency. ensure that the antenna is aligned properly. changing the antenna heights. Periodically collect and analyze the data about the changes in the transmit power and receive power so that you can detect and then rectify the incipient faults accordingly in time. check whether services are functional. higher order path (HP). or changing the routes. 51 . Experience and Summary l l During the commissioning. Then. using antennas with a larger diameter. regenerator section (RS). to prevent possible incipient faults. If the fault persists.

52 . In this case. Ltd. The MS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line board detects through the B2 byte in the MS overhead.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting l RSUAS NOTE The IF board that works in PDH mode may also detect the previous RS bit error alarms and performance events. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l B2_EXC B2_SD MS_CROSSTR MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS The HP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that works in SDH mode through the B3 byte in the HP overhead. the IF board detects bit error alarms and performance events in the PDH microwave frame through the self-defined B1 byte. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l B3_EXC B3_SD HP_CROSSTR HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS The LP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the tributary board or IF board detects through the V5 byte in the VC-12 overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l BIP_EXC BIP_SD LP_CROSSTR LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

When the quality of the clock over the network declines. l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty. the radio link is faulty. There are RS bit errors. l The quality of the clock over the network declines. a pointer justification event occurs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Fault Causes Table 5-6 Causes of bit errors Fault There are IF bit errors. – The common causes for bit errors on the optical line are as follows: the optical fiber line.. MW_BER_SD. 53 . MW_BER_SD. MW_LOF or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. – In the case of bit errors on the radio link. l The line is faulty. the optical power is abnormal. the radio link is faulty. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC. l The clock unit is faulty. Common Fault Cause l The radio link is faulty. the number of E1 services is inconsistent on both ends of the radio link. If yes. Ltd. the fiber performance deteriorates. Check whether the MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported. check whether the MW_BER_EXC. l The services are incorrectly configured. If yes. or the fiber connector is not clean. l The IF board at the local end or opposite end is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MW_FEC_UNCOR. MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes.

There are only LP bit errors. If you fail to locate the fault by analyzing the alarms and performance events. 54 . then MS bit errors. 4. 3. Analyze the equipment alarms and performance events that are related to service configuration errors and bit errors. l The tributary board is faulty. perform loopback operations section by section. Common Fault Cause l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty. or the equipment is not properly grounded. When the quality of the clock over the network declines. 2. l There is a power surge or an external interference source. HP bit errors. l The working temperature of the crossconnect unit is excessively high.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Fault There are not any RS bit errors but there are MS bit errors or HP bit errors. l The working temperature of the board is excessively high. l The cross-connect unit is faulty. and finally LP bit errors. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.. When there are many types of alarms and performance events on a service path. Ltd. l The working temperature of the line processing unit or IF board is excessively high. (This cause does not need to be considered during the troubleshooting of an IF board. first analyze RS bit errors. 5. first check whether the overlapping part of the service paths is faulty. l The quality of the clock over the network declines.) Fault Locating Methods 1. When multiple paths have bit errors. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a pointer justification event occurs.

Ltd. 55 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-6 Procedure for troubleshooting bit errors Start 1 2 Is there an equipment alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm 3 Is there a pointer justification event? No Yes Troubleshoot the pointer justification SDH optical interface board Troubleshoot RS bit errors on the SDH optical interface board Is there an RS bit error alarm or a performance event? Yes If the alarming board is IF board No 4 Troubleshoot RS bit errors on the IF board Is there an MS/ HP alarm or performance event? No 5 Yes Troubleshoot MS/HP bit errors 6 Is there an LP alarm? No Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Yes Troubleshoot LP bit errors Proceed with the next step No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

56 . use a fiber jumper to loop back the optical ports. it indicates that the fiber is faulty. Ltd. 2. If any of the alarms are reported. replace the line board at the transmit end. If the fault is rectified after the loopback. check whether the fiber connectors are clean. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TEMP_ALARM l HARD_BAD l MW_CFG_MISMATCH 2 3 See 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If bit errors change after the exchange. the line board may be faulty. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the line board. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications. the equipment at both ends of the service path is faulty. MW_BER_SD. 4. Check whether the line board reports the B1_EXC. check whether the fiber between the equipment and the ODF and the section of the fiber that is led out of the telecommunications room are pressed. 2. 5. RPS_INDI. 2. In the case of a fiber fault. B1_SD. MW_LOF. If none of the alarms occurs. B1_EXC. 4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path. check whether there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the equipment is not properly grounded. it indicates that the board is faulty. In addition. If the fault persists after the loopback. 3. replace the line board. If the alarm changes after the exchange. 5 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Interchange the Tx fiber core and the Rx fiber core at both ends of the service path.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-7 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting bit errors Comment No. or RS_CROSSTR alarm. or RS_CROSSTR alarm. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path. Perform a loopback on the line board that reports the alarm. replace the IF board. Otherwise.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link and rectify the fault.. MW_FEC_UNCOR. If the fault persists after the loopback. see 5. 3. you can also replace the board where the line unit is located or interchange between the board and another board of the same type that is working normally. Check whether the IF board reports the MW_BER_EXC. B1_SD.

When the service is configured to be at the VC-12 level. apply the reframing process to terminate the AU pointer justification. The performance events related to the TU pointer justification are as follows: l l l TUPJCHIGH TUPJCLOW TUPJCNEW NOTE The TU pointer justification is made at the NE where the AU pointer is transformed into the TU pointer. check whether there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the equipment is not properly grounded. 6 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Replace the board where the services are configured based on how the service paths that have bit errors overlap each other. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 2. prefer the method of analyzing alarms and performance events to the method of performing loopback operations and the method of replacing the parts. Experience and Summary NOTE The TDM services mentioned refer to Native TDM services. 5. The performance events related to the AU pointer justification are as follows: l l l AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW NOTE The AU pointer justification is made at an upstream NE but is detected and reported at a downstream NE. there are pointer justification faults. The terminating method is to transform the AU pointer justification into the TU pointer justification. the AU pointer makes a justification accordingly. Fault Phenomena When the position of the first byte of the VC-4 in the AU-4 payload changes. Ltd. 57 . but is detected and reported by the tributary board of the NE where services are terminated.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU) pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer. The handling procedure applies when the STM-1e port. is faulty l l During the routine maintenance. check bit error performance events periodically and handle them in time. To locate a fault.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the board.

3. 4. The quality of the clock source declines. The tributary board is faulty (only for the TU pointer justification). a timing loop occurs. Ltd. or there are other clockrelated faults. 2. 58 . 2. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones. 4. The fiber connections are incorrect. Analyze and clear clock alarms.. As a result. the clock unit is faulty. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber connections. Analyze and clear clock alarms. Fault AU pointer justification Fault Locating Method 1. 3. Change the clock and service configuration to locate the station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire network. As a result. TU pointer justification 1. Change the clock configuration to locate the station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire network. Fault Locating Methods When there are both AU pointer justifications and TU pointer justifications on a service path. first handle the AU pointer justifications and then the TU pointer justifications. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber connections.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Fault Causes l l l l The clock sources or the clock source levels are configured incorrectly. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. there are two clock sources on the same network or a timing loop occurs.

Ltd.. 59 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-7 Procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications Start 1 Is there a clock-related alarm? No Check the clock configuration Yes Clear the alarm 2 Incorrect configuration? No Check the fiber connection Yes Modify the data configuration 3 Incorrect fiber connection? No Yes Reconnect the fibers 4 An AU pointer justification event? Yes Locate the NE whose clock is out of synchronization 5 Locate the faulty board No 6 A TU pointer justification event? Yes Locate the NE whose clock is out of synchronization 7 Locate the faulty board No Proceed with the next step No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the line board on the remote NE that receives the clock signal. may be faulty. Check the fiber connections in the east and west directions of the NE that reports the pointer justification event. 7. Set the clock of the sink NE to the free-run mode. 3 Query ECC routes to check whether the fibers are connected correctly. 5 Replace the possibly faulty boards. 2. Along the clock tracing direction. Along the clock tracing direction. may be faulty. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TEMP_ALARM l HARD_BAD l LTI l SYNC_C_LOS l S1_SYN_CHANGE l EXT_SYNC_LOS 2 Check the following points: l Check whether there are two clock reference sources on the entire network. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. 6. and the clock unit of the remote NE. l Check whether a timing loop is generated. 60 . Set the clock of the source NE to the free-run mode. Hence. 4. 5. The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is asynchronous with the reference clock..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-8 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications Comment No. locate the line board that is the first to report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path. the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE. The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is asynchronous with the reference clock. and the clock unit of the NE. Along the service source direction of the VC-4 channel. Ltd. locate the line board that is the first to report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path. the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal. Locate a VC-4 channel that reports an AU pointer justification event. the line board that sends the clock signal to the remote NE. Set the other NEs to trace the clock of the sink NE along the direction of the VC-4 service. 4 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Compare the results and find out the common points. locate the source NE of the entire VC-4 service (not the source NE of a timeslot in the VC-4). Hence. Set the other NEs to trace the clock of the source NE along the direction of the VC-4 service. 3.

5. Modify the service configuration to ensure that the NE where the clock reference source functions as the central NE and that the other NEs have the E1 services of the central NE. The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Fault Causes l The VC-12 numbering method of the OptiX equipment is different from the numbering method of the equipment of certain vendors. the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE. locate the NE that is the first to report the TU pointer justification event. The numbering formula is: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number . 6 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Along the clock tracing direction. Ltd. In the case of a TU pointer justification event. Hence. The OptiX equipment applies the timeslot numbering method. locate the NE that is the first to report the TU pointer justification event.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No. Hence. may be faulty. The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock.. the clock board. Experience and Summary On a properly synchronized network.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH equipment. Modify the configuration data to ensure that all the NEs trace the clock along the other direction. there are few pointer justifications (less than six per day on each port). Compare the results and find out the common points. NOTE This method is also applicable to locating an AU pointer justification event. Hence. and the clock unit of the NE.1) x 21. and the tributary board are faulty. This method is also called as the method of numbering by order. 5. may be faulty. monitoring the pointer of an SDH transmission system is an effective way to check the synchronization status of the system. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Along the clock tracing direction. 3. the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal. check whether the line board. the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE. and the clock unit of the NE. 4. the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal. 61 . 7 Replace the possibly faulty boards. 2.1) x 3 + (TU-12 number .

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Certain equipment applies the line numbering method. l l The overhead bytes at both ends are inconsistent.1) x 3 + TU-12 number. Check the possible fault causes one after another. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Fault Locating Methods Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. The numbering formula is: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number ..1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number . This method is also called as the interleaved method. NOTE In the case of interconnection with ATM or Ethernet equipment. Ltd. The indexes of the SDH interfaces do not meet the requirements. the common cause for an interconnection failure is that the service is not set to the VC-4 pass-through service and thus the overheads are processed in the terminating mode instead of the pass-through mode. 62 .

63 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-8 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment Start Is the interconnected equipment Yes the ATM/IP equipment? No Query the VC-12 numbering method of the interconnected equipment Set the interconnection service to be the VC-4 passthrough service Is the numbering mode the line numbering? No 1 Is there an overhead setting related alarm? No Is the interface the STM-1 electrical interface? 3 No Yes Modify the data configuration. Ltd.. Use the line numbering method to set the VC-12 Yes Handle the alarm 2 Yes Check the grounding Test the indexes of interfaces Do the interfaces meet relevant standards? Yes No Handle the faults of the interconnected equipment Go to the next step Handle the faults of the local equipment No Is the fault cleared? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the fault may be caused by the grounding.5 V). 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l J0_MM l HP_TIM l LP_TIM l HP_SLM l LP_SLM 2 Check the following points: l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are jointly grounded. l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same way.. If the potential difference is large (about 0. In addition. Ltd. l Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the DDF is connected to the protection ground. you must be familiar with the characteristics of the interfaces on the interconnected equipment. 3 Common indexes of the optical interfaces are as follows: l Mean launched optical power l Receiver sensitivity l Overload optical power l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface Common indexes of the electrical interfaces: l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface l Allowed attenuation of the input interface Experience and Summary To rectify an interconnection fault. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the SDH equipment.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH equipment. NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-9 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment Comment No. measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite equipment. 64 . 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd. The indexes of the PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Fault Causes l l l l There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces. 65 . Fault Locating Methods Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment.. The cable performance deteriorates. Check the possible fault causes one after another. The equipment is not grounded properly. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd.. 4 Yes Test the indexes of Interfaces. Proceed with the next step. Is in good conditions? No Adjust the cables. No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Yes Replace the cable or the tributary board Yes 2 Check the grounding. 66 . No Troubleshoot the faults on the interconnected Equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-9 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment Start 1 Check the impedance of the interfaces. Do the interfaces meet standards? Yes Troubleshoot the faults on the local equipment. Is there an impedance mismatch? No Is the cable a coaxial cable? No 3 Check the cables.

NOTE Checking the cables involves checking the cables from the DDF to the client side and checking the cables from the DDF to the transmission equipment side. 1 2 Description Check the impedance of the E1 path. 3 Check the following points: l Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected. 67 . If the potential difference is large (about 0.. when the trunk cable is bound with the power cable. l Check whether the cable is broken or pressed. 4 Check the following indexes: l Input jitter tolerance l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface l Output jitter l Output frequency deviation Experience and Summary NOTE The PDH services mentioned refer to Native E1 services. l Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example. In the case of interconnection with PDH equipment. improper grounding is the most common cause for an interconnection failure. Check the following points: l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the telecommunications room are jointly grounded. the cable signal is interfered by the power signal). l Check whether the shield layers of the coaxial cable connectors on the DDF are connected to the protection ground.5 V). the fault may be caused due to the improper grounding. Ltd. NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment sets.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-10 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment Comment No. l Check whether the shield layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same manner. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shield layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment and the level between the shield layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the equipment at the opposite end. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ensure that the impedance of the E1 path is consistent with the cable type.

For example. ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK. EM6F or EM6T ISV3. EM6TA. WRG_BD_TYPE. the equipment delay is long. Prerequisites The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is interrupted. the packet loss occurs. Alarm HARD_BAD. or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data. 68 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 5. ISX2.. EM6TA. or LOOP_ALM LASER_MOD_ERR Ethernet services suffer degradation. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. EG4P. or BD_STATUS PORTMODE_MISMATCH. IFU2 or IFX2 Board EG4. the network access speed is low. EG4P. LAG_DOWN. EM6F EG4. TEMP_ALARM. Ltd. EG4P. ETH_NO_FLOW ETH_LOS. EM6F or EM6T Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Fault Phenomena The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is interrupted. the packet loss occurs. EM6FA. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM PORTMODE_MISMATCH. EM6FA. or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data. EM6F or EM6T EG4. EG4P. EM6FA. the network access speed is low. COMMUN_FAIL. EM6TA. For example. the equipment delay is long. FLOW_OVER or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN AM_DOWNSHIFT MAC_FCS_EXC MAC_EXT_EXC DROPRATIO_OVER EG4. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration. ISU2. Table 5-11 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted.

The network cable is faulty. Fault Locating Methods 1. Ltd. – The service configuration is incorrect. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. working mode. 2. are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports on the interconnected equipment. and flow control. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. such as the port enabled state. The interconnected equipment is faulty. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error. – The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports.. l l l l l l The equipment at the local end is faulty. When the AM function is enabled. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Fault Causes l The possible human factors are as follows: – An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs. the Ethernet service bandwidth decreases due to the downward AM switch. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms. 3. External electromagnetic interference is severe. 69 .

70 . Ltd..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis Figure 5-10 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis Start 1 Incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel this operation 2 An equipment alarm or alarm on the radio link? No Yes Clear the alarm 3 An Ethernet alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm 4 5 Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes No 6 Any abnormal RMON performance events? No Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks section by section or replacing boards Yes A loop formed by the E-LAN service trails? No Yes Release the loop Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON performance events Proceed with the next step No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

71 . are the same as the parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and flow control. Release the loops if any are formed.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-12 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis Comment No. working mode. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR 3 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l ETH_NO_FLOW l LAG_DOWN l LAG_MEMBER_DOWN l FLOW_OVER 4 Follow the instructions in Detecting E-LAN Service Loops to check whether E-LAN services are looped back. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port.. such as the port enabled state. Ltd.

. l If the transmit rate of the port approaches or reaches the maximum Ethernet bandwidth of the IF port. or if the receive rate of the port is much higher than the transmit rate of the Ethernet port. and system control. Locate the fault as follows: – Check the Ethernet service configuration and QoS configuration. check whether QoS settings are correct according to the packet loss data. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and check if sufficient bandwidth is available for the flows by querying flow traffic. – Check the Ethernet interface board. see the D RMON Event Reference. – By Querying port flow classification or packet loss performance of egress queues on the NMS. the license capacity is too low and you need to apply for a license allowing for a higher capacity.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No. switching and timing board by means of board replacement. the bandwidth of the IF port is too low and needs to be increased by the network planning personnel. 72 . l If the rate of the port approaches or reaches the license capacity of the IF port. Ltd. 5 Description Query Ethernet service rates on various ports to analyze the service rates and locate faults. create flows specific to the VLANs in the port policy. the local end is faulty. the peer equipment is faulty. 6 For RMON performance events. IF board. l If the transmit rate of the port is much lower than the receive rate of the Ethernet port. l If the Ethernet port connecting the peer equipment has a too high or too low receive rate. If the transmitted traffic is equal to the received traffic.

1 Description 8.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Physical Bandwidth. or Bandwidth Utilization to obtain the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Figure 5-11 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No Yes 2 Rectify the fault of line bit errors Yes 3 Check the working mode of the port Yes 4 Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets Use a meter to perform the test Is the test passed? No 5 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board Yes Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment Yes Modify the MTU value Proceed with the next step No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Table 5-13 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event No.20 Querying Traffic. 73 . Ltd.

2 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: l Check the Ethernet cable. 3 Check the following points: l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet port on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end. Failure Refer to the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified. Success Troubleshoot according to the relevant handling suggestions. l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board.) 4 Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets and solve the problem. No 2 Perform intelligent diagnosis on Ethernet services. the hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is faulty. If the problem is caused on the equipment at the opposite end. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error.. 74 . Proceed with the next step. replace it with a new one. No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network. 5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured in an End-to-End Manner Figure 5-12 Procedure for troubleshooting faults in Ethernet services configured in an end-toend manner Start 1 Incorrect operation? Yes Cancel this operation. it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting No. Otherwise. set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. Ltd. the Ethernet port must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.

are configured consistently at the local end and peer end l Whether Ethernet protocol and Ethernet service configurations (especially Ethernet port attributes) are correct 2 Intelligent fault diagnosis uses OAM to implement fault diagnosis over services.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-14 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured in an end-to-end manner Comment No. and the physical layer. see the instructions in the Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis section. you must be familiar with the characteristics. working mode. NOTE Only the Native E-Line services configured end to end support intelligent fault diagnosis. Experience and Summary To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault. Ltd. the network access speed is low. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and service degradation. For the troubleshooting of E-LAN services. and supports the output of diagnostic results for further troubleshooting. working mode. such as port enabling/disabling status. the equipment delay is long.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM network. or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data. 75 . and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. PWs. and flow control. Fault Phenomena The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. For example. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the Ethernet port parameters. the packet loss occurs. and tunnels. 5.

Ltd. working mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports. – The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link – The service configuration is incorrect. LCAS_TLCT. – The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link. The external electromagnetic interference is severe. Fault Locating Methods 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-15 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. or BD_STATUS ALM_GFP_dLFD or ALM_GFP_dCSF ETH_LOS or LOOP_ALM LAG_PORT_FAIL. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error.. and flow control. LCAS_PLCT. l l l l l The equipment at the local end is faulty. are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports on the interconnected equipment. Alarm HARD_BAD. LCAS_FOPR. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER LCAS_FOPT. TEMP_ALARM. such as the port enabled state. LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL. or LCAS_TLCR Ethernet services are abnormal. or LCAS_PLCR Board EMS6/EFP8 Fault Causes l The possible human factors are as follows: – An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs. The interconnected equipment is faulty. The network cable is faulty. 2. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. 76 . WRG_BD_TYPE.

Ltd. Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-13 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults Start 1 1 Incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel this operation 2 An equipment alarm Yes or alarm on the radio link? No 3 An Ethernet alarm? No 4 A loop formed by the Yes E-LAN service trails? No 5 Any abnormal RMON performance events? No Fault on the opposite equipment? No Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks section by section or replacing boards Yes Yes Yes Clear the alarm Clear the alarm Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes Release the loop Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON performance events Troubleshoot faults on the opposite equipment Proceed with the next step No Is the fault rectified? Yes En d Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 77 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 3. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-16 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults Comment No. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. are the same as the parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment l The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link. 78 . Ltd. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port. l The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link. l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct. and flow control. such as the port enabled state. working mode..

it indicates that the network to which Ethernet ports are connected has loops. 5 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see C Performance Event Reference. 3 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l FLOW_OVER l ALM_GFP_dCSF l ALM_GFP_dLFD l FCS_ERR l LCAS_PLCT l LCAS_TLCT l LCAS_PLCR l LCAS_TLCR l LCAS_FOPT l LCAS_FOPR 4 If the LOOP_ALM alarm is reported after the configuring the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces operation is performed. For RMON performance events. Ltd. 79 ..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No.

80 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. 1 Description View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port to obtain the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Figure 5-14 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Is there any PAUSE frame? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No Yes 2 Rectify the fault of line bit errors Yes 3 Check the working mode of the port 4 Yes Handle the flow control problem or increase the bandwidth 5 Yes Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets Use a meter to perform the test Is the test passed? No 6 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board Yes Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment Yes Modify the MTU value Proceed with the next step No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Table 5-17 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event Comment No.

If the problem is caused on the equipment at the opposite end. Ltd. 6 Experience and Summary To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault. the hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is faulty. replace it with a new one.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No. l Whether the Ethernet service traffic exceeds the bandwidth of the VCTRUNK. the Ethernet port must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end. 5. 5 Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example. 3 Check the following points: l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet port on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end. l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board.. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error. you must be familiar with the characteristics. 81 .10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or MPLS Ping/Traceroute function. 2 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: l Check the Ethernet cable. it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network. Otherwise. and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment. Fault Phenomena Common faults of MPLS tunnels are as follows: Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. working mode. set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter.) 4 Check the following points: l Whether the flow control method is the same. you have set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering table incorrectly) and solve the problem.

MPLS tunnels are faulty. l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) The local NE is faulty. Alarm HARD_BAD. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH.. MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess. Table 5-18 Common faults of MPLS tunnels Symptom MPLS tunnels are faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG. ISU2. services are interrupted. Ltd. WRG_BD_TYPE. BD_STATUS. and services are interrupted. MPLS APS switching fails. ISX2. MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE. 82 . – Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. MPLS_TUNNEL_SF. MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL. and services are unavailable. MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH MW_LIM MW_LOF Board CSH ISV3. MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV. MPLS_TUNNEL_SD.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting l l l MPLS tunnels fail to be created. – Service configuration is incorrect. MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN. MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI. MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI. TEMP_ALARM. BUS_ERR. – The transmission link is looped back. and packet loss or bit errors occur. MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI. MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG. IFU2 or IFX2 Fault Causes l Incorrect operations are performed. MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS.

Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-15 Procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels Start 1 Any incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel the operation. 3 Any alarm related to MPLS tunnel ? No Any fault in interconnection equipment? No Yes Clear the alarm using LB/LT/LSP Ping/LSP Tracerout. Check whether the data is modified. No Faults are rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Fault Locating Methods 1. External electromagnetic interference is severe. Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards. 83 .or link-related alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm. 4. 2. Locate the faulty section by using the LSP Traceroute or MPLS-TP OAM function. and whether any boards are replaced. whether the line is looped back.. Contact Huawei technical engineers. 3. Handle the link alarms on the MPLS server trail. Ltd. Locate the fault by replacing boards. Yes Handle the fault. 2 Any equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting l l l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-19 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels Comment No.. Ltd. especially whether tunnel attributes are set correctly 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 84 . 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for E1 ports l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings such as the working mode of Ethernet ports match those of the opposite NE l Whether the parameter settings such as frame format and frame mode at E1 ports match those of the opposite NE l Whether MPLS service configuration is correct.

BUS_ERR. Ltd. Alarm HARD_BAD. 5. BD_STATUS.11 Troubleshooting CES Services This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded. ML1. TEMP_ALARM. MD1 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. LSP Tracerout. Table 5-20 Common faults of CES services Symptom CES services are interrupted. 85 . 3 Description Check whether the tunnel is faulty using LSP Ping. CES_LOSPKT_EXC Board CSH. CES services are degraded if they have packet loss or incorrect packets. Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN l MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS l MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER Experience and Summary Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of MPLS tunnels before troubleshooting MPLS tunnels. or MPLSTP Tunnel OAM. Fault Phenomena CES services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No. WRG_BD_TYPE.

Replace Smart E1 interface boards. Analyze the RMON performance events of CES services. If the configuration is the same. check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. – Service configuration is incorrect. IFU2. If the MPLS tunnel works properly. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. HARD_BAD. – Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. MD1 ISU2. check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. Check whether the data is modified. Ltd. 4. CES_JTRUDR_EXC. or IFX2 CES services are degraded. The local NE is faulty. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Jitters and delays on the network are too great. 6. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. – The transmission link is looped back. If the PW works properly. If the PW is faulty. ISX2. CES_STRAYPKT_EXC AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CSH. Fault Locating Methods 1. ML1. and whether any boards are replaced.. l l l l l l l The clock source is asynchronous. CES_MISORDERPKT_EX C. change the PE data to the same.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Symptom Alarm AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH Board ISU2. TEMP_ALARM. The opposite NE is faulty. whether the line is looped back. 7. 86 3. or IFX2 Fault Causes l Incorrect operations are performed. ISX2. If the PE data is different. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. 2. CES_MALPKT_EXC. CES_JTROVR_EXC. replace the board on the NNI side. IFU2. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-16 Procedure for troubleshooting CES services Start 1 Any incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel the operation 2 Any equipment.or link-related alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm 3 Any alarm related to tunnels/PWs? No 4 Yes Clear the alarm Any alarm related to CES services? Yes Clear the alarm 5 Any alarm on E1 ports? No Yes Clear the alarm 6 Any RMON performance event? No Yes Handle the performance event 7 Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No Yes Handle the fault Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards Contact Huawei technical engineers No Faults are rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 87 .

. PWs. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. electrical port impedance.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-21 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting CES services Commen t No. are consistent. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Check whether the parameter settings of CES services. l Check whether the parameter settings of physical ports (including frame format. code. l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. Ltd. 88 . and tunnels are consistent at the source end and sink end. and overhead byte).

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN 4 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l CES_JTROVR_EXC l CES_JTRUDR_EXC l CES_LOSPKT_EXC l CES_MALPKT_EXC l CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC l CES_STRAYPKT_EXC 5 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l T_ALOS l UP_E1_AIS l LFA l LMFA l DOWN_E1_AIS l ALM_E1RAI 6 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l CES_MISORDERPKT l CES_LOSPKT l CES_MALPKT l CES_JTRUDR l CES_JTROVR l CES_STRAYPKT 7 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Commen t No. 89 .. Ltd.

ML1. or IFX2 Fault Causes l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Incorrect operations are performed. BUS_ERR. ML1.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded. LCD AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH ATM services are degraded. Alarm HARD_BAD. WRG_BD_TYPE. BD_STATUS.. IFU2. ALM_IMA_LODS. MD1 Board CSH. ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE. or IFX2 ISU2. IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN. HARD_BAD. 90 . TEMP_ALARM. IFU2. 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Experience and Summary Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of CES services before troubleshooting CES services. ISX2. ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE. IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN. ATM services are degraded if they have packet loss or incorrect packets. ALM_IMA_LODS. Fault Phenomena ATM services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. MD1 ISU2. OCD AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CSH. ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE. Table 5-22 Common faults of ATM services Symptom ATM services are interrupted. ALM_IMA_LIF. Ltd. ALM_IMA_LIF. ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE. TEMP_ALARM. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ISX2.

check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Ltd. Replace Smart E1 processing boards. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. 7. External electromagnetic interference is severe. If the PE data is different.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting – The transmission link is looped back. 2. whether the link is looped back. 6. 5. 3. Fault Locating Methods 1. check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. If the PW works properly. and whether any boards are replaced. If the PW is faulty. – Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. replace the board on the NNI side. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the MPLS tunnel works properly. If the configuration is the same. The opposite NE is faulty. 91 . – Service configuration is incorrect. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function.. check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. change the PE data to the same. Check whether the data is modified. Analyze the RMON performance events of ATM services. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. 4.

92 .or link-related alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm 3 Yes Any alarm related to ATM services? No 4 Any alarm at the E1 port? No 5 Yes Clear the alarm Clear the alarm Any RMON performance event? No Yes Handle the performance event 6 Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No Yes Handle the fault Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards Contact Huawei technical engineers No Faults are rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-17 Procedure for troubleshooting ATM services Start 1 Any incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel the operation 2 Any equipment. Ltd.

and maximum differential delay) are correctly configured l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent – Whether E1 frame format. clock mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-23 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting ATM services Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI. and Tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end. 93 . and E1 timeslot mode (30/31) are correctly configured – Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version. Ltd. PW. coding.. PWE3 CW. frame length. overhead bytes. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and transmitted in the PSN..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Comment No. Ltd. 94 . packet loss. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. Ethernet services deteriorate if they have great delays. Experience and Summary Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of ATM services before troubleshooting ATM services. or incorrect packets. 3 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ALM_IMA_LIF l ALM_IMA_LODS l ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE l ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE l IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN l IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN l OCD l LCD 4 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l T_ALOS l UP_E1_AIS l LFA l LMFA l DOWN_E1_AIS 5 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS l ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR 6 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted or deteriorate. Fault Symptoms Ethernet services are interrupted if they are unavailable.

The opposite NE is faulty. WRG_BD_TYPE. EM6F or EM6T Board EG4. EG4P. Fault Locating Methods 1. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. EM6FA. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM PORTMODE_MISMATCH. – Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. EM6FA. – The transmission link is looped back. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. EM6FA. EM6TA. IFU2 or IFX2 EG4. ISU2. ISX2. External electromagnetic interference is severe. EM6TA. LAG_DOWN ETH_LOS. EM6F EG4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BUS_ERR. Check whether the data is modified. ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK. EM6F or EM6T EG4. or LOOP_ALM LASER_MOD_ERR Ethernet services deteriorate. BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL. EM6TA. and whether any boards are replaced. whether the link is looped back.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-24 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Ltd. EG4P. 95 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . EG4P. EG4P. – Service configuration is incorrect.. TEMP_ALARM. EM6FA. EM6F or EM6T Fault Causes l Incorrect operations are performed. Alarm HARD_BAD. FLOW_OVER or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN MAC_FCS_EXC MAC_EXT_EXC DROPRATIO_OVER AM_DOWNSHIFT MAC_FCS_EXC MAC_EXT_EXC DROPRATIO_OVER ISV3.

If the PW is faulty. replace the boardon the NNI side. 96 . change the PE data to the same. check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping or MPLS-TP PW OAM function. If the configuration is the same. If the MPLS tunnel works properly. 3. check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping or MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM function. 7. Analyze the RMON performance events of Ethernet services.. If the PW works properly. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. 6. Replace Ethernet interface board. 5. Ltd. 4.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 2. If the PE data is different.

Yes Handle the tunnel fault. Contact Huawei technical engineers.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis Figure 5-18 Procedure for troubleshooting PW-carried Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis Start 1 Any incorrect operation? No Yes Cancel the operation. Ltd. Yes Yes Handle the UNI-side fault. 4 Can the PW be pinged after a PW ping test is enabled? No 5 Any fault in the tunnel that carries the PW? No 6 Incorrect PW configuration? No 7 Analyze PW traffic. 3 Any PW-related alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm. 97 . Re-configure the PW.. 2 Any equipmentor link-related alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm. No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

frame length. PWE3 CW. and tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent – Whether E1 frame format.. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following radio link alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. clock mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-25 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting PW-carried Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis No. overhead bytes. and maximum differential delay) are correctly configured l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI. 98 . PW. and E1 timeslot mode (30/31) are correctly configured – Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version. coding. Ltd.

3 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN l MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS l MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER l MPLS_PW_AIS l MPLS_PW_BDI l MPLS_PW_RDI l MPLS_PW_Excess l MPLS_PW_LOCV l MPLS_PW_MISMATCH l MPLS_PW_MISMERGE l MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL l MPLS_PW_SD l MPLS_PW_SF l MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG l MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP l MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER l MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. 99 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting No.

Handle tunnel faults by following the instructions in 5. Check if packet loss occurs by querying the received and transmitted packets on L2VPN PWs on the PEs at both ends. 100 . Ltd. 4 Description Check whether the PW is faulty using PW Ping. 6 7 Check PW configurations. Handle UNI-side faults by following the instructions in step 4. If packet loss occurs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting No. check the following points: l Whether the UNI-side hardware and cables are normal l Whether the UNI-side PWE3 service configurations are correct l Whether the working mode and tag attribute of the UNI are consistent with those at the peer port Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI l ETH_NO_FLOW l MAC_FCS_EXC l MAC_EXT_EXC 5 Check whether the MPLS tunnel is faulty using LSP Ping or LSP Tracerout. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the PW cannot be pinged. If the PW configurations are incorrect. reconfigure the PW according to the network plan.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels. identify the cause by querying packet loss of egress queues on all nodes of a PW..

No 2 Perform intelligent diagnosis on Ethernet services. and supports the output of diagnostic results for further troubleshooting. Ltd. 101 . 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the Ethernet port parameters.. and the physical layer. PWs. working mode. Experience and Summary Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of Ethernet services carried by PWs before troubleshooting these services. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured in an End-to-End Manner Figure 5-19 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured in an end-to-end manner Start 1 Incorrect operation? Yes Cancel this operation. Success Troubleshoot according to the relevant handling suggestions. such as port enabling/disabling status. Failure Refer to the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis. Proceed with the next step. and flow control. are configured consistently at the local end and peer end l Whether Ethernet protocol and Ethernet service configurations (especially Ethernet port attributes) are correct 2 Intelligent fault diagnosis uses OAM to implement fault diagnosis over services. No Is the fault rectified? Yes End Table 5-26 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured in an end-to-end manner Comment No. and tunnels.

Replace the possibly faulty board to locate the fault. there is an orderwire fault. Fault Locating Methods l l Check whether the phone set is set correctly. The system control unit is faulty.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal. whether the phone line is connected correctly.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting 5. The orderwire is configured incorrectly. and whether the orderwire is configured correctly.. The orderwire unit is faulty. Fault Causes l l l l l l The phone set is set incorrectly. The line unit or radio link is faulty. 102 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The phone line is connected incorrectly. Ltd.

103 .. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure Figure 5-20 Procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults Start 1 Check the phone setting Is the phone correctly set? Yes No Modify the phone setting Is the phone line correctly connected? Yes 2 No Reconnect the phone line Check the orderwire configuration Is the configuration correct? Yes Replace the possibly faulty board No Modify the configuration 3 No Proceed with the next step Is the fault rectified? Yes End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the dual tone multi-frequency mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting Table 5-27 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults Comment No. l An orderwire phone set should be in on-hook state when it is not in communication. In certain occasions. 2 Check the following points: l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are of the same length l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are unique l Whether the overhead bytes of all the NEs on a subnet are the same l Whether the orderwire port is set correctly 3 Replace the boards where the orderwire unit. it indicates that the phone set is in off-hook state. and line unit are located to locate the fault. you must check the orderwire phone periodically. Press the "TALK" button in the front of phone set to hook it up. the maintenance personnel press the "TALK" button is pressed by mistake. the phone set stay in off-hook state all the time and the orderwire call from the other NEs cannot get through. As a result. and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of the orderwire phone set should be off. Experience and Summary To troubleshoot orderwire faults. namely. l Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T". system control unit.. 104 . If the red indicator is on. 1 Description Check the following points: l Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to "ON". Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

4 Replacing the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board Part Replacement Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. Tool l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover 6. EM6F.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board 6. Switch and Timing Board 6.9 Replacing the CF Card 6..5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board l ESD wrist strap l Screwdriver l U2000 105 AUX SP3D and SP3S Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SL1DA EG4.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board 6. Ltd. EM6T. . and EFP8 CF card CST and CSH Operation 6.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 6 About This Chapter Background Information Table 6-1 Part replacement description Part Name CQ1 SL1D. EG4P. EM6FA.11 Replacing the Auxiliary Board 6. EMS6.10 Replacing the System Control. The replacement operation varies according to the specific part type. EM6TA.

6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board 6.8 Replacing the IF Board Tool 6. Ltd.. 106 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Part Name ISV3.16 Replacing the IF Cable l Multimeter l Ejector lever l Electro-technical knife l File l Installation parts and accessories of the connector l IF cable l Waterproof adhesive tape SFP 6. IFU2.14 Replacing the SFP l ESD wrist strap l Tweezer fiber remover l U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and IFX2 PIU ML1 and MD1 FAN Operation 6.12 Replacing the Fan Board l ESD wrist strap l U2000 ODU 6. ISU2.13 Replacing the Power Board 6.15 Replacing the ODU l Ejector lever (torque wrench) l U2000 l Silicon l Waterproof adhesive tape IF cable 6. IF1. ISX2.

NOTE Use fiber removers to remove fibers or network cables. make labels for the cables and then remove the cables.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 6.. Figure 6-1 Wear the ESD wrist strap Step 2 Optional: If cables are connected to the board.1 Removing a Board Removing a board is a basic operation for replacing a board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist strap. 107 . Ltd.

Figure 6-3 Removing a board (1) 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1.. Loosen the screws on the panel of the board. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Figure 6-2 Tweezer fiber remover Step 3 Remove the board. Push them outwards to disengage the board from the backplane. Hold the left and right ejector levers with hands. 108 .

you need to push the latches when pulling the ejector levers outward.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Figure 6-4 Removing a board (2) NOTE As shown in Figure 6-5. Pull out the board gently along the slot guide rail. Figure 6-6 Removing a board (3) Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 109 .. there is a latch on each ejector lever of the System control Switch&Timing board. Figure 6-5 Removing the System control Switch&Timing board 3. Ltd. To remove the System control Switch&Timing board.

Ltd. Wear the ESD wrist strap. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Hold the ejector levers on the panel with both hands. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement CAUTION Remove the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding. Push them outwards so that the angle between the ejector lever and the panel is about 45 degrees.2 Inserting a Board Inserting a board is a basic operation for replacing a board. Procedure Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet.. Step 4 Put the removed board into the antistatic box or bag. 110 . 1. Push the board gently along the slot guide rail until the board cannot slide further. Figure 6-7 Wear the ESD wrist strap Step 2 Insert the board. ----End 6. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Figure 6-8 Inserting a board (1) CAUTION Insert the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding. 3.. Tighten screws on the panel. Figure 6-9 Inserting a board (2) 4. Press the two ejector levers inward with force. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 111 .

1. Tools. 112 . the unprotected services on the board are interrupted. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. recover the original cable connections according to the labels that are made previously. Equipment. Ltd. ----End 6. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. and Materials l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board When the SDH optical interface board is replaced. The spare SDH optical interface board must be available. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Query the SNCP protection group. Prerequisites l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Figure 6-10 Inserting a board (3) Step 3 Optional: If cables are connected to the board.

Step 4 Remove the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Perform the forced switching. and Materials l l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The spare channelized STM-1 processing board must be available. Step 5 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFP type of the board to be replaced. release the forced switching. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. Prerequisites l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. if the port on the board functions as the current working channel. Equipment. the unprotected services on the board are interrupted. the current protection channel is not on the board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 2. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.. Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board. 1. 113 . check the STAT indicator on the board. Step 10 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services. Step 6 Insert the board. and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD. Step 3 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP. 2. Query the linear MSP group. and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD. ----End 6. Tools. release the forced switching. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. Perform the forced switching. if the port on the board functions as the current working channel. Ltd. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. Step 7 After the board starts to work. There should be no new alarms on the board. the current protection channel is not on the board.4 Replacing the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board When the channelized STM-1 processing board is replaced.

ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. check the STAT indicator on the board. Step 3 Remove the board. Step 6 After the board starts to work. and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. if the port on the board functions as the current working channel. The spare board must be made available. and Materials l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. release the forced switching. Equipment. Tools. Step 5 Insert the board. Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board. 114 . Step 8 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services. the current protection channel is not on the board. Step 4 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFP type of the board to be replaced. Ltd. Prerequisites l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. There should be no new alarms on the board. Perform the forced switching.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. 2.. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. the services on the board are interrupted. The STAT indicator should be on and green.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board When the PDH interface board is replaced. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. Step 2 Remove the board. Query the linear MSP group. ----End 6. Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP.

The STAT indicator is on and green. Step 3 Verify that the spare board has the same board version and board type as the board to be replaced. Tools.. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. it enters initialization state and starts to work 2 minutes later. the services on the board are interrupted. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 2 Remove the board. The spare board must be available. check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 5 After the substitute board starts to work. ----End 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board When the Smart E1 Interface board is replaced. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 5 After the board starts to work. Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board. Prerequisites l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. Step 4 Insert the board. NOTE Smart E1 boards are hot-swappable. Step 4 Insert the spare board. check the indicators on the board. After the spare board is installed. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. 115 . Instruments and Materials l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board to be replaced. Step 6 Query the current alarms of the substitute board. There is no new alarm on the board. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.

Prerequisites l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. Querying MPLS APS Status. perform the forced switching. it enters initialization state and starts working two minutes later.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 6. Ltd. Equipment. you need to change the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE. perform the forced switching. 116 . Tools. Querying PW APS Status. Step 7 After the board starts to work. the unprotected services on the board are interrupted. If the board functions as the current working board. Step 4 Remove the board. After the substitute board is installed. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS. 2. Step 2 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. Step 5 Check and ensure that the board version and the model of the SFP module on the spare board are the same as the board version and the model of the SFP module on the board to be replaced. The STAT indicator should be on and green. and Materials l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.. NOTE Ethernet interface boards are hot-swappable. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection PW. check the indicators on the board. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection tunnel.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board When the Ethernet interface board is replaced. The spare board must be made available. 1. If the board functions as the current working board. 1. 2. If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel.

Query the SNCP protection group. 1. Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services.. and Materials l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. ----End 6. 117 . 1. the current protection channel is not on the board. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection tunnel. Equipment. 2. If the board functions as the current working board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Querying MPLS APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board. perform the forced switching. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Query the IF N+1 protection group.8 Replacing the IF Board When the IF board is replaced. release the forced switching. Step 3 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with 1+1 protection. 2. Step 4 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with N+1 protection. Query the IF 1+1 protection group. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. 1. Ltd. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection IF board. switch the service to the protection IF board. Tools. 2. The spare board must be available. Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP. Prerequisites l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. perform the forced switching. perform the forced switching. Step 5 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. the unprotected services on the board are interrupted. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. If the port on the board functions as the current working channel. 1. There should be no new alarms on the board.

perform the forced switching. After the substitute board is installed. release the forced switching. Step 9 Remove the board. 1. Step 8 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board to be replaced. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 12 Insert the board. If the board functions as the current working board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The STAT indicator should be on and green.. Step 10 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. 118 . see Setting the ODU Transmitter State and mute the ODU at the opposite end. Step 17 Optional: If the forced protection switching has been performed for the radio link. you need to change the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE. perform the forced switching. CAUTION To turn off the ODU-PWR switch. If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel. check the indicators on the board. it enters initialization state and starts working two minutes later.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 2. you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then set the switch to the "I" position. Step 7 Optional: If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection PW. If the board functions as the current working board. CAUTION To turn on the ODU-PWR switch. Step 11 Ensure that the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the spare IF board is turned off. Ltd. Step 15 Query the current alarms of the board. you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then set the switch to the "O" position. Querying PW APS Status. Step 13 After the board starts to work. IF boards are hot-swappable. Step 6 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS. release the forced switching. Step 14 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. 2. Step 16 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services.

Step 2 Optional: If the board is configured with 1+1 protection. see Setting the ODU Transmitter State and unmute the ODU at the opposite end. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools. Step 3 Remove the board. Equipment. Step 4 Remove the CF card according to the illustration in the following figure. 2. See 8. all the services are interrupted during the replacement of the CF card. perform the manual switching.23 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit. ensure that the services are switched from the current working board to the protection board. 119 . Prerequisites l l l l You must be aware of the impact of CF card replacement. You must be a user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. and ensure that the current working board functions as the protection board. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Step 18 If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function.. You must obtain a spare CF card that has the same capacity as the CF card to be replaced. You must know the specific position of the CF card to be replaced. If the board functions as the current working board. Ltd.9 Replacing the CF Card If the NE is configured with only one System control Switch&Timing board. ----End 6. and Materials l l l ESD wrist strap U2000 Fiber remover Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.

Prerequisites l l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. 120 . Step 8 After the board starts to work.. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. ----End 6. Step 6 Install the spare CF card according to the illustration in the following figure. and Materials l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 9 Query the current alarms of the board. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Step 5 Check the spare CF card. Equipment. Step 7 Insert the board. if the NE is configured with only one system control switch and timing board. the replacement of the System Control Switch and Timing board results in service interruption. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. Tools. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 10 Optional: If the manual switching has been performed on the board. Impact on System If no protection board is available. Ltd. There should be no new alarms. release the manual switching. Switch and Timing Board All the services are interrupted during the period of replacing the system control switch and timing board. The spare board must be made available. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced. observe the indicators on the board.10 Replacing the System Control.

If. Ltd. the PROG indicator on the board blinks green for about 20 minutes. One System control Switch and Timing board is configured Then. and the PROG is red. 5.9 Replacing the CF Card. Insert the spare board into the chassis. l If the database restoration is successful.. contact Huawei engineers for loading correct patches. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. contact Huawei technical support engineers for rectifying the fault. In this case. and NE logs from the CF card. Remove the CF card from the original board and then install the CF card to the spare board. NOTE After the NE starts up normally. NOTE l In the process of restoring the NE database. For details about how to install the CF card. 1. Step 2 Replace the System control Switch&Timing board. After the NE resets successfully. 121 . Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to remove the board. 2. the STAT and PROG indicators are on and green. the STAT and PROG indicators on the board are green. software packages.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement l Fiber remover Context NOTE After the NE database is restored successfully.. Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board (including the patch version) are correct. 4. Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. the NE resets automatically. see 6. Press and hold the CF RCV button on the board for 8 seconds so that the board automatically restores the NE databases.. l If the database restoration fails. a cold reset is automatically performed on the NE. the NE does not reset.. NOTE If the spare board and the board to be replaced have different patch versions. 3.. system parameters.

Check whether the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. 3. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement If. The spare board must be made available. Step 3 Query the current alarms of the board. For details. and Materials l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Ltd.. ----End 6. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Remove the board to be replaced. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. 122 .23 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit. Tools. Two System control Switch and Timing boards are configured Then. see 8. Prerequisites l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. Wait for about 10 minutes to complete the backup of the data on the main and standby system control units. NOTE After the NE starts up normally. There should be no new alarms. the STAT and PROG indicator on the board is green. 5. Before replacing the main system control board...11 Replacing the Auxiliary Board When the auxiliary board is replaced. Insert the spare board. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. Equipment. the services on the auxiliary board are interrupted. 4. 1.. NOTE Replacing the standby system control board does not need to switch the system control board to the protection board. switch the main system control board to the protection board..

you need to replace the fan board quickly. Therefore.. and Materials l l ESD wrist strap U2000 Precautions WARNING Do not touch the blades until the fan has stopped rotating. Ltd. Tools. Step 5 After the board starts to work. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. check the indicators on the board. Equipment. 123 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Remove the fan board. Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.12 Replacing the Fan Board The IDU cannot perform air cooling in the process of replacing the fan board. Step 2 Move the cables away from the front panel of the fan board assembly. Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board. Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. The spare board must be made available. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. ----End 6. Prerequisites l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. There should be no new alarms on the auxiliary board. Step 4 Insert the spare board. The STAT indicator should be on and green.

. 124 . observe the indicators on the board. The FAN indicator should be on and green. Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 5 Insert the standby fan board. There should be no new alarms. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 2 1 Step 4 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2 1 Step 6 After the board starts to work.

You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced. Equipment. Do not connect the interface to the power plug.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 6. 125 . You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. the services at the IDU are not affected. Tools.. Step 2 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn off the output power switch on the power supply equipment. insert the power plug. NOTE When removing the power cable. you must turn off the power switch of the PDU. Prerequisites l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. Ltd. and then turn on the power switch of the PDU. press the former section of the red button and pull the red button. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. and Materials l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Precautions WARNING Before replacing the board. After inserting the PIU properly. Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 3 Remove the cables connected to the board.13 Replacing the Power Board If another power board works normally during the replacement period. The spare board must be made available.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement 1 2 1 2 1 Press 2 1 2 Press the front of the red latch. Step 7 Reconnect the cables between the board and the power supply equipment. Prerequisites l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) You must know the impact of SFP replacement. the unprotected services on the optical/ electrical port are interrupted. Step 6 Insert the spare board steadily along the guide rail. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.14 Replacing the SFP When the small form pluggable (SFP) is replaced. 126 . ----End 6. observe the indicators on the board.. Step 9 After the board starts to work. The PWR indicator should be on and green. Ltd. You must know the specific position of the SFP to be replaced. Step 8 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn on the output power switch on the equipment. Step 5 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 4 Remove the power board gently and horizontally along the guide rail. Properly move the red latch outwards.

Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board. perform forced switching. and remove the SFP module. and the version and type of the spare SFP must be the same as the version and type of the SFP to be replaced. 1 2 1 Press the unclocking button. Step 2 Optional: If SNCP is configured for services at the optical interface. 1. Equipment and Materials l l l ESD wrist strap Tweezer fiber remover U2000 Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. 2. 127 . NOTE When removing the STM–1 electrical module. 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Check the types of the spare SFP and the SFP to be replaced. and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the SFP to be replaced. Step 4 Record the cable connections of the SFP. press the blcak button first. 2 Remove the STM-1 electical module. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. Query the status of the linear MSP group.. Ltd. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel. perform forced switching.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement l l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the SFP to be replaced. the protection channel does not involve the local board. ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. The spare SFP must be available. and then disconnect cables. Step 6 Insert the standby SFP module and reconnect cables based on the record. Query the status of the SNCP group. Tools. Step 3 Optional: If linear MSP is configured for services at the optical interface. 1. the protection channel does not involve the local board. and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state.

Equipment. Step 4 Remove the ODU.. the services may be affected. The interface of the coupler ejects little RF radiation. The spare ODU must be at hand. Procedure Step 1 Query the current alarms on the ODU and then record the results.. Tools. 128 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement There should be no new alarms on the board. release the forced switching.15 Replacing the ODU When the ODU is replaced.. release the forced switching.. Step 9 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services. Step 8 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board. repair the coating timely.. power off the ODU to be replaced. the unprotected services on the ODU are interrupted. Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable from the ODU. Do not damage the coating when you replace an ODU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the case of any coating damage. but do not power off or mute the other ODU. whose type must be the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced. You must know the specific positions of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board connected to the ODU. Option If. and Materials l l l l Ejector lever (torque spanner) U2000 Silicon Waterproof adhesive tape Precautions Before you replace an ODU that is installed on the coupler. thus meeting the safety standards for microwave radiation. Prerequisites l l l You must know the impact of ODU replacement. Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Ltd. Otherwise. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Description Then. ----End 6.

16 Replacing the IF Cable When the IF cable is replaced.. You need to install a new RTN 600 ODU with a waveguide interface You need to install a new RTN 600 ODU with a coaxial interface Description Then. Remove the ODU from the post. Step 9 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. or ODU adapter. ----End 6. You must know the specific positions of the IF cable to be replaced and the IF board connected to the IF jumper. Step 11 Query the current alarms of the ODU. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement Option You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU with a waveguide interface You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU with a coaxial interface Description Loosen the four latches of the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna.. Prerequisites l l l You must know the impact of IF cable replacement. The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green. See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide. You need to install a new RTN XMC ODU See the RTN XMC ODU Installation Guide.. See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide. or ODU adapter. the IF cable is connected directly to the IDU and the cable end connecting to the IDU should be terminated with the TNC connector and the cable end connecting to the ODU should be terminated with the type-N connector.. Step 6 Install the ODU. Step 5 Ensure the type of the spare ODU is the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced. You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU Loosen the captive screws on the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna. the hybrid coupler. In the case of the 5D IF cable. an IF jumper is required to connect the IF cable to the IDU and both ends of the IF cable should be terminated with type-N connectors. In the case of the RG-8U IF cable or the 1/2-inch IF cable. Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the ODU. the unprotected services on the IF cable are interrupted. Option If. Step 10 After the ODU starts to work. There should be no new alarms on the ODU. the hybrid coupler. Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the ODU. check the LINK indicator and ODU indicator on the IF board.. 129 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) .

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

6 Part Replacement

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l l l l l l l Multimeter Ejector lever Electro-technical knife File Installation parts and accessories of the connector IF cable Waterproof adhesive tape

Procedure
Step 1 Query and record the current alarm of the IDU. Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF jumper and from the ODU. Step 4 Use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the IF cable to determine whether you need to make new connectors for the IF cable or replace the IF cable with a new one. If... You need to make new connectors for the IF cable Then... See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable.

You need to replace the IF cable with a new Replace the IF cable with a new one. one Step 5 Connect the IF cable to the IF jumper and to the ODU. Step 6 Waterproof the connectors at the two ends of the IF cable with the waterproof adhesive tape. Step 7 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 8 After the ODU starts to work, check the LINK and ODU indicators on the IF board. The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green. Step 9 Query the current alarms of the IDU. There should be no new alarms on the IDU. ----End

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

7

Database Backup and Restoration

About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN supports database backup and restoration through the NMS. 7.1 NE Database An NE database stores communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and configuration data of an NE in a certain structure, to facilitate data query and modification and to ensure that the data can be restored after the NE is reset. 7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, crossconnect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation. 7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing up the database. 7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are saved previously.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

7.1 NE Database
An NE database stores communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and configuration data of an NE in a certain structure, to facilitate data query and modification and to ensure that the data can be restored after the NE is reset. Three types of NE databases are available: l Memory database (MDB) The data in the MDB varies according to the configuration and is lost when the system control unit is reset or when the NE is powered off. l Dynamic random database (DRDB) The DRDB automatically stores the data that is checked successfully. The DRDB is resident in the reserved memory. Hence, the data in the DRDB is not lost when a warm reset is performed on the system control unit. The data, however, is lost when a cold reset is performed on the system control unit or when the NE is powered off. l Flash database (FDB) The FDB includes FDB0 and FDB1. The FDB is resident in the flash memory on the board. Hence, the data in the FDB is permanently stored.

NE Database Backup
NE configuration data, after being delivered to the system control unit, is stored in the MDB. Upon successful verification of the configuration data, the system control unit copies the data from the MDB to DRDB and delivers the data to boards. Two modes are available to back up DRDB data to the FDB: l l An NE backs up DRDB data to the FDB within five minutes after NE configuration data is modified. An NE backs up DRDB data to the FDB every 24 hours.

The following modes are available to back up FDB data: l l l Upon a scheduled backup of DRDB data to the FDB, the NE backs up FDB data to a dedicated partition of the flash memory (other than FDB0 and FDB1). On the NMS, FDB data can be backed up to an NMS server manually or at specified intervals. Upon a scheduled backup of DRDB data to the FDB, the NE backs up FDB data to a CF card.
NOTE

A CF card stores NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IPs, NE-IDs, subnet masks, and LSR IDs), software packages, and NE logs. The software packages on a CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board only during package diffusion. Automatic or manual backup is not needed for software package synchronization. If the software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board are inconsistent with those in a CF card, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported. Other data such as NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs are backed up regularly from an NE to a CF card.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide
NOTE

7 Database Backup and Restoration

When you use the NMS to back up FDB data, system parameters such as NE-IPs, NE-IDs, or subnet masks are not backed up, but LSR IDs are backed up.

NE Database Restoration
l When an NE is warm reset, the system control unit checks whether configuration data is available in the DRDB. If configuration data is available in the DRDB, the system control unit restores data from the DRDB. If the configuration data in the DRDB is damaged, the system control unit restores data from FDB0 and FDB1. When the NE is cold reset, the system control unit restores data from FDB0 and FDB1. When the data in both FDB0 and FDB1 is damaged, data can be restored from the CF card. On the NMS, the FDB data in flash memory can be restored from an NMS server without interruption of TDM services. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board.

l l l l

7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually
The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, crossconnect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/ Restoration from the Main Menu.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Step 2 In NE View, click Find. Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions and search for the NE that requires database backup. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Click Backup.
NOTE

Press and hold the Ctrl button on the keyboard, you can select multiple NEs to back up the data at one time.

Step 6 Set the data backup path to NMS Server or NMS Client according to the requirements.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Step 7 Click Start to start backing up the NE data. In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of backing up the data. After the data backup is successful, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation is successful. ----End

7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy
You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing up the database.

Precautions
NOTE

During the database backup by the NMS, do not recover or backup data by USB flash drive.

7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy
Through this task, you can set the backup policy for a specific NE.

Prerequisites
l l You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Background Information
Each NE has a default data backup policy.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

l l l l

Database packages are backed up once at 2:00. The default backup policy is disabled by default. A maximum of five database packages can be backed up at a time. Data changes do not trigger any backup operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu.

Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Click New Policy. Step 4 Optional: Click Step 5 Optional: Click to import the information of the NEs. to export the information of the NEs.

The information of the selected NEs is stored in the specified location. Step 6 In NE Table, select one or more NEs. Step 7 Click Next.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Then, the Setting Policy dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Set Policy Name, Period Backup Policy, and Period Save Policy.
NOTE

l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the NMS performs the backup operation within the specified period, day, and time. l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the backup policy is still in the Disable state although the policy period reaches the specified period, day, and time.

Step 9 Click Advanced Settings, and set Backup Type, Max Backup Num, and Configuration Change Backup for a certain type of NEs. Step 10 Click OK. Step 11 Click OK. ----End

7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device
Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the running state.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Enable Backup Policy. ----End

7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device
Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the suspended state.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Disable Backup Policy. ----End

7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS
If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are saved previously.

Prerequisites
l l l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The data to be restored must be backed up. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Precautions
NOTE

During the database restoring by the NMS, do not recover or backup data by USB flash drive.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/ Restoration from the Main Menu.
NOTE

The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In NE List, click In Login, click OK. For the DC, the default user name is szhw and the default password is nesoft. For the license tool, the default user name is lct and the default password is password. If the user name or password has been changed, use the latest one. .

The NE Data Backup/Restoration window is displayed. Step 2 In NE View, click Find. Then, the Find NE dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions to search for the NEs that need to restore databases. Step 4 Click OK.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Step 5 Select the NE whose data needs to be recovered, and click Recover.

NOTE

You can select multiple NEs to recover the data at one time.

Then, the Recover dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select Browse in File Name. Then, the Select File dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Select files from NMS Server or NMS Client, and then choose the files to be recovered. Click OK. Step 8 In the Recover dialog box, click Start. Step 9 Click Yes in the prompt dialog box. The system starts recovering the selected data files on the specified NE. In the NE list of NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of recovering the data. After the data is recovered, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 10 In NE View, right-click the NE and choose Active Database from the shortcut menu. The Active Database dialog box is displayed. Step 11 Click Start to start activating the database.
NOTE

If the NE transmits data services, select Deliver to Board. Services are interrupted during the activation of databases.

In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of activating the database. After the database is activated, Operation Status indicates that the operation is successful. ----End

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

8 Supporting Task

8
About This Chapter

Supporting Task

This chapter describes the common maintenance operations. 8.1 Hardware Loopback Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection. 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time. 8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events The is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the network layer. 8.4 Using the RMON Remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards. 8.5 Setting Alarm and Performance Management Functions The OptiX RTN 950 supports various alarm and performance management functions. 8.6 Querying a Report You can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report. 8.7 Software Loopback Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is used more widely than hardware loopback. 8.8 Reset Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold reset, warm reset. 8.9 PRBS Test
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

8 Supporting Task

The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenance and self-check. 8.10 Querying the License Capacity You can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the license capacity. 8.11 Scanning Interfering Signals You can learn whether intra-frequency or inter-frequency interference exists by scanning frequency spectra in microwave channels. 8.12 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laser rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site. 8.13 Setting the ALS Function The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. This function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, the optical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost. 8.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the NMS. 8.15 Querying Power Consumption of Boards This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board. 8.16 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms. 8.17 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring function so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to which the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. This function is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board. 8.18 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port Through the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate. 8.19 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. The FE/GE ports and ports on the packet plane support this operation. 8.20 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and ports on the packet plane support this operation. 8.21 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation. 8.22 Using the Ethernet Test Frames By using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only the EFP8 board supports this operation.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

8 Supporting Task

8.23 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit When the is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, you can manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required. 8.24 Using IP Ping Commands to Locate Ethernet Service Faults The OptiX RTN 950 can respond to IP ping commands, facilitating Ethernet fault diagnosis. 8.25 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services This section describes the common maintenance operations for end-to-end management on fibers, MPLS tunnels, and PWE3 services.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

8 Supporting Task

8.1 Hardware Loopback
Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection.

Background Information
Hardware loopback is classified into optical cable loopback, PDH cable loopback, and Ethernet electrical port loopback. l Optical cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit optical fibers are connected through a fiber jumper on the ODF. In certain occasions, an optical attenuator is added based on the actual situation, to prevent the optical SFP from being damaged by the excessive receive optical power. PDH cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit PDH cables are connected through a short-circuiting cable or connector on the DDF. Ethernet electrical port loopback indicates that the receive and transmit service signals on one Ethernet port are looped back through a special loopback Ethernet cable.

l l

8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters
The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time.

8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners
When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for cleaning the fiber connectors.

Prerequisites
l l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are contaminated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Cartridge cleaner

Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever. Then, the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-1 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner

Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in the downward direction. Figure 8-2 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area

Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-3 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area

Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area. ----End

8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue
When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.

Prerequisites
l l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are contaminated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l l l Clean solvent Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas
NOTE

l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent. Do not use alcohol or formalin. l The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can substitute the non-woven lens tissue. l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

. When using compressed gas. Ltd. remove the optical fiber and shut down the laser. ----End 8. see 8. Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber adapter is contaminated. The same method can be used to clean fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks The fiber adapters need to be cleaned with optical cleaning sticks. Figure 8-4 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue Step 3 Repeat Step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue. l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the connector surface. Prerequisites l l Before you clean the fiber adapter. Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue. 148 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Step 4 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber tip.12 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. note the following points: l First spray it into the air because the initial spray of condensation may contain certain sediment. This section describes the method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board.2. For details about how to shut down a laser.

Ltd.25 mm. 8. Step 2 Touch the adapter gently with the optical cleaning stick and turn the stick clockwise four to five times. In the case of the LC optical interface. abnormal events. Procedure Step 1 Apply a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick. Tools. l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas. Equipment. Abnormal Events. Equipment. note the following points: l First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of condensation gas may contain some sediment. Do not use alcohol or formalin.3. use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1. use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2. and performance events at the network layer.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Tools. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. and Materials l l l Optical cleaning sticks Clean solvent Special compressed gas NOTE l In the case of the SC and FC optical interface. and Performance Events The is used to browse alarms. l The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can substitute the optical cleaning stick. l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent. and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent.1 Checking the NE Status You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status. Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can clean the adapter tip.3 Browsing Alarms. When using compressed gas.5 mm. Step 3 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber adapter. and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 8.. l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the inner surface of the connector. 149 .

Step 2 In Main Topology. the color of the NE icon on the U2000 indicates the NE status. select the required NE. Skip this step when the Web LCT is used for configuration. click NOTE . Ltd..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions NOTE By default. 150 . Procedure Step 1 In Main Topology. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Click the Attribute tab. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation.

. ----End 8. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer.3. Specify User Name and Password. and choose NE Login. click the Slot Layout tab.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: 1. log in to the NE.3. NOTE The user name is lct by default. The is displayed. User lct has the authority at the system level. 2. 4.2 Checking the Board Status You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram. Step 3 Check the running status of the boards based on the legend description. Step 2 Click the NOTE icon. The password of user lct is password by default. In NE List. Step 4 View the NE status and alarm status. 3. The legend description is displayed. Equipment. the board icon is green. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If a board is running normally. Tools. Select the desired NE. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 On the Main Topology. Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. If Login Status of the NE is Not Logged In. TIP You can also determine the NE status based on the comparison between the NE icon and the description at the Legend tab. 151 .3 Browsing Current Alarms You can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms. check Communication Status of the NE. ----End 8. double-click the desired NE. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Ltd. The NE is in Running Status.

click the Basic Settings tab. Ltd. Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.. Equipment. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 152 . and then click the The Browse Current Alarms tab is displayed by default. icon on the toolbar. select the required NE from the Object Tree. Tools.

record the details of the alarms. select the alarm severity to be queried. 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 1. Click OK. 153 . select the alarm status to be queried. . 4. In Status. NOTE Browse certain alarms on the NE. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. 2. Step 6 Browse the displayed alarms. Ltd. and click 4.. Step 5 Click OK. 3. 2. In Type. In Last Occurrence Time Segment. Option Browse all alarms on the NE. Step 4 Select the object to be queried. click the Alarm Source tab. 3. Step 7 Select the newly generated alarms. Description Select All Objects. Choose Add > Object below NE. Step 3 In the Filter dialog box. specify the alarm clearance time. and click Acknowledge. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. select the alarm type. In Clearance Time Segment. Select Custom. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE. 1. Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. specify the alarm generation time. In Severity.

you can also click an alarm indicator on the toolbar to display the NE alarms of the specific severity. l l l l You can click You can click You can click You can click NOTE (red) to browse the network-wide critical alarms. which are not cleared. Ltd. From left to right. ----End Related Information A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. (orange) to browse the network-wide major alarms.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures. see A. By Web LCT.4 Browsing Current Performance Events of the radio link You can learn about the current operating status of a radio link by browsing its current performance data. you can browse the network-wide alarms based on the alarm severity by clicking the alarm indicators in the upper right corner. By U2000.. (yellow) to browse the network-wide minor alarms. By default. For the details. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. the alarm indicators and corresponding alarm severities are as follows: l l l l l Red: critical alarm Orange: major alarm Yellow: minor alarm Purple: warning Light blue: abnormal event 8. the number shown by each indicator indicates the number of current network-wide alarms. 154 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task The Confirm dialog box is displayed. of the specific severity. (light-blue) to browse the network-wide warning alarms. Step 8 Click Yes. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher. Step 9 Notify the troubleshooting personnel to clear the alarms in time.

3. ----End 8. Procedure Step 1 In the Main topology.5 Browsing Historical Performance Data of a Radio Link You can learn about the operating status of a radio link by browsing its historical performance data over a specific period. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.. and choose Configuration > Radio Link Performance from the Function Tree. right click the desired radio link. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 2 Click the History Performance tab.. Equipment. to save the exported performance data in a text format. and choose Configuration > Radio Link Performance from the Function Tree. Equipment. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the Main topology. choose Radio Link Performance Statistics from the shortcut list. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: Select the desired radio link from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: Select the desired radio link from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. choose Radio Link Performance Statistics from the shortcut list. Tools. Step 2 Optional: Deselect Auto Refresh and click Save As.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Tools.. 155 . right click the desired radio link. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher. Ltd.

navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. to save the exported data as a . Step 3 Optional: Select the Display Format for the query result. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. The default value is Chart..3. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.. Step 5 Optional: Click Save As. ----End 8. 156 . and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Equipment. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher..jpg file or in a text format. Ltd. Tools. you can browse real-time Ethernet performance statistics. Step 4 Select Link Tx/Rx Power or Link Errors.6 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance After setting the RMON statistics group.

Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. In the NE Explorer. right-click the service(s). and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. In the NE Explorer. 2. 157 . 2. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Table 8-1 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce MPLS tunnel performan ce MPLS Tunnel Browsed Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. PORT8 on the EMS6 board. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services. Select one or more tunnels. CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce CES service 1. 1. 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. right-click the service(s). Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. L2 VPNPW performan ce ETH PWE3 service 1. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. right-click the service (s). select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Select one or more CES services. NOTE a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports. Ltd. right-click the tunnel(s). Integrated IP radio ports. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Smart E1 port Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Click the Static Tunnel tab. select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. L2 VPN performan ce UNI-UNI E-Line service 1. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. and PORT10 on the EFP8 board.

Select one or multiple ports. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Port DS domain performan ce Ports in a DS domain 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select one or multiple ports. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 158 . For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. Select the desired DS domain.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce Port traffic classificati on performan ce Browsed Object ATM PWE3 service Navigation Path 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. 3. Click the Application Object tab. 3. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. right-click the service(s). 2. 3. Ltd. Click the Application Object tab. NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance. 4. Select one or multiple ports. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 3. Select one or multiple ports. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 2.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. 4. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Port priority performan ce Egress queues For FE/GE ports: 1. Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on 1. In the NE Explorer. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 2. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.

EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board. you can browse the historical performance statistics. Sampling Period represents the time unit of the performance statistics. Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected. the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data. Ltd. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list. 3. 159 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Table 8-2 EoS/EoPDH plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce VCG-other performan ce VCTRUN K port Obrowse Object Ethernet portb Navigation Path In the NE Explorer. NOTE If you click Start. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.7 Browsing Historical Ethernet Performance Data After configuring an history group. select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab. NOTE b: EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board.3. ----End 8. NOTE If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group. The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel. 2. Prerequisites l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set. 1. Tools. and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click Resetting begins. Equipment.. Set Sampling Period.

right-click the service (s). In the NE Explorer. L2 VPN performan ce UNI-UNI E-Line service 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. right-click the service(s). Select one or more CES services. 2. In the NE Explorer. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Integrated IP radio ports. Ltd. right-click the service(s). and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select one or more tunnels. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce CES service 1. and PORT10 on the EFP8 board. navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables. PORT8 on the EMS6 board. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services. Click the Static Tunnel tab. 2.. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. NOTE a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports. Table 8-3 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce MPLS tunnel performan ce MPLS Tunnel Browsed Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 3. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. right-click the tunnel(s). Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. 1. 2. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 2. 160 . L2 VPNPW performan ce ETH PWE3 service 1.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce Port traffic classificati on performan ce Browsed Object Smart E1 port Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ATM PWE3 service 1. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 2. 2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. In the NE Explorer. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. 3. Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on 1. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. right-click the service(s). 2. Port priority performan ce Egress queues For FE/GE ports: 1. 2.. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. 161 . Click the Application Object tab. Select one or multiple ports. Ltd. Select one or multiple ports. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. 3. Select one or multiple ports. 4.

Step 4 Click Query. Click and specify the required time span. EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board. Under History Table Type. Step 3 Set the parameters of the historical group. 162 . NOTE If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object Port DS domain performan ce Browsed Object Ports in a DS domain Navigation Path 1. 1. Select one or multiple ports. Select the desired DS domain. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Click the Application Object tab. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Table 8-4 EoS/EoPDH plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce VCG-other performan ce VCTRUN K port Obrowse Object Ethernet portb Navigation Path In the NE Explorer. 2. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 3. Select the performance items to browse. 4. Step 2 Click the History Group tab. NOTE b: EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board.. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list. Ltd. 4. 3. select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. set the time span for the performance items to be browsed. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

and click 4. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Tools. NE.2 Abnormal Events and Handling Procedures. Choose Add > Object below NE. 2.. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Event Source displays Selected Event Source.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8. Browse certain performance events on the 1. An abnormal event refers to an exception that occurs on the system at a particular time rather than an exception that persists for a certain time of period. 163 . Step 4 Click OK.3. Select All Objects. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 2 In the Filter dialog box. For details on how to handle an abnormal event.8 Browsing Abnormal Events You can find the faults that occur on the equipment in a specific time by browsing abnormal events. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE. select the required NE from the Object Tree. click the Event Source tab. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the Main Menu. 3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Select the object to be queried. Option Description Browse all performance events on the NE. Equipment. Select Custom. and then choose Alarm > Browse Abnormal Events from the Function Tree. Click OK. see B. Step 5 Browse the abnormal events. Ltd. . NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Ltd. Prerequisites l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. The Web LCT does not support this operation. Equipment. see Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. Step 5 Click the Count tab. and then choose Performance > Current Performance from the Function Tree. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. and click NOTE . an abnormal event has only the occurrence time.3. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. l Tools. select the required board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.9 Browsing Current Performance Events You can know the running status of the equipment by browsing current SDH/PDH performance events. 164 . and then select Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds. 8. Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 4 Select 15-Minute in the Monitor Period field. Step 3 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. ----End Related Information Being different from an alarm that has both the occurrence time and the clearance time. and then click the Current Performance Data tab. The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu..

NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. do not change drastically.10 Browsing History Alarms You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history alarms. Step 8 Click Query to browse the displayed performance events. ----End 8. 165 . In normal cases. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher. A history alarm refers to an alarm that is already cleared.3. no bit error performance events should be displayed. the gauge indicators.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd. and the number of pointer justification events should be less than six per day. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 9 Re-define the time span by setting Monitor Period to 24-Hour. Step 6 Click Query to browse the current performance events. Step 7 Click the Measure tab. Step 10 Repeat Step 5 through Step 8 to query the current performance events in a period of 24 hours. compared with the history records. click Select All. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. such as the board temperature.. In normal cases. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

icon on the toolbar. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Equipment. In Occurrence Time Segment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Tools. select the required NE from the Object Tree. select the alarm type. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the Main Menu. specify the alarm clearance time. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. The time span starts from the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 3 In the Filter dialog box.. Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box. 2. In Severity. In Type. Ltd. 1. and then click the Click the Browse History Alarms tab. click the Basic Settings tab. 166 . click the Alarm Source tab. In Clearance Time Segment. 3. Step 4 Select the object to be queried. 4. specify the alarm generation time. select the alarm severity to be queried.

Equipment. Step 6 Browse the displayed history alarms. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function. Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane. and then choose Performance > History Performance from the Function Tree.11 Browsing History Performance Events You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history performance events. see Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. 1. Skip this step when the Web LCT is used for configuration. and then click the History Performance Data tab..3. select the required board. and click NOTE . Click OK. You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Ltd. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. Browse certain alarms on the NE. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 3. 2. ----End 8. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Select Custom. 167 . . and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu. Step 5 Click OK. Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source. Choose Add > Object below NE. Prerequisites l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. l Tools. and click 4. Description Select All Objects. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Option Browse all alarms on the NE.

NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu. ----End 8. Data Source.3. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 4 Click the Gauge tab. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. and set Performance Event Type. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Tools.. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 3 Set the parameters. Step 3 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Equipment. Monitor Period. and then choose Performance > Performance ThresholdCrossing from the Function Tree. Click Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 5 Click Query.12 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records You can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE by browsing the performance event threshold-crossing records. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. and set Performance Event Type. Step 6 Click the Count tab. . 168 . select the required board. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. such as Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 7 Click Query. Step 2 Click the Performance Threshold-Crossing Record tab.

Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 5 Click Query. Step 3 Set Monitored Object Filter Condition.13 Browsing UAT Events Learn about the severe abnormalities on the transmission line by browsing UAT events. and Performance Event Type. 169 . Step 4 Set Function Block Type and Display Options. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Monitor Period. and Data Source. Step 6 Browse the performance event threshold-crossing records that are displayed. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time. select the desired board. To.. Ltd. Step 2 Choose Performance > UAT Event from the Function Tree. Instruments and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Skip this step when the Web LCT is used for configuration. Context UAT refers to a period of 10 consecutive seconds during which the bit error ratio per second of the digital signal in either of the transmission directions of a transmission system is inferior to 10-3. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. ----End 8.3. Step 5 Click Query. Tools. From. Step 4 Set the parameters such as Monitored Object Filter Condition. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.

NOTE a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports. In the NE Explorer.1 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance After setting the RMON statistics group. Ltd. it is one of the widely used network management standards. and PORT10 on the EFP8 board. 8. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8. PORT8 on the EMS6 board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel. right-click the tunnel(s). navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables. you can browse real-time Ethernet performance statistics. Table 8-5 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce MPLS tunnel performan ce MPLS Tunnel Browsed Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Tools.4 Using the RMON Remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on the entire network. Currently. 170 . Click the Static Tunnel tab. 3.. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Select one or more tunnels. 1. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Integrated IP radio ports. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 2. Equipment.4.

Select one or multiple ports. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object L2 VPNPW performan ce Browsed Object ETH PWE3 service Navigation Path 1. 3. L2 VPN performan ce UNI-UNI E-Line service 1. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services. Select one or more CES services. Click the Application Object tab. In the NE Explorer. right-click the service(s). and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Smart E1 port Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 2. right-click the service(s). Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services. 171 . 2. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Ltd. CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce Port traffic classificati on performan ce CES service 1. NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance. Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on 1. ATM PWE3 service 1. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. In the NE Explorer. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 2. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. right-click the service (s).. right-click the service(s). Select one or more ATM PWE3 services.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 3. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 2. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. 4. 172 . 4. Table 8-6 EoS/EoPDH plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce VCG-other performan ce VCTRUN K port Obrowse Object Ethernet portb Navigation Path In the NE Explorer. EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 4. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. 3. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select one or multiple ports. Select one or multiple ports. Ltd. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Click the Application Object tab. 2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Select one or multiple ports.. 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object Port priority performan ce Browsed Object Egress queues Navigation Path For FE/GE ports: 1. 2. NOTE b: EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select the desired DS domain. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Click the Basic Attributes tab. select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Port DS domain performan ce Ports in a DS domain 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

NOTE If you click Start. 1. Table 8-7 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Browsed Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. 3.. Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected. Equipment. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group. 173 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Set Sampling Period. Step 4 Click Resetting begins. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list. Tools. The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel. Ltd. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. . ----End 8. navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables.4. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Sampling Period represents the time unit of the performance statistics. Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab.2 Configuring Ethernet Performance Threshold-Crossing Parameters After setting the RMON alarm group. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 2. you can monitor whether the Ethernet performance value crosses its threshold for a long time. the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.

2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. MPLS Tunnel 1.. Smart E1 port Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. In the NE Explorer. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select one or more tunnels. 2. 2. L2 VPNPW performan ce ETH PWE3 service 1. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce CES service 1. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. L2 VPN performan ce UNI-UNI E-Line service 1. right-click the service(s). 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object Extended performan ce MPLS tunnel performan ce Browsed Object Navigation Path NOTE a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. In the NE Explorer. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services. and PORT10 on the EFP8 board. 2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. 174 . 3. Click the Static Tunnel tab. ATM PWE3 service 1. In the NE Explorer. Select one or more CES services. select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. right-click the service (s). Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services. Ltd. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. PORT8 on the EMS6 board. right-click the tunnel(s). Integrated IP radio ports. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. right-click the service(s). select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. right-click the service(s).

right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. 4. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. 3. Click the Application Object tab. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select one or multiple ports. Select one or multiple ports. Click the Application Object tab.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object Port traffic classificati on performan ce Browsed Object Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on Navigation Path 1.. 2. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. 2. 4. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select the desired DS domain. 3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Select one or multiple ports. 3. Ltd. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Port priority performan ce Egress queues For FE/GE ports: 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Port DS domain performan ce Ports in a DS domain 1. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select one or multiple ports. 175 .

Step 4 Click Apply. 2. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Step 3 Click the Event tab and set the corresponding parameters. you can specify how the historical Ethernet performance data is monitored. NOTE b: EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board. NOTE If you configure Ethernet performance threshold-crossing parameters using the Web LCT. ----End 8. EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board. Tools. An Ethernet board stores 50 historical performance data items. Step 2 Click the Object tab and set the corresponding parameters. Set the parameters in the Event tab page.. Ltd.4. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel. and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.3 Configuring the Parameters for Monitoring Historical Ethernet Performance After configuring a historical control group. Select the boards that need to report RMON performance threshold-crossing alarms.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Table 8-8 EoS/EoPDH plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce VCG-other performan ce VCTRUN K port Obrowse Object Ethernet portb Navigation Path In the NE Explorer. Close the displayed dialog box. Equipment. An Ethernet board monitors the historical performance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. 176 . NOTE If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. perform the following steps: 1.

Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group. NOTE a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports. The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. and PORT10 on the EFP8 board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.4 Browsing Historical Ethernet Performance Data After configuring an history group. 177 .. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set.4. Ltd. Step 2 Set the parameters of the historical control group. PORT8 on the EMS6 board. Integrated IP radio ports. you can browse the historical performance statistics. ----End 8. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Equipment. Close the displayed dialog box. navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according to the following tables. Tools. Step 3 Click Apply. Table 8-9 Packet plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce Browsed Object Ethernet porta Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

Ltd. 2. L2 VPNPW performan ce ETH PWE3 service 1. In the NE Explorer. 2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services. 2. L2 VPN performan ce UNI-UNI E-Line service 1. select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. In the NE Explorer. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object MPLS tunnel performan ce Browsed Object MPLS Tunnel Navigation Path 1. In the NE Explorer. 2. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select one or more tunnels. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. right-click the service(s). Click the Static Tunnel tab. right-click the tunnel(s). Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Select one or more CES services. Smart E1 port Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. right-click the service (s). CES-PW performan ce CES performan ce ATM/IMA (access side) performan ce ATM-PW performan ce ATM PWE3 performan ce CES service 1. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. right-click the service(s). and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. ATM PWE3 service 1. right-click the service(s). select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.. 178 . 3.

right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 2. 3. Select the desired DS domain.. 4. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Performa nce Object Port traffic classificati on performan ce Browsed Object Ports that perform complex traffic classificati on Navigation Path 1. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. 2. 3. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Port DS domain performan ce Ports in a DS domain 1. Select one or multiple ports. For Integrated IP radio ports: 1. 2. 4. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. 179 . 3. Click the Application Object tab. Port priority performan ce Egress queues For FE/GE ports: 1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Ltd. Select one or multiple ports. Select one or multiple ports. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. right-click and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Click the Application Object tab. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 3. Click the Basic Attributes tab. 4. Select one or multiple ports. NOTE Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic classification performance.

5 Setting Alarm and Performance Management Functions The OptiX RTN 950 supports various alarm and performance management functions. you can manually enable or disable performance monitoring for NEs. NOTE b: EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list. 180 . Step 2 Click the History Group tab. 2. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Under History Table Type. set the time span for the performance items to be browsed. 1. Ltd. Click and specify the required time span. select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. ----End 8. Step 4 Click Query. and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. 4. 3. EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board. or set the performance monitoring period. Equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Table 8-10 EoS/EoPDH plane Performa nce Object Basic performan ce Extended performan ce VCG-other performan ce VCTRUN K port Obrowse Object Ethernet portb Navigation Path In the NE Explorer..1 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs By performing this operation task. 8. Tools.5. NOTE If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select the performance items to browse. Step 3 Set the parameters of the historical group.

----End 8. only after selecting Enabled and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area. Click Apply.Close the displayed dialog box.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE l Generally. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. 3. 181 . Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour. and then choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. 1. select the NE from the Object Tree. Tools. 4. 2.2 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms This section describes how to set the severity and auto reporting status of specific alarms. only after selecting Enabled in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area. Ltd. Instruments and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs. Step 2 Configure the performance monitoring parameters of the NEs.5. l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function. both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled.

Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree. select the desired board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Instruments and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.5. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Severity and Auto Reporting from the Function Tree. Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings. 182 . NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. select the desired object. ----End 8.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.3 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects This section describes how to suppress specific alarms for a specific monitored object. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.. Step 3 Select any items in the column Event and set Severity and Auto Reporting Status for them. Tools.

Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 3 Set Monitored Object and click Query. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. ----End 8. Tools.. Step 4 Set Status in Alarm Suppression. Step 5 Click Apply. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.4 Suppressing Alarms for NEs This section describes how to suppress certain alarms for NEs.5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 183 . Instruments and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

----End 8. Step 3 Set Status in Alarm Suppression. Tools. Step 3 Set Alarm Reversion to Enable (Manually Restore). NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. select the NE. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree.. Step 4 Click Apply. Ltd. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.5 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports This section describes how to reverse alarms for service ports. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 184 .5. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 2 Choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree. select the NE. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Instruments and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.

NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 8 Set Reversion Status for the required port. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Instruments and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Step 9 Click Apply. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. select the desired board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 6 In the NE Explorer. 185 . NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.5.6 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion for specific monitored objects. Tools. Step 10 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Click Apply. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.. Step 7 Choose Alarm > Alarm Reversion from the Function Tree. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. ----End 8.

the AIS signal is not inserted when this alarm occurs. select the desired board. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. ----End 8. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > AIS Insertion from the Function Tree. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.5. the AIS signal is inserted when this alarm occurs.. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Ltd. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > UNEQ Insertion Switch from the Function Tree. select the desired board. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Tools. 186 . NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion.7 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion for service ports. If you select Enabled under an alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. otherwise. Instruments and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion. Step 4 Click Apply. otherwise. Step 4 Click Apply. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Tools. ----End 8.5.. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 3 Set bit error thresholds. Instruments and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. select the desired board. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > Bit Error Alarm Threshold from the Function Tree. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. the UNEQ signal is not inserted when this alarm occurs. If you select Enabled under an alarm. 187 . the UNEQ signal (all 0s) is inserted when this alarm occurs.8 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports This section describes how to set bit error thresholds for service ports. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd.

Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree. select the desired board. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. ----End 8. Instruments and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 3 Set the following parameters: Monitor Status. Tools. 188 .5. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 15-Minute Auto-Report. Ltd.9 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events This section describes how to set monitoring and auto-report status of specific performance events for monitored objects. and 24-Hour AutoReport.

----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 189 . Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Threshold from the Function Tree. ----End 8. Step 4 Click Apply. Instruments and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Tools.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 3 Set Threshold Value. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Ltd. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. select the desired board.5..10 Setting Performance Thresholds This section describes how to set the thresholds of specific performance events for monitored objects.

manufacture. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. their counts are cleared and they immediately start a new counting period. Step 5 In the Hint dialog box that is displayed.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8.11 Resetting Performance Registers This section describes how to reset performance registers. Instruments and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. ----End 8. After performance registers are reset.. Ltd. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Step 3 Set Monitored Object and register types. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click Reset. Tools. select the desired board. 190 . Step 2 Choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree.6 Querying a Report You can obtain the version. and microwave link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.5. click Yes.

and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the Main Menu. In Filter window. click the Board List tab. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6.. All the board version information about the NE is displayed on the Board Information Report tab. Step 5 The board information displayed in the Board List. Step 2 Select Board from Physical Inventory Type in the Physical Inventory window. set the board or board attributes that need to be queried. Step 3 In Physical Inventory. Click OK. Equipment. Ltd. Choose Report > Board Information Report from the Function Tree. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. and software version of each board by querying the board information report. 191 . Tools. Step 4 Click Filter.1 Querying the Board Information Report You can obtain the logic version.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: Select the NE in the NE Explorer.

. you can save and archive the board information as a text file.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide TIP 8 Supporting Task To specify board parameters to be queried. Set the parameters in Saving Options. Then. right-click the parameter name column and choose desired parameters from the drop-down list. Step 7 Click OK. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 8 Close the dialog box that is displayed. 192 . NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 6 Optional: Click Save As.

2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report You can obtain the manufacturing information about each board and the SFP module by querying the board manufacturing information report.6. All the board manufacture information about the NE is displayed on the Board Detail Information Report tab. . NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 2 In Board Manufacturer Information. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Equipment. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Inventory > Project Document > Board Manufacturer Information from the Main Menu.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8. and click Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. click the Board Manufacturer Information tab. 193 . Tools. Step 3 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane. Ltd. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Choose Report > Board Detail Information Report from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 5 Click Query. Ltd. ----End 8. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave Link Report. Then. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Tools. Procedure Step 1 In Main Menu. Equipment. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation.6. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 7 Optional: Click Save As. Step 8 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 9 Click OK. The Query processing bar is displayed. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. 194 .. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report You can obtain the current and recent transmit/receive power of microwave links by querying the microwave link information report. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. you can save and archive the board manufacturing information as a text file.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 2 In the left pane of the Microwave Link Report tab page. choose one or more NEs. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As.6. Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Then. ----End 8.. 195 . Step 6 Click OK.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report By querying the network-wide license report. you can save and archive the microwave link information as a text file. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. you can check the license information of each NE. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. and click . Tools. Instruments. Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave License Capacity Report from the Main Menu. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Ltd.7 Software Loopback Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options. During software loopback.7. the license report is saved and archived as a file. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Hence. Tools. ----End 8. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need not visit the engineering site. software loopback is used more widely than hardware loopback. and click Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Save the license report as a file and archive the file properly.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 2 Select one or more NEs in the left pane..1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board The SDH optical interface board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/outloop and the VC-4 path inloop/outloop. 196 . and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. . 8. Then. Equipment. Step 6 Click OK.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Figure 8-6 Optical/electrical interface outloop Backplane SDH optical interface board SDH The VC-4 path outloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the logic processing unit towards the remote equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Context The optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-7 VC-4 path outloop Backplane SDH optical interface board VC-4 The VC-4 path inloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the logic processing unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-5 Optical/electrical interface inloop SDH optical interface board SDH Backplane The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment. Ltd. 197 .

Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback VC4 Loopback Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements. 198 .. For details.. Then.7. Step 5 Click Apply.2 Setting Loopback for the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board The channelized STM-1 processing board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/ outloop.. see 8. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes. Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function. Step 6 Click OK. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. and select the loopback mode from the drop-down list. To Perform.. Step 3 Select By Function. by defaults). Ltd. Optical/electrical interface loopback VC-4 path loopback Choose.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-8 VC-4 path inloop Backplane SDH optical board VC-4 Precautions CAUTION l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. Procedure Step 1 Select the SDH optical interface board from the NE Explorer. ----End 8.

and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Tools. Equipment. Ltd. Figure 8-10 Optical/electrical interface outloop Channelized STM-1 backplane Processing Board VC-12 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 199 . Context The optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an STM-1 port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-9 Optical/electrical interface inloop backplane Channelized STM-1 Processing Board VC-12 The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an STM-1 port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function.7. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Then. Equipment. Procedure Step 1 Select the channelized STM-1 processing board from the Object Tree. Context The tributary inloop is a process wherein the signals over a PDH port are looped back at the coding/decoding unit towards the backplane. Step 3 Select Advanced Attributes tab. see 8. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End 8.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions CAUTION l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.3 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board The tributary board supports the tributary inloop and outloop. Tools. 200 . Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. For details. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. by defaults)..

Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-11 Tributary inloop Backplane PDH interface board PDH The tributary outloop is a process wherein the signals on a tributary path are looped back at the PDH interface board of the local IDU towards the remote equipment. Procedure Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Figure 8-12 Tributary outloop Backplane PDH interface board PDH Precautions CAUTION The services may be interrupted on the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down list. 201 .. Step 3 Select By Function. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the path based on the requirements. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Step 6 Click OK. ----End 8. Figure 8-13 E1 inloop Smart E1 Processing Board E1 Backplane The E1 outloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the Smart E1 processing board of the local IDU to the remote equipment.. Then. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. the Confirm dialog box is displayed.4 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board A Smart E1 processing board supports inloops and outloops on E1 ports.7. Context The E1 inloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the coding/ decoding unit to the backplane. Ltd. 202 . Instruments. Figure 8-14 E1 outloop Smart E1 Backplane Processing Boards E1 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 5 Click Apply. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions CAUTION l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select the required port.5 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board The Packet-plane Ethernet interface board supports the Ethernet port inloop (at the MAC layer and PHY layer). Backplane Smart E1 Processing Board E1 Step 3 In the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 5 Click Apply. see 8. by default). For details. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box. 203 .7. The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. ----End 8. Ltd. l A software loopback may be released automatically within a period (5 minutes.. Procedure Step 1 Select the Smart E1 processing board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

The Ethernet port PHY inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet frame signals are looped back at the interface module of the board at the PHY layer towards the backplane. Equipment.. Ltd. do not perform any loopback on the port. Tools. PORT 8 on the EMS6 board can not be configured with loops. by defaults). Context The Ethernet port MAC inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet physical signals are looped back at the service processing module of the board at the MAC layer towards the backplane. 204 . and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 8-15 Ethernet port inloop Backplane Ethernet service processing board MAC PHY Precautions NOTE PORT 10 on the EFP8 board can not be configured with loops. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes. For details. CAUTION l A loopback operation results in service interruption.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function. see 8. In this case. CAUTION When Port Mode of an Ethernet port is set to Layer 3. LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.

.. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 Select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. MAC loopback 1. Ltd. Tools. NOTE PORT 9 in the EFP8 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Equipment.. Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type. ----End 8.7. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. 2. 2. PHY loopback 1. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. A PHY layer inloop is an inloop where the interface module loops back the Ethernet frame signals towards the backplane through the PHY layer. Context A MAC layer inloop is an inloop where the service processing module loops back the Ethernet physical signals towards the backplane through the MAC layer. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Choose. the Confirm dialog box is displayed.6 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board EPF8 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-12 paths.. Step 4 Click Apply. To Perform.. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 5 Click OK. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port based on the requirements. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then. 205 . PORT 7 in the EMS6 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer. EMS6 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-3 paths.

206 . Figure 8-17 VC-12 path inloop Backplane EOPDH EFP8 An inloop in a VC-3 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals in a specific VC-3 path towards the backplane.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-16 Ethernet port inloop Backplane Ethernet service processing board MAC PHY An inloop in a VC-12 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals in a specific VC-12 path towards the backplane.. Figure 8-18 VC-3 path inloop Backplane EOS EMS6 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Step 4 Click Apply. 3. l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default). To Perform. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. For details... 2. Select the required VC-12 path. VC-3 path inloop 1. Step 7 Close the prompt dialog box.. Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port as required. Procedure Step 1 In NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. The confirmation dialog box is displayed. 3. 3. Select the required VC-3 path. 2. see 8. 2. VC-12 path inloop 1.. Step 5 Click OK. 3. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MAC loopback 1. Ltd. 207 . Click the Basic Attributes tab. NOTE A VC-3 loopback can be performed only after the EMS6 is configured with services. Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree according to the loopback type. Select By Function. Select External Port. PHY loopback Choose. Select External Port.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function. Select By Board/Port(Channel). select the required board from the Object Tree. Step 6 Click OK.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions CAUTION l A loopback operation may interrupt the services on the port where the loopback is performed. 1. 2. The prompt dialog box is displayed.. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

IF port outloop. IF port outloop. The IFU2/IFX2 board supports the IF port inloop. and port MAC loopback. and composite port outloop. and Materials U2000 Context The IF port inloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit towards the backplane.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board Loopbacks on the IF board are classified into IF port loopback.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8. Figure 8-19 IF port inloop Backplane IF signal IF board The IF port outloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit of the board towards the remote equipment. Tools.7. Ltd. 208 . composite port inloop. IF port outloop. Equipment. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. and port MAC inloop. composite port inloop. composite port loopback. composite port inloop. composite port outloop. Figure 8-20 IF port outloop Backplane IF board IF signal The composite port inloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the backplane. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and composite port outloop. The ISU2/ISX2/ ISV3 board supports the IF port inloop. The IF1 board supports the IF port inloop..

the operation may fail. Ltd. In this case. Figure 8-22 Composite port outloop Backplane IF board Microwave baseband signal Precautions CAUTION l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l Before performing the loopback operation for the IFU2/IFX2 board.. 209 . disable the AM function at both ends of the radio link.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function. switch the standby IF board to the working state forcedly. l To perform the software loopback on the standby IF board of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-21 Composite port inloop Backplane IF board Microwave baseband signal The composite outloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the remote equipment. For details. by defaults). CAUTION When Port Mode of an port is set to Layer 3. Otherwise. LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults. see 8. do not perform any loopback on the port. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE explorer. Then. Select Advanced Attributes.. Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Step 5 Click Apply. Select IF Attributes tab. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. 1. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. 3. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set IF Port Loopback. Step 3 Select Loopback Attributes. To Perform. 3.. Composite port loopback 1. 3. 210 . Select By Function. MAC loopback 1.. 4. Choose Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback from the drop-down list. 2.. 2. Step 4 Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set loopback type. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type. Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set MAC Loopback. Step 6 Click OK to close the dialog box. 2. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Choose Configuration > Digital Interface from the Function Tree. IF port loopback Choose..

Precautions CAUTION l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. see 8. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes. ----End 8.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function.7. Step 2 Choose Diagnoses&Maintenance > NE Lookback from the Function Tree. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. by defaults). Step 3 Select the desired loopback status for the desired port in the table. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. 211 . Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.8 Setting Software Loopback for the NE This task sets the loopback for the object on an NE. a dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Tools.. Then. NOTE Composite loopback displays as Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. For details. Equipment. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Ltd. Step 3 Select the local IF board. Equipment.9 Setting Software Loopback for the Microwave Link This task sets the loopback for the object on a single-hop radio link. Precautions CAUTION The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 4 Click Apply. ----End 8. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. 212 . Tools. Step 2 ChooseDiagnoses&Maintenance > Radio Link Lookback from the Function Tree.7.

and Materials U2000 Service Trail Figure 8-23 shows how to locate a fault by performing a loopback operation. Tools. the dialog box is displayed. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Click OK. ----End 8. Figure 8-23 Service trail PDH tributary board Cross-connect IF board board ODU ODU SDH IF Cross-connect tributary board board board NE1 NE2 PDH Cross-connect tributary board board IF board ODU ODU IF Cross-connect board board SDH tributary board NE4 NE3 Optical cable Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Equipment. Then. 213 .10 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations Loopback is a common method of locating the fault.7. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 4 Select the desired loopback status for the desired object..

During the board initialization. replace the IF board and ODU to check whether the IF board or ODU is faulty. If the fault is located in the service receiver. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the FPGA. 2. warm reset. 8. Ltd. ----End 8. Procedure Step 1 If the services are available on the radio links. Reset is classified into cold reset. perform the inter-station loopbacks to narrow down the fault to a specific hop. is re-loaded. 214 . if any. Equipment.8 Reset Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. set outloop for the PDH tributary board to check whether the interface board or switch unit is faulty. perform the intra-station loopbacks to narrow down the fault to a specific NE or board. instead of sectional loopbacks. Step 2 After the fault is located on the specific radio link. and then perform the inter-station loopbacks to locate the fault. to check whether the service receiver or the radio link is faulty. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.8. If the radio link is faulty. 1. 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions The LSP Traceroute method. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. is recommended for locating the faults of PWE3 services. Tools..1 Cold Reset Cold reset is a process wherein the board software is reset and the board is re-initiated. 1. Set inloop for the IF board on the NEs at both ends of the radio link where the fault occurs. Set the outloops for the SDH optical interface boards on NE2 and NE3.

Tools. the board software is reset but the services are not interrupted. Step 2 Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu.. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 2 Choose Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Procedure Step 1 In Running Status of the U2000. Step 3 Click OK. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Procedure Step 1 In Running Status of the U2000. 215 .8. Equipment. Ltd. the dialog box is displayed. the dialog box is displayed. Then. ----End 8. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions CAUTION Cold reset causes service interruption because it is similar to the procedure of removing and inserting a board. right-click the board where the cold reset needs to be performed. Step 3 Click OK. right-click the board where the warm reset needs to be performed. Then.2 Warm Reset Warm reset is a process wherein the board software is reset but the board is not re-initiated. Precautions During warm reset. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed.

Ltd. 8. you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the tributary board. Figure 8-24 PRBS test in the tributary direction DDF frame PDH unit PRBS Transmitter 1 PRBS Recevicer 1 Loopback at the DDF frame The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be performed to check the connection between the tributary board and the remote NE.9. and Materials U2000 Context The OptiX RTN 950 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the cross-connect direction. Tools.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board If a special test tool is unavailable. 216 . as shown in Figure 8-25. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 8-24.. Equipment.9 PRBS Test The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenance and self-check. The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be performed to check the connection between the tributary board and the DDF. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8.

see Figure 8-24 and Figure 8-25. the services carried on the other ports may be interrupted transiently. 217 . Procedure Step 1 Set the loopback at the proper location. l If you perform a PRBS test in the tributary direction of a port on the SP3S/SP3D board. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time. the services in the tested path are interrupted. Ltd.. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. For details. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-25 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction a) IF board working as the line board PDH interface board PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect board IF board OUT IF board 3 NE at the local end 1 VC-4 inloop or composite port inloop 2 IF port inloop 3 IF port outloop NE at the opposite end b) Line board working as the SDH optical interface board PDH interface board PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect board OUT SDH optical interface board 3 NE at the local end 1 VC-4 inloop 2 Port inloop 3 Port outloop NE at the opposite end Precautions CAUTION l During the PRBS test.

click Query to check the test result. Step 4 Select the port to be tested.9. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test. Tools. A prompt is displayed. you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the IF board. Step 9 On the Test Result tab page. Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. check BitErrors and BER(%). Step 8 When Process is displayed as 100%. Step 6 Click Start to Test. and one hour. Equipment. 10 minutes. NOTE l The PRBS test supports three time units: one second. ----End 8. 218 . and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board If a special test tool is unavailable. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 2 Select the E1 interface board from the NE Explorer in the Object Tree. Step 7 Click OK. Ltd.

or one hour.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Precautions Figure 8-26 PRBS test of the IF board IF board PRBS transmitter ODU ODU IF board 1 PRBS transmitter 1 1 NE at the local end NE at the opposite end 1 IF port outloop CAUTION l During the PRBS test. Procedure Step 1 Perform an outloop on the opposite IF board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 6 Click Start to Test. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time. see 8. Step 2 Select the IF board from the Object Tree. Ltd. l The standby IF unit does not support the PRBS test.. Step 7 Click OK. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. For details.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test. Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time. 10 minutes. A prompt is displayed. Before you perform the PRBS test for the standby IF board of a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group. the services in the tested path are interrupted. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. NOTE l The time unit of the PRBS test can be one second. you must switch the standby IF board to the working state.7. 219 .

and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 220 . Equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 8 When Process is displayed as 100%. Tools. ----End 8. The PRBS test in the UNI direction can be performed to check the cable connect to the Smart E1 processing board. check BitErrors and BER(%). Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. as shown in Figure 8-28. Figure 8-27 PRBS test in the tributary direction Smart E1 processing unit PRBS Transmitter 1 PRBS Recevicer 1 Loopback at the port The PRBS test in the NNI direction can be performed to check the connection between the Smart E1 processing board and the remote NE. Ltd. Step 9 On the Test Result tab page. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context The OptiX RTN 950 supports the PRBS test in the UNI direction and in the NNI direction. as shown in Figure 8-27.3 Performing a PRBS Test for the Smart E1 Processing Board If a special test tool is unavailable. click Query to check the test result.9. you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the Smart E1 processing board..

221 . Step 2 Select the E1 interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. l In a PRBS test in the NNI direction for an SATOP CES service. l A PRBS test can be performed for a CES service that is encapsulated in CESoPSN mode and is carried by timeslots 1 to 31 on either UNI or NNI side. see Figure 8-27 and Figure 8-28. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the LOOP_ALM alarm will be reported on the E1 service where this service is deployed.. Step 5 Set Diraction and Frame Format. Procedure Step 1 Set the loopback at the proper location. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. For details. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd. the services in the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-28 PRBS test in the NNI direction Smart E1 processing unit PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect Unit ETH service processing unit ETH service processing unit OUT 3 NE at the local end 1 ETH port inloop 2 ETH port outloop 3 NE at the opposite end ETH port inloop Precautions CAUTION l During the PRBS test. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.

browse the license capacity of the NE. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.11 Scanning Interfering Signals You can learn whether intra-frequency or inter-frequency interference exists by scanning frequency spectra in microwave channels. Step 6 Click Start to Test. check BitErrors and BER(%). and one hour. Ltd. ----End 8. Prerequisites l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Step 9 On the Test Result tab page. Tools. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 8 When Process is displayed as 100%. Step 7 Click OK. 222 . before scanning the reference signal. click Query to check the test result.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task l The PRBS test supports three time units: one second. ----End 8. A prompt is displayed. Step 2 Choose Configuration > License Management. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.10 Querying the License Capacity You can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the license capacity. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Equipment. 10 minutes. Step 3 Click Query..

Equipment. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Set the parameters. Tools. ----End 8. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: Choose Diagnosis&Maintenance > ODU Frequency Scan. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Equipment. Procedure Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board or the channelized STM-1 processing board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Ltd. Step 2 Choose Diagnosis&Maintenance > ODU Frequency Scan. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from Object tree in the NE Explorer. 223 . click Start to Scan. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.12 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut. Step 3 Set the parameters.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Tools. you can set the on/off state of the laser rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site. colick Start to Scan. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

and then set Laser Interface Status. and then set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. 3. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click OK. 3. 224 . Equipment. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Select a port. Select a port. 2.. Ltd. Select Laser Switchfrom the drop-down list. Select Basic Attributes.13 Setting the ALS Function The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. 4. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Operation object SDH optical interface board Operation Steps 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. and then set Laser Switch. This function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services. Step 2 Click Apply. Step 4 Click OK. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. A prompt is displayed. 2. Choose By Function. or the received optical signals are lost. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 8. Tools. the optical fiber is faulty. Step 3 Select a port. Procedure Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. channelized STM-1 processing board 1.

225 .15 Querying Power Consumption of Boards This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board. Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function. an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU muting. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Instruments. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the NMS. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. Tools. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Tools. Step 2 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree. ----End 8. Step 3 In Automatic Disabling of NE Function. software loopback. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Equipment.. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Menu.14 Setting the Automatic Release Function To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations. ----End 8. Click . set Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time (min). and other operations that require you to exercise caution. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.

This function is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board. and then click Step 4 Click Query. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 6 On the Board Power tab page. select the Board Power tab. and check Port Impedance. you can enable the port mirroring function so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to which the Ethernet tester is connected. Step 5 Select a port.16 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms. ----End 8.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Step 4 Select Port in the list. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. 226 . 8. Then. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Equipment. browse Nominal Power Consumption and Current Power Consumption of the selected board. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Ltd. Step 3 Select the required NE or board from the object tree.17 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port. Step 2 In the NE Power dialog box. Procedure Step 1 Select a PDH tributary board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.. The Query progress bar is displayed. Step 3 Select By Board/Port(Channel). you can monitor and analyze the packets. ----End . Tools.

The equipment duplicates the packets received from the mirroring port to the observing port. For the ports on EFP8/EMS6 board: l In the ingress direction Also in the upstream direction. Ltd. 227 . Tools. select the EFP8 or EMS6 board.. Context The supports the mirroring. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. In the ingress direction. Uplink Listened Port. and then transmits the packets from the observing port to the Ethernet tester. Equipment. and analyzing of the Ethernet packets that are received or transmitted on the port. and then transmits the packets from the observing port to the Ethernet tester. and set Mirror Listener Port. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the ports mirror the data transmitted from the VCTRUNK to the TDM side. Procedure Step 1 In NE Explorer. The equipment duplicates the packets transmitted by the mirroring port to the observing port. Figure 8-29 Schematic diagram of Ethernet port mirroring Ethernet processing unit Mirroring port Ethernet equipment Duplication Monitoring port Ethernet tester To monitor the data in different directions. In the egress direction. Step 3 Click New. l In the egress direction Also in the downstream direction. port mirroring can be performed in the ingress direction and in the egress direction. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. monitoring. and Downlink Listened Port. the ports mirror the data transmitted from the TDM side to the VCTRUNK.

select the required NE from the Object Tree. you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 4 Click OK. 4. 3. 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.18 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port Through the operation. ----End 8. select the required NE from the Object Tree. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. 2. and Receiving Rate. Ltd. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Tools. In NE Explorer. 4. Step 3 Optional: Query the attributes of the external port on the EFP8 board. In NE Explorer. Check the parameters such as Port Physical Parameters. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. 2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. such as rate. Transmitting Rate. NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation.. Equipment. Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate. 228 . 3. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Optional: Query the attributes of the FE or GE port on the packet plane. Step 2 Optional: Querying the attributes of the port.

229 . Physical Bandwidth. 1.. 3. In the system. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Tools. 4. 5. Ltd. you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. Instruments.19 Setting Traffic. you can query the attributes of the external ports on the EFP8 board (PORT1 to PORT8) and the attributes of the bridging port on the EFP8 board (PORT9). To enable the flow monitoring function on a port. NOTE By performing this operation. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days. the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In NE Explorer. Procedure Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Background Information After the flow monitoring function is enabled. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. see 8. select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree. The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port.19 Setting Traffic.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. Physical Bandwidth. Select External Port. physical bandwidth. or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports To query the traffic. The FE/GE ports and ports on the packet plane support this operation. the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree. Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate. ----End 8. In normal cases. every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes.

the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports. and Display Mode. Monitored Indicator. Procedure Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Instruments.4. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Bandwidth Usage Monitoring to Enabled for the Ethernet port. or Bandwidth Utilization This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic. Step 4 Set the Monitored Object. Step 4 Click Apply. This operation allows only the queries about port-based Ethernet traffic by using U2000.1 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance.19 Setting Traffic. physical bandwidth.or PW-based traffic. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. ----End 8. For how to query Tunnel. The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. Start Time. Step 3 Select the Query Flow tab. Set Flow Monitoring. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. see 8. End Time. In normal cases. Ltd. Physical Bandwidth. Tools. The FE/GE ports and ports on the packet plane support this operation. the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. Step 5 Close the displayed Result dialog box. 230 . Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree. Physical Bandwidth Monitoring. In the system. or bandwidth utilization within a certain period.. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days.20 Querying Traffic. Physical Bandwidth.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 3 Select the Set Monitoring tab. Background Information After the flow monitoring function is enabled. see 8. To enable the flow monitoring function on a port.

----End 8. select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation. Procedure Step 1 In NE Explorer. Ltd.21 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. Precautions NOTE The receive traffic threshold cannot be set for the Ethernet ports on the packet domain. Tools. Step 6 Click Apply. Instruments. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Select the Advanced Attributes tab.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 5 Click Query. Step 5 Select an Ethernet port and set Traffic Threshold and Port Traffic Threshold Time Window. Step 6 Close the displayed Result dialog box. Step 3 Select External Port. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. 231 . The system displays the query result in a table or in a graph.. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

After receiving the test frame. the Ethernet board returns the response frame. 232 . Ltd. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. One frame is transmitted to the opposite Ethernet board per second. Background Information The Ethernet board uses the specific GFP management frame or Ethernet frame as the test frame. Only the EFP8 board supports this operation. Procedure Step 1 In NE Explorer. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Upon receiving the response frame. Tools. the Ethernet service processing board at the local end can judge the connectivity of the VCTRUNK in between. you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. select the EFP8 board. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.. The service traffic is encapsulated or mapped by using the GFP method.22 Using the Ethernet Test Frames By using the Ethernet test frames. Instruments. Figure 8-30 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards Test frame Local Ethernet board Remote Ethernet board Response frame Precautions CAUTION Do not use the test frames when the network traffic is heavy.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8.

Step 3 Select the test port and click Clear Counters. Equipment. If some of the test frames are lost but no alarm is reported on the SDH side.23 Switching the System Control Unit and the CrossConnect Unit When the is configured with two system control. Step 5 Click Apply.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Then.. 233 . and timing boards. Tools. Step 7 Check Counter of Frames Sent and Counter of Received Response of Test Frame. you can manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Test frames are used to check the network connectivity. ----End Related Information If you choose the continue mode. the Ethernet Test dialog box is displayed. 8. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. you can infer that the network is faulty. click Query. cross-connect. NOTE It is recommended that you choose "Burst mode". Procedure Step 1 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 4 Set Send Mode and Frames to Send. the local port transmits test frames continuously until the test is disabled. Select Clear All Counters . Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. If all the test frames are lost. you can infer that the network is normal. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. The system starts transmitting and receiving test frames. Step 6 After Status displays Finished Sending. and a maximum of 10 frames can be transmitted each time. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.

For example. the RNC initiates IP ping packets to the UNI port on NE1. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Step 3 In 1+1 Protection List. and Materials U2000 NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. Equipment. click OK. Step 4 Perform the 1+1 protection switching on the board. 234 . l Far-end IP ping The customer edge equipment (CE) initiates IP ping packets to a UNI port on a far-end transmission NE.24 Using IP Ping Commands to Locate Ethernet Service Faults The OptiX RTN 950 can respond to IP ping commands. NOTE Then. Click Working/Protection Switching. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.. The far-end IP ping function is generally used to check whether a fault occurs on the CE or its far-end Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If. as shown in Figure 8-31. facilitating Ethernet fault diagnosis.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.. select Cross-Connect Protection Pair. ----End 8. The transmission NE responds to the IP ping packets.. Active Board is set to Working Board Active Board is set to Protection Board Step 5 In the prompt that is displayed.. The transmission NE responds to the IP ping packets. Click Restore Working/Protection. Context Two types of IP ping functions are supported: l Near-end IP ping The customer edge equipment (CE) initiates IP ping packets to a UNI port on a near-end transmission NE. Ltd. Tools. The near-end IP ping function is generally used to check whether a fault occurs on the CE or its near-end transmission NE..

the CE must be able to learn MAC addresses based on ARP request packets. This enables NEs enabled with the IP ping function to select the correct service for transmitting IP ping packets based on the PVIDs of UNI ports. l l Sample IP Ping Connection Figure 8-32 shows the test procedure. when the port tag attribute is access). using the Ethernet service between PORT1 on NE1 and PORT1 on NE2 as an example.. For example. the protocol VLAN ID must be set to 0 or /. IP ping is inapplicable for E-Aggr services.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task transmission NE. the protocol VLAN ID (if any) must be configured to the same value as the VLAN ID carried by IP packets initiated by the local CE. The CE initiating IP ping packets must support non-strict ARP learning mode. the RNC initiates IP ping packets to the UNI port on NE2. Figure 8-31 Application of the IP ping functions Far-end IP Ping Near-end IP Ping NodeB NE2 NE1 RNC Near-end IP Ping Far-end IP Ping Precautions l l l l IP ping can be enabled only for UNI Ethernet ports. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. That is. as shown in Figure 8-31. To support far-end IP ping. IP ping can be enabled only for a maximum of four ports on an NE. If IP ping packets initiated by the local CE do not carry any VLAN ID (for example. 235 . This enables NEs enabled with the IP ping function can select the correct PW for transmitting IP ping packets based on the configured protocol VLAN ID.

0. Procedure Step 1 On NE1.0.2). ping 137.255.255. 3. NOTE If NE1 and the RNC are in the same network segment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Figure 8-32 Networking diagram 137.1/ 255. Step 4 On the RNC. 2.4/ 255. Step 3 Refer to step 1 to configure IP ping parameters on NE 2. It is recommended to set Next Hop IP Address here to the IP address of the NodeB. 236 . set Next Hop IP Address to the IP address of the RNC.0. Click Apply.3/ 255. Ltd. initiate IP ping to the NodeB (that is. Set the far-end IP ping agent to NE2.0. 1.0. so that NE2 can respond to near-end IP ping commands.0 The Ethernet service between NE1 and NE2 has the VLAN ID 100. NOTE Next Hop IP Address applies to near-end IP ping only.255. configure IP ping parameters to implement the near-end IP ping function.0 PORT 1 VLAN ID=100 NodeB NE 2 NE 1 137. If NE1 and the RNC are not in the same network segment.0 PORT 1 VLAN ID=100 RNC 137.0. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. to implement the far-end IP ping function. Set the IP ping parameters. set Next Hop IP Address to the IP address of the router port on the NE1 side. Step 2 Configure the far-end IP ping agent.0 137. 3. click the NE and choose Configuration > IP Ping Test. In the NE Explorer.255.255..2/ 255. click the NE and choose Configuration > IP Ping Test.255. In the NE Explorer. 2.0.0.255.255.0. 1. Click Apply.0. The tag attributes of both PORT1s on NE2 and NE1 are tag aware.

and PWE3 Services This section describes the common maintenance operations for end-to-end management on fibers. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Services are normal.0. Description Then.. Tools. which is displayed in the topology.1 Expanding/Collapsing Fibers and Cables If multiple fibers. Handle the fault. Tunnels.. Equipment.. you can collapse them to form a link. The operation result is normal The operation times out Description Then. or tunnels are available between network elements (NEs). cables..0. The operation times out A fault occurs between NE1 and the RNC.0. Handle the fault. initiate IP ping to NE1 (that is. end fault diagnosis. The operation times out ----End Handle the transmission network fault. cables.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Option If. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher... Description Then. MPLS tunnels.0.. 237 . You can also expand the link to display the fibers. ping 137. ping 137. Step 6 On the RNC. Option If. Go to the next step. 8. initiate IP ping to NE2 (that is. Step 5 On the RNC.4). or tunnels.3)..25.25 End-to-End Management on Fibers. and PWE3 services... Option If. The operation result is normal Go to the next step.. The operation result is normal A fault occurs between NE2 and the NodeB.. Ltd. Therefore.. 8.

Then choose Collapse Link from the shortcut menu. The Optical Power Management dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Query. Then choose Query Relevant Optical Power from the shortcut menu. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the main topology. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. Ltd. Equipment. ----End 8. Procedure Step 1 In the main topology. 238 . Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed. In the main topology. you can query the optical power related to the fibers. select the link and right-click it. Step 5 Click the Graphic tab to display the statistical graphics regarding optical power of the source and sink ends of a fiber.. select the link and right-click it. Step 2 Click the Port Optical Power tab.2 Querying Optical Power of Fibers and Cables When fiber connections are available between network elements (NEs). if an NE link is displayed as . Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Then choose Expand Link from the shortcut menu. select the required radio link and right-click it. Step 2 Optional: Collapse fibers and cables. Tools. 1.25.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Procedure Step 1 Optional: Expand fibers and cables. if an NE link is displayed as . 1. The input and output optical power of the fiber is displayed in the dialog box. click Close.

you can query the relevant performance information about radio links. 239 . Then choose Microwave Link Information from the shortcut menu. Equipment. and Materials U2000 NOTE The Web LCT does not support this operation. ----End . select the required radio link and right-click it.3 Querying the Radio Link Information When fiber links are available between network elements (NEs).25. Procedure Step 1 In the main topology.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8. Then choose Radio Link Performance Statistics from the shortcut menu. choose the sink NE or source NE. and then click Step 3 Click Query. Ltd. Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the main topology.25. Step 2 Select the required NE or board from the object tree. Tools. 8. Tools. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. choose Configuration > Radio Link Performance Statistics in the function.. select the required radio link and right-click it. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Close. you can query the relevant information about radio links. NOTE The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows: In the NE Explorer. Equipment. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.4 Querying the Radio Link Performance When fiber links are available between network elements (NEs). The Microwave Link Report dialog box is displayed. The Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box is displayed.

NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 6 Click Query. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 5 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher. ----End 8. choose Current Performance tab. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. and view information in the Topology and Interface Information tab pages. Ended From. Then click OK below Options. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 2 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box.5 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations. set Monitor Period. 240 .25. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 7 Click Save as. The E-Line services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. such as querying information about E-Line services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode and deploying/ deleting E-Line services.. Step 4 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box. and Options. Step 3 In the Current Performance dialog box. set filter conditions and click Filter. choose History Performance tab. Step 3 Optional: Select the desired E-Line service from the query result. and save the data displayed in the current dialog box. choose Auto Refresh to see the current performance of the radio link. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage E-Line Service from the Main Menu. Ltd. NOTE Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed. To.

----End 8. Step 3 Optional: Select a desired tunnel. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed. set filter conditions and click Filter. running/deploying/deleting an MPLS tunnel. deploying or deleting a PWE3 service. Hop Information. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. and Relevant Service tab pages at the bottom. SAI. and browse the tunnel information in the Topology.. and PW tab pages at the bottom. click functional buttons under the query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to perform related maintenance operations. such as querying tunnel information. QoS Information. and detecting PW faults. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations on MPLS tunnels. set filter conditions and click Filter. ----End 8. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher. The PWE3 services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 4 Optional: Select the desired E-Line service from the query result.7 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed. and troubleshooting MPLS tunnels. Step 4 Optional: Select the desired tunnels from the query result. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The MPLS tunnels that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. including querying PWE3 service information. click functional buttons under the query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to perform related maintenance operations. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.25. Service Parameter. Step 3 Optional: Select a desired PWE3 service and browse the service information in the Topology.25. Ltd. 241 .

click functional buttons under the query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to perform related maintenance operations.25. Prerequisites l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Native Ethernet services are configured in end-to-end mode and ETH OAM CC are enabled. set filter conditions and click Filter. the Prompt dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage Native Ethernet Service from the main menu. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Add.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 4 Optional: Select the desired PWE3 service from the query result. Step 4 Optional: If Ethernet OAM has not been configured during end-to-end E-LAN service configuration.8 Verifying Native Ethernet Services This section describes how to use ETH OAM to verify connectivity of Native Ethernet services. The data on the NE and the NMS is synchronized. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box. Ltd. ----End 8. Set OAM parameters. 242 . and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from the shortcut menu.. The Native Ethernet services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. Step 3 Right-click the desired Native Ethernet service. 2. 1.

Set Sent Packets. Step 5 Optional: If Ethernet OAM has not been configured during end-to-end E-Line service configuration. Step 9 Click the LB Testing Information and LB Statistics Information tabs. and Sent Packets Priority. select the desired service trail. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Test Results indicates Test Succeeded. Step 8 Click Run. click OK. NOTE l An LB test checks whether a service is bidirectional available. Ltd. Step 6 In the LB Test dialog box. Step 7 Optional: Choose Config LB Parameter from the shortcut menu. l One NE cannot be involved in multiple LB tests simultaneously. For a bidirectional service. the Prompt dialog box is displayed. l If Ethernet services are in different VLANs. Normally. Click OK. Click OK.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 3. Sent Packets Length. 243 . select the NE at either end to initiate an LB test. and determine whether the service is available based on the displayed information. Then. Ethernet OAM will be automatically configured. the U2000 automatically selects the service in a VLAN for an LB test..

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task ----End 8. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu.. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher. Step 4 Select LSP Ping or LSP Traceroute from Diagnosis Option. MPLS tunnels have already been deployed. Step 3 Right-click the tunnel to verify.25. 244 . Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed. Ltd. Choose Test and Check from the shortcut menu. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set filter conditions and click Filter.9 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode This section describes how to verify that an MPLS tunnel is available using the LSP ping test or LSP traceroute function. The MPLS tunnels that meet the criteria are listed in the query result. TIP You can select and verify several MPLS tunnels concurrently.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows. In other scenarios.. Set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response if the egress node does not support reverse channel response. query the verification result of each MPLS tunnel. set this parameter to No Response. l Packet Size: Set this parameter according to requirements. l Other parameters: Other parameters take their default values. Ltd. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Response Mode: Set this parameter to Application Control Channel if the tunnel is bidirectional and its egress node supports reverse channel response. Step 6 Click Run. but support DCN channel response based on IP protocols. 245 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 5 Optional: Click the on the right and set parameters about the LSP ping/LSP traceroute test in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 7 After the verification.

Tools. The Set Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed.... The Diagnosis Option tab page is displayed.. Equipment. Perform Step 5 and Step 9.25. Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Step 2 Click Filter. Ltd. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. all configured PWE3 services will be displayed. You perform a PW ping test Then.. If. Step 5 Select VCCV Ping from the Diagnosis Option list. NOTE After you click Filter. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 246 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task 8.10 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode This section describes how to verify connectivity of a PW using the PW ping test or PW traceroute function. Step 3 Right-click the PWE3 service to verify and choose Test And Check from the shortcut menu. You perform a PW traceroute test Perform Step 10 and Step 14. Step 4 Perform a PW service connectivity test.

. Step 11 Click Issue 03 (2012-07-30) on the right of VCCV Traceroute. 247 . Ltd. Step 7 Set the connectivity test parameters. Step 10 Select VCCV Traceroute from the Diagnosis Option list. Step 8 Click OK. Set the parameters as follows: l Response Mode: Application Control Channel l Unless otherwise specified. it is recommended that other parameters take their default values.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 6 Click on the right of VCCV Ping. The VCCV ping dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 9 Click Run.

. Set the parameters as follows: l Response Mode: Application Control Channel l Unless otherwise specified. Step 14 Click Run. 248 . it is recommended that other parameters take their default values. ----End 8. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select Source NE and Sink Node.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task The VCCV Traceroute dialog box is displayed. Click Filter. Prerequisites l l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.11 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode) This section describes how to use Ethernet OAM to verify connectivity of a PW-based E-Line service. Ltd. Step 12 Set the connectivity test parameters. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria window. Step 13 Click OK.25. The Configuring PW-Based E-Line Services (in an End-to-End Mode) task has been completed.

.. and choose Configure. In the Config Eth Oam LB Test Parameter dialog box that is displayed. NOTE l An LB test detects whether a service is bidirectionally available.. Then. the U2000 automatically select the service of a VLAN for the LB test.. it is recommended that you select either end of a PW as the source NE for initiating the LB test. and Sent Packets Priority. Ltd. set Sent Packets. and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test. Sent Packets Length. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If a PW carries Ethernet services from different VLANs. 249 . Step 4 In the Eth Oam LB Test dialog box that is displayed.. from the shortcut menu. click OK. Step 5 Optional: Right-click the service that is selected for an LB test. from the shortcut menu.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 3 Right-click the PWE3 service to verify. For a bidirectional service. select the source NE for initiating an LB test.

If the service is unavailable. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If Packet Loss Ratio(%) displays 100 and Test Result displays Test Failed. check whether the service configurations are incorrect. Ltd. 250 . the service is available.. Step 7 Click the LB Statistic Information tab and determines whether the service is available based on the displayed information. and choose Run from the shortcut menu. the service is unavailable.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task Step 6 Right-click the service that is selected for an LB test. If Test Result displays Test Succeeded.

Precautions This task uses intelligent service fault diagnosis of Ethernet PWE3 services as an example. choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage Ethernet Service from the main menu. Prerequisites The intelligent service fault diagnosis function applies to end-to-end E-Line services.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide 8 Supporting Task ----End 8. The procedures for intelligent service fault diagnosis of native Ethernet services are similar. Step 3 Right-click the target service and choose Diagnose > Service Fault Diagnosis from the shortcut menu. set filter criteria and click Filter. including both native Ethernet services and ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services.12 Performing Intelligent Service Fault Diagnosis for Ethernet Services When a fault occurs in Ethernet services. Ltd.. all Ethernet PWE3 services are displayed. If click Filter without seting filter criteria. Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu. NOTE For intelligent service fault diagnosis of native Ethernet services.25. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can quickly locate the fault using the intelligent service fault diagnosis function. 251 .

252 . PWs.. right-click the target service and choose Service Fault Diagnosis from the shortcut menu. Then. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Optional: Click Export Result to export the diagnosis results into an HTML file. tunnels. Step 4 Click Start Diagnosis. Step 6 Rectify the fault according to the diagnosis results. the system exports diagnostic results.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide NOTE 8 Supporting Task For intelligent service fault diagnosis of native Ethernet services. The system uses OAM to implement fault diagnosis over services. and the physical layer. Ltd.

. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A Alarm Reference Alarms are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 253 . A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards) This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board. A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order) The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 950 in alphabetical order. This chapter describes all the possible alarms on the OptiX RTN 950 and how to handle these alarms.

The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the receive direction. Table A-1 Alarm list Alarm Name A_LOC ACR_LOCK_FAIL ALM_E1RAI ALM_GFP_dCSF ALM_GFP_dLFD Description Loss of clock in the upstream bus 1588 ACR locking fails E1 link remote alarm indication Loss of GFP client signals Out of frame state of generic framing procedure (GFP) frames Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the local end of the IMA link. Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the remote end of the IMA link. Downshift of AM modes Alarm Severity Major Major Minor Critical Major ALM_IMA_LIF Major ALM_IMA_LODS Major ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE Minor ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE Minor ALM_IMA_RFI Major AM_DOWNSHIFT Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Differential delay of the IMA link crosses the threshold.. Ltd. The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the transmit direction.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 254 .1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order) The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 950 in alphabetical order.

AU alarm indication Loss of AU pointers Excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Signal degradation due to excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Signal degradation due to excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) Excessive B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path Signal degradation due to excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) Signal degradation due to excessive VC-3 path (B3) bit errors Alarm Severity Major APS_INDI APS_MANUAL_STOP ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC Major Minor Major AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC Major Major Minor B1_SD Minor B2_EXC B2_SD Major Minor B3_EXC Major B3_EXC_VC3 B3_SD Major Minor B3_SD_VC3 Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 255 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name APS_FAIL Description Failure indication of MS protection switching Indication of the APS protection switching MS protocol stopped manually The number of unknown ATM cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. Ltd..

The temperature sensor of battery group 2 fails. Packet MSP protocol state indication The MSP protocol is disabled manually. Bus errors The locking function of CES ACR service clock is abnormal. Excessive BIP errors Signal degradation due to excessive BIP errors BOOTROM data check fails. The logical board is not added on the NMS. The amount of jitter buffer underflow crosses the specified threshold. Ltd. 256 . The board is in BIOS state. K1 and K2 mismatch Alarm Severity Major BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Major BD_NOT_INSTALLED Minor BD_STATUS BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Major Major BIOS_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD Major Minor Minor BOOTROM_BAD BUS_ERR CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN Major Critical Minor CES_APS_INDI CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP CES_JTROVR_EXC Major Minor Major CES_JTRUDR_EXC Major CES_K1_K2_M Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The amount of jitter buffer overflow crosses the specified threshold. The board is out-ofposition. The board temperature sensor of the cabinet fails..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description The temperature sensor of battery group 1 fails.

Inter-board communication fails. The number of lost disordered packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. The number of deformed packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. Correctable cell errors Clock locking fails The clock source is not in locked mode. Ltd. Excessive TCP connections between automatically extended ECC NEs Alarm Severity Minor Major CES_MALPKT_EXC Major CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC Major CES_RDI CES_STRAYPKT_EXC Minor Major CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI CFCARD_FAILED CFCARD_OFFLINE CHCS CLK_LOCK_FAIL CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE COMMUN_FAIL COM_EXTECC_FULL Major Major Major Major Minor Major Minor Major Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The AC circuit on the opposite NE is faulty.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name CES_K2_M CES_LOSPKT_EXC Description K2 mismatch The number of lost packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. 257 . Remote defect indication The number of error packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit.. The CF card is offline. Remote alarm indication The operation on the CF card fails.

Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s downstream signals The number of lost packets due to port congestion crosses the threshold. Ltd. The ambient temperature sensor 1 of the cabinet fails.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name CONFIG_NOSUPPORT DBMS_DELETE DBMS_ERROR Description Configuration is not supported. The status of databases is delete. 258 .. The ambient temperature sensor 2 of the cabinet fails. Loss of APS frames Alarm Severity Major Major Major DBMS_PROTECT_MODE DCNSIZE_OVER DDN_LFA Critical Major Major DOWN_E1_AIS Minor DROPRATIO_OVER Minor E1_LOC Major E1_LOS ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL Minor Major ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Major ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL Major ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL Major ETH_APS_LOST Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The ambient temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Loss of 2 Mbit/s clock in upstream signals Loss of 2 Mbit/s line signals The ambient humidity sensor of the cabinet fails. Errors in the processing of system databases System databases in protection mode Oversized DCN network The frame alignment signal of framed E1 services is lost.

Alarm Severity Major ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE ETH_CFM_RDI Major Major Major Critical Critical Minor ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK ETH_EFM_REMFAULT ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL Minor Major Major Major Critical Critical Major Critical Minor ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Protection switching failure Protection scheme mismatch A local MEP_AIS occurs. Loss of connectivity Misconnection The maintenance association end point (MEP) fails to receive CCM packets. 259 .. A remote loopback is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. Loss of Ethernet port connection No flow on the Ethernet port Power output failure of an Ethernet port Discovery failure is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. Error frames Discovery failure Performance events at the opposite end A loopback occurs. Faults occur at the opposite end. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH Description The working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.

Severe faults are detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM at the remote end. An MAC port loopback is detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name ETHOAM_RMT_SD Description Remote Ethernet performance degradation is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. Threshold-crossing performance event of the higher order path Alarm Severity Minor ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT Minor ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP Major ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP Major EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS Critical EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT Major EXT_SYNC_LOS FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL FCS_ERR Critical Minor Major Critical FLOW_OVER Minor HARD_BAD HARD_NONSUPPORT Critical Major HP_CROSSTR Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Loss of periodical continuity check packets Conflict of maintenance point IDs Loss of external clock sources Aged fans Failure of fan boards Frame check sequence (FCS) errors Excessive data traffic received by Ethernet ports Hardware faults Board hardware does not support a certain function. 260 . Ltd. A VCTRUNK port loopback is detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM.

The IMA group at the remote end fails. The transmit clock modes at the two ends of the IMA group are different. Preset IF working mode is not supported. The power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal. 261 . The IMA group at the local end fails.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name HP_LOM Description Loss of multiframes in the higher order path Higher order path remote defect indication Higher order path remote error indication Higher order path signal label mismatch High order path trace identifier mismatch Unequipped higher order path Adaptation performance threshold-crossing of the higher order path IF cables are disconnected.. Ltd. Abnormal input optical power Over high input optical power Alarm Severity Major HP_RDI Minor HP_REI Warning HP_SLM Minor HP_TIM HP_UNEQ HPAD_CROSSTR Minor Minor Minor IF_CABLE_OPEN IF_INPWR_ABN Major Major IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED Major IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH Major Major Minor IN_PWR_ABN IN_PWR_HIGH Major Critical Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

The type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. A member port of a link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. The laser is shut down. The type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. Alarm Severity Critical Major J0_MM K1_K2_M K2_M LAG_BWMM Minor Minor Minor Major LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN Major Minor LAG_PORT_FAIL LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL LAN_LOC Minor Minor Major LASER_CLOSED LASER_MOD_ERR Major Major LASER_MOD_ERR_EX Major LASER_SHUT Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Trace identifier mismatch K1 and K2 mismatch K2 mismatch Bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group The LAG is unavailable.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name IN_PWR_LOW INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description Over low input optical power The air intake vent temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Ltd. A VCG port of an LAG fails.. Ethernet communication failure The laser is shut down. A member port of a LAG fails. 262 .

Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS receive direction Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS transmit direction Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS receive direction Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS transmit direction Loss of cell delimitation The capacity of the configured services exceeds the range permitted by the license file. 263 . Ltd..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name LCAS_FOPR Description LCAS protocol fails in the receive direction. LCAS protocol fails in the transmit direction. Out of frame state of E1 frames The NE fails to detect any license file. Faults occur in a data link. Out of frame state of E1 multiframes A loopback occurs. Performance threshold-crossing of the lower order path Alarm Severity Major LCAS_FOPT Major LCAS_PLCR Minor LCAS_PLCT Minor LCAS_TLCR Major LCAS_TLCT Major LCD LCS_LIMITED Major Major LFA LICENSE_LOST LINK_ERR LMFA LOOP_ALM LP_CROSSTR Major Major Critical Major Minor Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

. 264 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name LP_R_FIFO Description FIFO overflow on the receive side of the lower order path Lower order path remote defect indication VC-12 path remote defect indication VC-3 path remote defect indication Lower order path remote error indication VC-12 path remote error indication VC-3 path remote bit error indication Lower order path remote failure indication Lower order path signal label mismatch VC-12 path signal label mismatch VC-3 path signal label mismatch FIFO overflow on the transmit side of the lower order path Lower order path trace identifier mismatch VC-12 path trace identifier mismatch VC-3 path tracking identification mismatch Unequipped lower order paths Alarm Severity Minor LP_RDI Minor LP_RDI_VC12 LP_RDI_VC3 LP_REI Minor Minor Minor LP_REI_VC12 LP_REI_VC3 LP_RFI Minor Minor Minor LP_SLM Minor LP_SLM_VC12 LP_SLM_VC3 LP_T_FIFO Minor Minor Minor LP_TIM Minor LP_TIM_VC12 LP_TIM_VC3 Minor Minor LP_UNEQ Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

265 . Laser bias current crossing the threshold Laser not installed Laser going to expire Loss of clock synchronization source The number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software detects that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name LP_UNEQ_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC3 LPS_UNI_BI_M Description Unequipped VC-12 paths VC-3 path unequipped The switching mode is single-ended at one end and dual-ended at the other end.. Ltd. The LPT closes the access port of the local NE. Module communication failure Port module type mismatch The group member delay MP group failure Alarm Severity Minor Minor Minor LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT Major LPT_INEFFECT LPT_RFI Major Critical LSR_BCM_ALM Major LSR_NO_FITED LSR_WILL_DIE LTI Critical Critical Major MAC_EXT_EXC Major MAC_FCS_EXC Major MOD_COM_FAIL Critical MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH MP_DELAY MP_DOWN Critical Major Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. LPT function failed Link state passthrough function fails at the remote end.

OAM protocol negotiation failure PW backward defect indication Signal degradation on the PW Signal failure on the PW The MEP receives a packet with correct MEG level but incorrect MEG ID. Loss of PW connectivity The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one. Alarm Severity Major Minor Minor MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_MISMATCH Critical Critical MPLS_PW_MISMERGE Major MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL MPLS_PW_RDI MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG Minor Minor Major Major Critical MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP Major MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. The CCM information of a PW OAM packet is incorrect. Ltd..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name MPLS_PW_AIS MPLS_PW_BDI MPLS_PW_Excess Description PW forward defect indication PW backward defect indication Excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the PW. The PW does not receive a CCM packet in the expected period. 266 .

The OAM protocol negotiation between the two ends of the tunnel fails.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess Description Unknown defects on the PW Tunnel forward defect indication Tunnel backward defect indication Excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the tunnel. The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the tunnel. Ltd.. 267 . Tunnel forward defect indication Loss of tunnel connectivity The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. Tunnel backward defect indication Signal degradation on the tunnel Signal failure on the tunnel Unknown defects on the tunnel Unexpected MEG ID in the CCM packet Unexpected MEP ID in the CCM packet Alarm Severity Major Major Minor Minor MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH Major Critical Critical MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE Major MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL Minor MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI MPLS_TUNNEL_SD MPLS_TUNNEL_SF MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP Minor Major Major Major Critical Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Label mismatch on radio links Alarm Severity Major Major Minor MS_RDI Minor MS_REI Warning MSAD_CROSSTR Minor MULTI_RPL_OWNER Minor MW_AM_TEST MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD Minor Minor Minor MW_CFG_MISMATCH Critical MW_CONT_WAVE MW_E1_LOST MW_FEC_UNCOR Minor Major Minor MW_LIM Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR Description Unexpected period of the CCM packet Multiplex section alarm indication Multiplex section performance threshold-crossing Multiplex section remote defect indication Multiplex section remote error indication Multiplex section adaptation performance threshold-crossing The ring network has multiple RPL_OWNER nodes. The IF port is in the AM testing state. Ltd.. Excessive errors on radio links Signal degradation due to excessive errors on radio links Configuration mismatch on radio links Continuous wave Loss of E1 signals Microwave frames have the errors that cannot be corrected by using the forward error correction (FEC) technology. 268 .

269 . Out of cell delimitation Abnormal current of the storage battery The storage battery fails to supply power for the equipment. The secondary load is powered off. Ltd. The door of an outdoor cabinet is open. N+1 protection switching indication Synchronization with the NTP time fails.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name MW_LOF MW_RDI Description Loss of microwave frames Remote defect indication on radio links The NE software is lost.. The N+1 protection protocol is stopped manually. The board software is lost. The N+1 protection switching fails. Alarm Severity Critical Minor NESF_LOST NESOFT_MM Critical Major NO_BD_SOFT NP1_MANUAL_STOP Critical Minor NP1_SW_FAIL NP1_SW_INDI NTP_SYNC_FAIL OCD ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN Major Major Minor Major Major Major ODC_DOOR_OPEN Critical ODC_FAN_FAILED ODC_HUMI_ABN Major Minor ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Fan failure The relative humidity in the cabinet environment crosses the specified threshold. The software in the main area is different from that in the standby area.

270 . Abnormal patch package Links of the 1+1 protection group fail.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name ODC_MDL_ABN ODC_POWER_FAIL Description The power module is abnormal. Deactivating patch packages times out. The surge protection function of the outdoor cabinet fails. The external recycling outlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Alarm Severity Major Major ODC_SMOKE_OVER ODC_SURGE_PROTECTION_FAIL Critical Critical ODC_TEC_ALM Major ODC_TEMP_ABN Minor ODC_WATER_ALM OUT_PWR_ABN OUT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Critical Critical Major OUT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Major PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT PATCH_PKGERR PG_LINK_FAIL Minor Minor Minor Critical Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Smoke occurs in an outdoor cabinet. The TEC air conditioning module in the cabinet fails. Ltd. The ambient temperature of the cabinet or the temperature of the storage battery is inappropriate.. Exceptions occur in the AC input power voltage. Water in the outdoor cabinet Abnormal output optical power The air outlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Activating patch packages times out.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name PG_PRT_DEGRADED Description The working link or protection link of the 1+1 protection group is faulty. Ltd. Loss of APS frames The working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Port not in position The working mode of the remote FE port does not match that of the local FE port. The PW has no traffic. Protection switching failure Protection scheme mismatch Alarm Severity Major PLA_CFG_MISMATCH PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC Critical Warning PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE PORTMODE_MISMATCH Major Minor POWER_ABNORMAL POWER_ALM PPP_LCP_FAIL PPP_NCP_FAIL PTP_SOURCE_SWITCH PTP_TIMESTAMP_ABN PW_DROPPKT_EXC Major Major Major Major Minor Major Warning PW_NO_TRAFFIC PWAPS_LOST PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH Critical Minor Major PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH Major Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Power input alarm Power module alarm LCP negotiation failure NCP negotiation failure PTP time source switching PTP time stamp abnormality The number of lost packets in a PW crosses the threshold. Inconsistent PLA configurations The traffic is higher than the port bandwidth threshold. 271 ..

There are warning inputs. Ltd. There are minor alarm inputs. Radio fading margin is insufficient. There are major alarm inputs. 272 . Loss of multiframe alignment at the remote end Radio protection switching indication Alarm Severity Critical Critical Critical R_OOF Critical RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_MUTE RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR RELAY_ALARM_MINOR RMFA Minor Warning Minor Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Warning Major Minor Minor RPS_INDI Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The radio transmitter is muted. Antennas are not aligned.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS Description Loss of clock on the receive line side Loss of frame on the receive line side Loss of signal or loss of microwave frame on the receive line side The out-of-frame fault occurs on the receive line side. Over high radio receive signal level Over low radio receive signal level Over high radio transmit signal level Over low radio transmit signal level There are critical alarm inputs..

Alarm Severity Minor RTC_FAIL Major S1_SYN_CHANGE SEC_RADIUS_FAIL SECU_ALM SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT Major Major Major Warning Critical SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH Minor Critical SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL SWDL_INPROCESS Minor Warning SWDL_NEPKGCHECK Critical SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT Minor SWDL_PKGVER_MM Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Certain files in the package stored in flash memory are lost.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name RS_CROSSTR Description Regenerator section performance threshold-crossing The real-time clock (RTC) of the system control board fails. The submit operation fails. Ltd. The automatic match function is disabled. The software package does not contain any board software. Software package version consistency check fails. The board software version and the version of the running software are inconsistent. The commit operation is not performed during software package loading. Clock source switching in S1 mode RADIUS authentication fails. Security alarm Ethernet services are interrupted.. 273 . The package diffusion is being performed on the NE.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL SYN_BAD SYNC_C_LOS Description The version rollback on an NE fails. Time locking fails. Clock failure TU alarm indication VC-12 path TU alarm indication TU of VC-3 level alarm indication Loss of TU pointers Alarm Severity Minor Minor Warning SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL T_ALOS Minor Major T_LOC TEM_HA TEM_LA TEMP_ALARM TEMP_OVER TF THUNDERALM TIME_LOCK_FAIL TIME_NO_TRACE_MODE Major Major Major Minor Major Critical Minor Major Minor TR_LOC TU_AIS TU_AIS_VC12 TU_AIS_VC3 TU_LOP Major Major Major Major Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Surge protection fails. Synchronous source degradation Loss of synchronization clock sources Batch backup of SCC boards fails. Loss of analog signals at 2 Mbit/s interfaces Loss of clock on the transmit line side Too high laser temperature Too low laser temperature Excessive board temperature Excessive board temperature Laser transmission fails. Ltd. The high precision time of the NE is in the non-traced status. 274 ..

Ltd. Alarm indication signal of the VC connection Loss of VC continuity check Remote defect indication of the VC connection Excessive virtual concatenation delay Loss of multiframe of VC-12 path virtual concatenation The virtually concatenated multiframes in a VC-3 path are lost.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name TU_LOP_VC12 TU_LOP_VC3 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED UHCS UP_E1_AIS Description Loss of TU pointers in VC-12 paths TU of VC-3 level loss of pointer The tunnel protection group degrades. 275 .. Uncorrectable cell errors Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s upstream signals Bits 5-7 in the V5 byte of a VC-12 path are set to "1"s. SQ mismatch of VC-12 path virtual concatenation SQ mismatch of VC-3 path virtual concatenation Loss of voltage Alarm Severity Major Major Major Minor Minor V5_VCAIS Major VC_AIS Critical VC_LOC VC_RDI Major Major VCAT_LOA VCAT_LOM_VC12 Critical Major VCAT_LOM_VC3 Major VCAT_SQM_VC12 Major VCAT_SQM_VC3 Major VOLT_LOS Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Certificate file of SSL is not encrypted Indicates that a node on the EPRS ring is faulty. Table A-2 shows the logical boards corresponding to all physical boards Table A-2 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards Physical Board CST Logical Board CST in the same slot Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Alarm Name VP_AIS Description Alarm indication signal of the VP connection Loss of VP continuity check Remote defect indication of the VP connection Failure in reading and writing chip registers Error board types Loss of XPIC compensation signals The communication between the NE and the syslog server fails. Alarm Severity Critical VP_LOC VP_RDI Major Major W_R_FAIL Major WRG_BD_TYPE XPIC_LOS SYSLOG_COMM_FAIL Major Critical Major PASSWORD_NEED_CHANGE Major SSL_CERT_NOENC ERPS_IN_PROTECTION Major Minor A. Ltd. 276 . NOTE The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards) This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board. Password of the user who logs in is unchanged. The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board..

. 277 . Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Physical Board CSH AUX IF1 IFU2 IFX2 ISU2 ISX2 ISV3 SL1D SL1DA EM6T EM6TA EM6F EM6FA EG4 EG4P EFP8 EMS6 SP3S SP3D ML1 MD1 CQ1 PIU FAN ODU Logical Board CSH in the same slot AUX in the same slot IF1 in the same slot IFU2 in the same slot IFX2 in the same slot ISU2 in the same slot ISX2 in the same slot ISV3 in the same slot SL1D in the same slot SL1DA in the same slot EM6T in the same slot EM6TA in the same slot EM6F in the same slot EM6FA in the same slot EG4 in the same slot EG4P in the same slot EFP8 in the same slot EMS6 in the same slot SP3S in the same slot SP3D in the same slot ML1 in the same slot MD1 in the same slot CQ1 in the same slot PIU in the same slot FAN in the same slot ODU in the slot whose number is 20 plus the slot number for the IF board that is connected to the ODU Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2.1 CST APS_FAIL BD_STATUS CFCARD_OFFLIN E DBMS_DELETE EXT_SYNC_LOS LAN_LOC LTI NP1_SW_FAIL PATCH_ACT_TIM EOUT PG_PRT_DEGRAD ED RTC_FAIL SWDL_ACTIVATE D_TIMEOUT SWDL_INPROCES S SWDL_ROLLBAC K_FAIL TEMP_ALARM APS_INDI BIOS_STATUS CLK_LOCK_FAIL DBMS_ERROR HARD_BAD LCS_LIMITED NESF_LOST NP1_SW_INDI PATCH_DEACT_T IMEOUT PLA_CFG_MISMA TCH S1_SYN_CHANGE SWDL_AUTOMAT CH_INH SWDL_NEPKGCH ECK SYN_BAD WRG_BD_TYPE APS_MANUAL_ST OP BOOTROM_BAD CLK_NO_TRACE_ MODE DBMS_PROTECT_ MODE K1_K2_M LICENSE_LOST NESOFT_MM NTP_SYNC_FAIL PATCH_PKGERR POWER_ALM SEC_RADIUS_FAI L SWDL_CHGMNG_ NOMATCH SWDL_PKG_NOB DSOFT SYNC_C_LOS SSL_CERT_NOEN C BD_NOT_INSTAL LED CFCARD_FAILED COM_EXTECC_F ULL DCNSIZE_OVER K2_M LPS_UNI_BI_M NP1_MANUAL_ST OP PASSWORD_NEE D_CHANGE PG_LINK_FAIL RPS_INDI SECU_ALM SWDL_COMMIT_ FAIL SWDL_PKGVER_ MM SCCDATA_BACK UP_FAIL SYSLOG_COMM_ FAIL A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.2 CSH ACR_LOCK_FAIL BD_NOT_INSTAL LED CES_APS_INDI APS_FAIL BD_STATUS CES_APS_MANU AL_STOP APS_INDI BIOS_STATUS CES_K1_K2_M APS_MANUAL_ST OP BOOTROM_BAD CES_K2_M Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 278 ..2. Ltd.

279 . Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference CFCARD_FAILED COM_EXTECC_F ULL DCNSIZE_OVER ETH_APS_TYPE_ MISMATCH FLOW_OVER K2_M LICENSE_LOST MOD_COM_FAIL MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_RDI MPLS_PW_UNEX PMEP MPLS_TUNNEL_B DI MPLS_TUNNEL_ MISMATCH MPLS_TUNNEL_S D MPLS_TUNNEL_U NEXPPER NP1_MANUAL_ST OP PASSWORD_NEE D_CHANGE PG_LINK_FAIL PTP_SOURCE_SW ITCH PWAPS_LOST CFCARD_OFFLIN E DBMS_DELETE ETH_APS_LOST ETH_NO_FLOW HARD_BAD LAG_BWMM LPS_UNI_BI_M MPLS_PW_AIS MPLS_PW_MISM ATCH MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_PW_UNEX PPER MPLS_TUNNEL_E xcess MPLS_TUNNEL_ MISMERGE MPLS_TUNNEL_S F MPLS_TUNNEL_U NKNOWN NP1_SW_FAIL PATCH_ACT_TIM EOUT PG_PRT_DEGRAD ED PTP_TIMESTAMP _ABN PWAPS_PATH_MI SMATCH CLK_LOCK_FAIL DBMS_ERROR ETH_APS_PATH_ MISMATCH EXT_SYNC_LOS HARD_NONSUPP ORT LAN_LOC LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MPLS_PW_BDI MPLS_PW_MISME RGE MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_UNKN OWN MPLS_TUNNEL_F DI MPLS_TUNNEL_O AMFAIL MPLS_TUNNEL_U NEXPMEG NESF_LOST NP1_SW_INDI PATCH_DEACT_T IMEOUT PLA_CFG_MISMA TCH PW_DROPPKT_EX C PWAPS_SWITCH_ FAIL CLK_NO_TRACE_ MODE DBMS_PROTECT_ MODE ETH_APS_SWITC H_FAIL EXT_TIME_LOC K1_K2_M LCS_LIMITED LTI MPLS_PW_Excess MPLS_PW_OAMF AIL MPLS_PW_UNEX PMEG MPLS_TUNNEL_A IS MPLS_TUNNEL_L OCV MPLS_TUNNEL_R DI MPLS_TUNNEL_U NEXPMEP NESOFT_MM NTP_SYNC_FAIL PATCH_PKGERR POWER_ALM PW_NO_TRAFFIC PWAPS_TYPE_MI SMATCH Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Ltd. 280 .2..4 IFU2 AM_DOWNSHIFT DROPRATIO_OVE R BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.3 IF1 AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LICENSE_LOST MS_RDI MW_FEC_UNCOR R_LOC T_LOC AU_LOP B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LOOP_ALM MS_REI MW_LIM R_LOF TEMP_ALARM B1_EXC B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IF_MODE_UNSUP PORTED MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_LOF R_LOS VOLT_LOS B1_SD B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM LCS_LIMITED MS_CROSSTR MW_CONT_WAV E MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR WRG_BD_TYPE A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference RPS_INDI SECU_ALM SWDL_CHGMNG_ NOMATCH SWDL_PKG_NOB DSOFT SYNC_C_LOS TIME_NO_TRACE _MODE SYSLOG_COMM_ FAIL RTC_FAIL SRV_SHUTDOWN _LD SWDL_COMMIT_ FAIL SWDL_PKGVER_ MM SCCDATA_BACK UP_FAIL TUNNEL_APS_DE GRADED - S1_SYN_CHANGE SWDL_ACTIVATE D_TIMEOUT SWDL_INPROCES S SWDL_ROLLBAC K_FAIL TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE - SEC_RADIUS_FAI L SWDL_AUTOMAT CH_INH SWDL_NEPKGCH ECK SYN_BAD TIME_LOCK_FAIL SSL_CERT_NOEN C - A.

2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TU_LOP ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_REI MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF VOLT_LOS ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_BWMM LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC TU_AIS ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION A.. . Ltd.5 IFX2 AM_DOWNSHIFT DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_REI MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_BWMM LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC 281 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2. Ltd.7 EM6T BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER TEMP_ALARM Issue 03 (2012-07-30) BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC WRG_BD_TYPE COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH - DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION 282 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference R_LOC TU_LOP ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION R_LOF VOLT_LOS - TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE - TU_AIS XPIC_LOS - A.2. .6 SL1D/SL1DA AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LASER_CLOSED MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR RS_CROSSTR AU_LOP B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IN_PWR_HIGH LASER_MOD_ER R_EX MS_CROSSTR R_LOC T_LOC B1_EXC B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IN_PWR_LOW LOOP_ALM MS_RDI R_LOF WRG_BD_TYPE B1_SD B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM J0_MM LSR_NO_FITED MS_REI R_LOS - A..

283 . Ltd..8 EM6TA BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM - A.9 EM6F BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.2.

2.10 EM6FA BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM - A.11 EFP8 ALM_GFP_dCSF BIP_SD ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_LOS ETHOAM_RMT_S D EX_ETHOAM_MPI D_CNFLCT LAG_PORT_FAIL ALM_GFP_dLFD COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP FCS_ERR LAG_VC_PORT_F AIL BD_STATUS DOWN_E1_AIS ETH_CFM_RDI ETHOAM_RMT_C RIT_FAULT ETHOAM_VCG_S ELF_LOOP FLOW_OVER LCAS_FOPR BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_RMT_L OOP EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS HARD_BAD LCAS_FOPT Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 284 ..2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference WRG_BD_TYPE ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION - - A. Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference LCAS_PLCR LFA LP_REI_VC12 LPT_RFI TU_AIS_VC12 VCAT_SQM_VC12 LCAS_PLCT LMFA LP_SLM_VC12 NO_BD_SOFT TU_LOP_VC12 W_R_FAIL LCAS_TLCR LOOP_ALM LP_TIM_VC12 RMFA VCAT_LOA WRG_BD_TYPE LCAS_TLCT LP_RDI_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 TEMP_ALARM VCAT_LOM_VC12 - A.12 EMS6 ALM_GFP_dCSF BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_RMT_L OOP EX_ETHOAM_MPI D_CNFLCT IN_PWR_ABN LCAS_FOPT LCAS_TLCT LP_RDI_VC3 LP_SLM_VC3 LP_UNEQ_VC3 MULTI_RPL_OWN ER TEMP_ALARM TU_LOP_VC3 VCAT_SQM_VC12 ALM_GFP_dLFD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_LOS ETHOAM_RMT_S D FCS_ERR LAG_PORT_FAIL LCAS_PLCR LINK_ERR LP_REI_VC12 LP_TIM_VC12 LPT_INEFFECT NO_BD_SOFT TU_AIS_VC12 VCAT_LOA VCAT_SQM_VC3 B3_EXC_VC3 BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP FLOW_OVER LAG_VC_PORT_F AIL LCAS_PLCT LOOP_ALM LP_REI_VC3 LP_TIM_VC3 LPT_RFI OUT_PWR_ABN TU_AIS_VC3 VCAT_LOM_VC12 WRG_BD_TYPE B3_SD_VC3 BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETHOAM_RMT_C RIT_FAULT EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS HARD_BAD LCAS_FOPR LCAS_TLCR LP_RDI_VC12 LP_SLM_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH PORT_MODULE_ OFFLINE TU_LOP_VC12 VCAT_LOM_VC3 ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.. Ltd. 285 .

.13 SP3S/SP3D A_LOC DDN_LFA HARD_BAD LP_R_FIFO LP_SLM T_ALOS WRG_BD_TYPE BD_STATUS DOWN_E1_AIS HPAD_CROSSTR LP_RDI LP_T_FIFO TU_AIS BIP_EXC E1_LOC LOOP_ALM LP_REI LP_TIM TU_LOP BIP_SD E1_LOS LP_CROSSTR LP_RFI LP_UNEQ UP_E1_AIS - A. Ltd.14 AUX BD_STATUS RELAY_ALARM_ MAJOR HARD_BAD RELAY_ALARM_ MINOR RELAY_ALARM_ CRITICAL WRG_BD_TYPE RELAY_ALARM_I GNORE - A.16 FAN BD_STATUS WRG_BD_TYPE FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL POWER_ALM - A.2.2.2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.15 PIU BD_STATUS WRG_BD_TYPE HARD_BAD POWER_ABNORM AL THUNDERALM - A.2.2..17 ISU2 AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD B3_SD Issue 03 (2012-07-30) AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD 286 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2.18 ISX2 AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD B3_SD DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_REI MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP - A. Ltd.. 287 .

19 ML1/MD1 ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_RE_TX _UNUSABLE BUS_ERR CES_LOSPKT_EX C CES_STRAYPKT_ EXC HARD_BAD LCD MP_DELAY PPP_LCP_FAIL ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_RFI CES_ACR_LOCK_ ABN CES_MALPKT_EX C CESPW_OPPOSIT E_ACFAULT IMA_GROUP_LE_ DOWN LFA MP_DOWN PPP_NCP_FAIL ALM_IMA_LODS ATMPW_UNKNO WNCELL_EXC CES_JTROVR_EX C CES_MISORDERP KT_EXC CESPW_OPPOSIT E_RAI IMA_GROUP_RE_ DOWN LMFA OCD T_ALOS ALM_IMA_RE_RX _UNUSABLE BD_STATUS CES_JTRUDR_EX C CES_RDI CHCS IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH LOOP_ALM POWER_ABNORM AL TEMP_ALARM Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. 288 .2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_REI MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS XPIC_LOS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION A.

20 ODU BD_STATUS LOOP_ALM RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_TSL_LOW CONFIG_NOSUPP ORT POWER_ALM RADIO_RSL_HIG H TEMP_ALARM HARD_BAD RADIO_FADING_ MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_RSL_LOW WRG_BD_TYPE IF_INPWR_ABN RADIO_MUTE RADIO_TSL_HIG H - A.22 TCU BD_STATUS INTEMP_SENSOR _FAIL ODC_SURGE_PRO TECTION_FAIL BDTEMP_SENSOR _FAIL ODC_DOOR_OPE N ODC_TEC_ALM ENVTEMP_SENSO R_FAIL ODC_FAN_FAILE D ODC_TEMP_ABN HARD_BAD ODC_SMOKE_OV ER ODC_WATER_AL M Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference TR_LOC VC_LOC VP_RDI UHCS VC_RDI WRG_BD_TYPE UP_E1_AIS VP_AIS - VC_AIS VP_LOC - A. 289 .2.21 PMU BAT1TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL ENVTEMP1_SENS OR_FAIL ODC_BATTERY_P WRDOWN ODC_MDL_ABN ODC_TEMP_ABN BAT2TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL ENVTEMP2_SENS OR_FAIL ODC_DOOR_OPE N ODC_POWER_FAI L ODC_WATER_AL M BD_STATUS HARD_BAD ODC_HUMI_ABN ODC_SMOKE_OV ER WRG_BD_TYPE ENVHUM_SENSO R_FAIL ODC_BATTERY_C URRENT_ABN ODC_LOAD_PWR DOWN ODC_SURGE_PRO TECTION_FAIL - A.2..

2.24 ISV3 AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD AU_AIS B2_EXC AU_LOP B2_SD B1_EXC B3_EXC Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.2. 290 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference OUT1TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL OUT2TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL WRG_BD_TYPE - A.23 CQ1 ALM_E1RAI B1_SD B3_SD BUS_ERR CES_MALPKT_EX C CESPW_OPPOSIT E_ACFAULT HP_REI IN_PWR_ABN LASER_MOD_ER R LOOP_ALM LP_SLM_VC12 LSR_NO_FITED MS_AIS POWER_ABNORM AL R_LOF TEM_LA TU_AIS_VC12 WRG_BD_TYPE AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS CES_JTROVR_EX C CES_MISORDERP KT_EXC CESPW_OPPOSIT E_RAI HP_SLM IN_PWR_HIGH LASER_SHUT LP_RDI_VC12 LP_TIM_VC12 LSR_WILL_DIE MS_RDI PPP_LCP_FAIL R_LOS TEMP_OVER TU_LOP_VC12 AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC CES_JTRUDR_EX C CES_RDI HARD_BAD HP_TIM IN_PWR_LOW LFA LP_REI_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 MP_DELAY MS_REI PPP_NCP_FAIL R_OOF TF UP_E1_AIS B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD CES_LOSPKT_EX C CES_STRAYPKT_ EXC HP_RDI HP_UNEQ J0_MM LMFA LP_RFI LSR_BCM_ALM MP_DOWN OUT_PWR_ABN R_LOC TEM_HA TR_LOC V5_VCAIS - A..

25 EG4 BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference B3_SD DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_REI MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS XPIC_LOS BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT FLOW_OVER HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION A. 291 . Ltd..2.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH - LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM - A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures This chapter describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 950 in alphabetical order and how to handle these alarms.26 EG4P BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_AIS ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC ERPS_IN_PROTEC TION DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETH_PWR_SUPPL Y_FAIL IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH - A. A.1 A_LOC Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. 292 .2.3.

select the alarm. Possible Causes Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.parameterN. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is faulty. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located. Ltd. Impact on the System When the A_LOC alarm occurs. refer to the following table.2 ACR_LOCK_FAIL Description The ACR_LOCK_FAIL is an alarm indicating an IEEE 1588 ACR locking failure.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. A. This alarm is reported when the NE works in 1588 ACR mode and the clock fails to be locked. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. the services carried by the board are interrupted.. ----End Related Information None. 293 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The A_LOC is an alarm indicating that a clock signal is lost in the uplink bus. 1. For details about each parameter.3.

.. If yes. Parameter 1 = 0x02 Go to step 4. check whether the alarm is cleared. Step 3 Query the PDV performance of the NE to determine whether the third-party network is running properly. Parameter 1 = 0x03 Go to step 3.30 CURPOSITIVEPDV and CURNEGATIVEPDV. If. l 0x04: indicates that the ACR algorithm is in the quick lockout phase. Parameter 1 = 0x04 No further action is required. clear the alarm immediately. l 0x03: indicates that the PDV on the transport network exceeds the upper threshold. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Step 4 Check the status of the master NE. the clock of the downstream NE is abnormal. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Wait for a while (about 15 minutes). Then.. 294 . Then. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The frequency deviation of the clock source or the delay of the intermediate network exceeds the upper threshold.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 1 l 0x01: indicates that the phase-locked loop (PLL) is in holdover or free-run mode. ask the customer to optimize the PDV. Step 2 Check whether a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the SCC board or interface board that accesses clocks. If not.3.. see C. Procedure Step 1 Handle the alarm according to the alarm parameters.. l 0x02: indicates that the Sync timestamp remains unchanged when the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock is synchronized. troubleshoot the abnormality first. Cause 2: The physical link where the traced clock source resides is faulty. Parameter 1 = 0x01 Go to steps 3 and 4. ----End Related Information None. If the master NE is abnormal. For details about how to query PDV performance of the local NE.

LMFA. The ALM_GFP_dCSF alarm is reported when the sink end receives the management frame. LFA. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. or LMFA alarm is reported on the opposite NE. or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm. LFA. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm. UP_E1_AIS. Ltd. A. 295 . ----End Related Information None.. UP_E1_AIS.3.3 ALM_E1RAI Description The ALM_E1RAI is an alarm indicating that the E1 link on the opposite NE reports alarms.4 ALM_GFP_dCSF Description The ALM_GFP_dCSF is an alarm indicating that the generic framing procedure (GFP) customer signal is lost. When the source end fails to receive the GFP customer signal. Step 2 Handle these alarms first. LFA.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. LMFA. DOWN_E1_AIS. the services on the local NE in the downstream direction are interrupted.3. UP_E1_AIS. Possible Causes l Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS. This alarm is reported on the local NE when the T_ALOS. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. it sends the management frame to the sink end.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. services are interrupted. 296 ..parameterN. 1. Parameter 2. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades.3. Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades.. refer to the following table. For details about each parameter.. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. 1. For example. Replace the faulty board. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. ----End Related Information None. select the alarm. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1. Reconfigure the timeslot binding at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. Troubleshoot the radio link. A. Ltd.5 ALM_GFP_dLFD Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.

Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled. the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different timeslots or different numbers of paths.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The ALM_GFP_dLFD is an alarm indicating that the GFP frame is out of frame. refer to the following table. For details about each parameter. Parameter 2. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty. For details. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. 1. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Correct the configuration data. the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different timeslots or different numbers of paths. Ltd..parameterN... Step 2 Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the logical port. Replace the alarmed board. services are interrupted. The links are faulty The links are normal Then. 297 . Check whether the links where the service travels have errors or become faulty. For example.. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the GFP frame is out of frame. If.. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1. select the alarm. 1. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Rectify the fault. see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board. and the value is always 0x01. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system..

the affected IMA link becomes available. If. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links. Handle the relevant alarms first. such as R_LOS.6 ALM_IMA_LIF Description The ALM_IMA_LIF is an alarm indicating that the IMA link is out of frame in the receive direction. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. refer to the following table.3. Therefore. A. and MS_AIS. l Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. R_LOF. and MS_AIS. Impact on the System l When this alarm occurs. For details about each parameter. After this alarm is cleared.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID. ... The path reports any SDH alarm Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. select the alarm. 298 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Ltd. R_LOF.parameterN. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. causing loss of cells.... such as R_LOS. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link in the receive direction. congestion occurs on the IMA port.. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. Name Parameter 1.

provided at the physical layer.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board. ----End Related Information Loss of frame alignment A frame alignment word. 3. End the alarm handling.. For details about each parameter. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. occupies the initial position of a frame and defines the start of information field. see 6. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty... Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system... refer to the following table. Then.parameterN.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.. Ltd.3. Go to Cause 3.. 1. Then.7 ALM_IMA_LODS Description The ALM_IMA_LODS is an alarm indicating the differential delay on the IMA link crosses the threshold. A. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream. Replace the board. 2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent.. If. Go to Cause 2. This alarm occurs when the maximum differential delay on the IMA link exceeds the preset value. Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. check whether the alarm clears.. The path does not report any SDH alarm Then. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. 4.. 299 . Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 1. For details. select the alarm.

A. Cause 2: Within one IMA group. the transmission distances of member links have too large gaps. The alarm parameters are in the Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. ----End Related Information Differential delay Differential delay refers to the service delay difference between E1 links. the transmission distances of member links have too large gaps. Use the meter to measure the transmission time on E1 links. 1. see Modifying CES Service Parameters. 1. 300 . select the alarm. adjust the IMA links or delete the member link with over long transmission time from the IMA group. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm..8 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE Description The ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the receive direction. Step 2 Cause 2: Within one IMA group. Ltd. Change the maximum differential delay to a greater value.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1. For details. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly. If the transmission time on different links has a gap larger than 25 ms (default value). Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Impact on the System The IMA links are unavailable.

Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links. Go to Cause 2.. If.. Go to Cause 3. Name Parameter 1. Then.. The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm Then. Replace the board.. For details about each parameter. and MS_AIS. R_LOF.. 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.. After this alarm is cleared. 4.. the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. End the alarm handling. such as R_LOS. the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. refer to the following table. the affected IMA link becomes available. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. For details. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. 2.. If. causing loss of cells. 1. l Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. Therefore. Ltd. Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. see 6. Then. check whether the alarm clears.. Impact on the System l When this alarm occurs. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.parameterN. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID. R_LOF.. 1. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent.. such as R_LOS. congestion occurs on the IMA port. and MS_AIS. 301 . Handle the relevant alarms first.

3. such as R_LOS. R_LOF. Name Parameter 1.. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID. . and MS_AIS. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links. A.. Therefore. refer to the following table. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. For details about each parameter.. Impact on the System l When this alarm occurs. the affected IMA link becomes available. and MS_AIS..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. If.9 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE Description The ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the transmit direction. the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. Handle the relevant alarms first. congestion occurs on the IMA port.. such as R_LOS. After this alarm is cleared. 302 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. l Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. select the alarm. causing loss of cells.parameterN. The path reports any SDH alarm Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. R_LOF. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.

select the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. The path does not report any SDH alarm Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. 303 . The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.. Name Parameter 1.. A. check whether the alarm clears.10 ALM_IMA_RFI Description The ALM_IMA_RFI is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE is out of frame (OOF) in the receive direction... 3. Replace the board. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. 1.. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link of the opposite NE and the opposite NE notifies the local NE of its OOF state. For details. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board. Go to Cause 2. refer to the following table. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.. Ltd.. Then. Go to Cause 3. ----End Related Information None. If. Then. see 6. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent.parameterN.3.. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.. 2. End the alarm handling. 4. 1.. For details about each parameter.

. see 6. 3. the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Ltd. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. check whether the alarm clears. occupies the initial position of a frame and defines the start of information field. such as R_LOS. the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. and MS_AIS. Therefore.. such as R_LOS. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. Then. and MS_AIS. For details.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System l When this alarm occurs. congestion occurs on the IMA port... 4. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 304 . Handle the relevant alarms first. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.. Go to Cause 3... End the alarm handling. the affected IMA link becomes available. ----End Related Information Frame alignment loss A frame alignment word. Then. 1. R_LOF. After this alarm is cleared.. l Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. If. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links. Go to Cause 2. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms. R_LOF. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream. Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 2. If. The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm Then.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board. Replace the board. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. causing loss of cells. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. provided at the physical layer. 1.

Hence.. 1. Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power. Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels. 305 . Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels. Eliminate the interferences around the working channels. this alarm is cleared. no measures should be taken to handle the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels. When the external factors (for example. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The external factors (for example. Use the NMS to check whether the transmit power of the ODU at the transmit end is normal. see Troubleshooting Microwave Links. Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power. After the AM mode is upshifted from the lower-order modulation scheme to the highest-order modulation scheme. Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.11 AM_DOWNSHIFT Description The AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm indicates the downshift of the AM scheme. the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels. 1. the transmission capacity is reduced.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The external factors (for example. the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels.3. This alarm occurs after the AM mode is downshifted from the highest-order modulation scheme to the lower-order modulation scheme. For details on troubleshooting at the transmit end. Step 4 Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power. Impact on the System When the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm occurs. the downshift of the AM scheme is normal. Ltd. 1.

For example. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. Ltd.. For details about each parameter. If the current paths are unavailable. A. ----End Related Information None. select the alarm.. Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. the services cannot be switched. the services are interrupted. Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly.3. 306 . 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1. Use the NMS to check whether the receive power of the ODU at the receive end is normal.parameterN. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. For details on troubleshooting at the receive end.12 APS_FAIL Description The APS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching fails. Impact on the System When the APS_FAIL alarm occurs. see Troubleshooting Microwave Links. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. l 0x01: linear MS protection Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to the following table.

. If. The parameters are set incorrectly The parameters are set correctly Then. Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. Then. For details. Related Information None.13 APS_INDI Description The APS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching occurs.. Set the parameters correctly. select the alarm. restarted The alarm persists after the protocol is restarted ----End Contact Huawei engineers to handle the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.3. Ltd. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. 307 ..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. If. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The alarm is cleared after the protocol is End the alarm handling.... 2. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Check whether the parameters of the MSP protocol are set correctly..parameterN. see Enabling/ Disabling the linear MSP protocol.. refer to the following table.. For details about each parameter. A. 1. Go to the next step... Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x01: linear MS protection.

If yes. switch the service to the protection system control and cross-connect board and replace the faulty system control and cross-connect board. the service is interrupted. If yes. Ltd. replace the faulty board and then check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. the extra services are interrupted. check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the manual switching state. 308 . 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the automatic switching state. Do as follows: a. In the case of 1:N MS protection. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. after the switching starts and before the switching is complete. check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.14 APS_MANUAL_STOP Description The APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the MSP protocol is stopped manually. If the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty and a protection system control and cross-connect board is available. Check whether the service board configured with the MSP protocol is faulty. After the alarms are cleared.. 3. For example. Then. Handle the R_LOS. the services are restored to normal. B2_EXC. 1. R_LOF. forced switching state. or B2_SD alarm that the equipment reports. release the switching and check whether the alarm is cleared. A. wait until the MSP protocol is changed from the automatic switching state to the normal state. Query the linear MSP group.3. 2. Impact on the System During the switching (≤ 50 ms). MS_AIS. Possible Causes Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs. After the switching is complete. ----End Related Information None. c. Check whether the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty. b. or locked switching state.

A... the number of unknown cells crosses the specified threshold. 309 . Possible Causes Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.15 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC Description The ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of unknown cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact on the System When the APS_MANUAL_STOP alarm occurs. select the alarm. within a period (2.parameterN.3. refer to the following table. Enable/Disable the linear MSP protocol.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group.5s). the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail. 1. ----End Related Information None.. For example. Ltd. l 0x01: linear MS protection. For details about each parameter. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually. 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1. This alarm occurs when the board detects that. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.

3. This alarm occurs when the board detects the AU pointer of all 1s for three consecutive frames. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. reconnect fibers or reconfigure connections. Cause 3: Fragments are received on the network side. modify the configuration. If not. Ltd. A. Step 2 Check whether connections are correct.. 310 .16 AU_AIS Description The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating the administrative unit (AU). Procedure Step 1 Check whether the configuration at the two ends of the PW is consistent. Impact on the System An unknown cell is discarded once it is detected. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: PW control words mismatch. As a result. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the packet loss rate increases and services are affected. If not. ----End Related Information None. Cause 2: PW types mismatch.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.

A. This alarm occurs when a board detects the AU pointer of invalid values or with the NDF for eight consecutive frames. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm. 311 ... Replace the system control board on the opposite NE. Ltd. If the services are configured with protection. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm. protection switching may be triggered. End the alarm handling. If.. ----End Related Information None. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.17 AU_LOP Description The AU_LOP is an alarm indicating the loss of the AU pointer. The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Go to Cause 2. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. Then... Go to the next step. Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System When the AU_AIS alarm occurs.. 1. Clear the alarm immediately... 1. the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. The fault is rectified. If.3. Replace the alarmed board.. Replace the board where the line unit is located or the IF board. The alarm that triggers the AU_AIS insertion occurs No such alarms that trigger the AU_AIS insertion occur Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.

Then.. 1. End the alarm handling. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Replace the alarmed board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None..18 B1_EXC Description The B1_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B1 errors (in the regenerator section) exceed the threshold. protection switching may be triggered. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The fault is rectified.. Replace the system control board on the opposite NE. ----End Related Information None. A. 312 . Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.3. If the services are configured with protection. If. the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. Go to the next step. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.. Impact on the System When the AU_LOP alarm occurs.. 1. Ltd. This alarm is detected by using the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.

3... 313 . Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board)..9 Browsing Current Performance Events. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. If. Go to the next step. Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. the services on the port are interrupted... If. Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). fiber. Ltd... 1. For details.. 2. Go to the next step.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. see 8. within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Possible Causes l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel. normal. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Then. The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. Impact on the System When the B1_EXC alarm occurs.. The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty.

The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. If yes. and whether the fiber connector is dirty. Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1.. The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. If. and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.. Reconfigure the clock source.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 3. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed. A.. The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.. 1. reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Ltd. 1. Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).3. The clock may become asynchronous and B1 errors may occur. If.. replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.. clear the alarm.... Handle the errors of TDM services... The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 314 . MW_BER_SD.19 B1_SD Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Related Information The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. If. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). If the fiber is faulty. 1. The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then. The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then. Then.. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC. Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. In this case. MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes.

Possible Causes l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. Go to the next step.. The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. Impact on the System When the B1_SD alarm occurs. This alarm is detected by using the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames. For details.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B1 errors (in the regenerator section).3. 315 . within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If. Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. see 8.. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) but do not reach the preset B1_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). 1.9 Browsing Current Performance Events. An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm.. Ltd. normal. Then. Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).. the service performance on the port degrades.. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

If. The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then. Go to the next step.. The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption..... Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then.. 1... 1. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). If. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel.. If the fiber is faulty. and whether the fiber connector is dirty... 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.. MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.. If. fiber 3.. clear the alarm. 316 . Check whether the MW_BER_EXC. If. Then. Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE. Then. If yes. Reconfigure the clock source. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE. The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).. Ltd. The SDH optical line board of the local NE is faulty. 1. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed. MW_BER_SD. In this case.. If yes.

. 1. Handle the errors of TDM services. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors exceeds the preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).. Ltd. A. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None.20 B2_EXC Description The B2_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B2 errors (in the multiplex section) exceed the threshold.. The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.3.. Then. For details.. Impact on the System The services on the port are interrupted. If. see 8. 317 . Possible Causes l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).9 Browsing Current Performance Events.

318 . Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Then....OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed. within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Then. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.. Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. If. The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Then.. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Ltd. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal.. If the fiber is faulty.. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault.. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault... MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. In this case. reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example. If yes. 1. If yes. The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then.. and whether the fiber connector is dirty. 1. If. Reconfigure the clock source. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC. and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE. The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption.. Go to the next step. 1. The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. fiber 3... Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).. clear the alarm. MW_BER_SD.. Go to the next step. normal. 1. replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then. Handle the errors of TDM services. Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE. ----End Related Information The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. 319 . A.21 B2_SD Description The B2_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B2 errors (in the multiplex section). Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None.. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If... The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Impact on the System The service performance on the port degrades. Possible Causes l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors is higher than the preset B2_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default)..

. 1. within ± 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2.. If. and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then.. normal.. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).. Then.. 1. The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE.. The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. If.9 Browsing Current Performance Events. MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces.. The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE.. If the fiber is faulty. Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. In this case.. 1. but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example. fiber 3. Ltd.. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. 320 . clear the alarm. reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector. Loop back the optical interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If yes. The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. Go to the next step. see 8. Go to the next step. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC. If yes. Reconfigure the clock source..3. The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. For details. If.. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Then. and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If. Then. MW_BER_SD.

Impact on the System When the B3_EXC alarm occurs. 1. The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. Possible Causes l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 321 . the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.. Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).... Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. Ltd. Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors exceeds the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). Handle the errors of TDM services.. Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE. The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then. ----End Related Information The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE...3. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Then..22 B3_EXC Description The B3_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B3 errors (in the higher order path) exceed the threshold. Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A. If. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.

.. The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then. MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE... In this case. see 8. the clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur.. If. and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.. If. replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). If yes. fiber 3. The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference l l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Go to the next step. reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop.. within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2..3. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. 1.9 Browsing Current Performance Events. The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption.. If. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed. 1. Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Go to the next step. normal. For details. Reconfigure the clock source. Then. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. Then. 322 . and whether the fiber connector is dirty. but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example. If the fiber is faulty. If yes. Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. MW_BER_SD. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC.. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).. 1. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Ltd. In this case.. clear the alarm.

by default). If. Handle the errors of TDM services.parameterN. Then. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses the B3_EXC_VC3 alarm threshold (10-3. For details about each parameter.. A. The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE.23 B3_EXC_VC3 Description The B3_EXC_VC3 alarm indicates that the number of B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path crosses the threshold. 323 .. ----End Related Information The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. select the alarm. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. Name Parameter 1 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE..3.. Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).... The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 1. The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then. Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE. Ltd. The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. refer to the following table.. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm..

Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). clear the higher-level alarms. Check whether the alarm is cleared. Go to Cause 4.. Then. Go to the next step. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local site meet the specifications of the optical ports. B3_EXC. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3. If.. 1... If.. B2_SD. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). Impact on the System The services in the alarmed path have a large number of bit errors.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 2. or B3_SD alarms. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then. For details. The transmit power at the opposite site is Replace the optical module at the too low opposite site.. 324 .. If yes. Cause 4: A board is faulty. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. Ltd.. If. but the receive power at the local site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for example. End the alarm handling. The number of bit errors changes The number of bit errors does not change Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1. see Browsing Current Performance Events. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment. For example.. Then. Go to the next step. normal. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. The transmit power at the opposite site is A fiber is faulty. 2.. B2_EXC.. a difference within ±3 dB) 2.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. 1.. B1_SD. Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).

1. If a fiber is faulty. Check whether the alarm is cleared. Then. Check whether the cable grounding. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed... 1. Go to Cause 4. Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing board at the local site. or replace the fiber jumper. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path. cable connectors. End the alarm handling. If. Ltd. Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port).. Go to Cause 4.. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then. replace the faulty cables.. ----End Related Information None. A. 2.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Service alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If yes. 325 . If. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty. and cables are damaged.. End the alarm handling. and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 3. Check whether the alarm is cleared. The fault is rectified after the Ethernet Replace the Ethernet processing board at port is looped back the opposite site... This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors is higher than the preset B3_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).. If yes. clean or replace the fiber connector... If.24 B3_SD Description The B3_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B3 errors (in the higher order path)..3. The fault is not rectified after the Ethernet port is looped back Then.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If... If... but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC. If the fiber is faulty. clear the alarm. Then.. MW_BER_SD. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). and whether the fiber connector is dirty. Go to the next step. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. 1. Possible Causes l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Ltd. 326 . If yes. The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. fiber 3. Impact on the System The service performance on the port degrades. If yes. Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades... For details. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal.3. Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. see 8. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector. Then. 1. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed. Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Go to the next step. MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None.. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).9 Browsing Current Performance Events. normal..

Then... A. The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then. reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Reconfigure the clock source. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1.. The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty.. ----End Related Information The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. In this case. The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. 327 .. Loop back the optical interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. In this case. 1. If. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses the B3_SD_VC3 alarm threshold (10-6. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. Ltd. the clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). by default)... Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.3. If. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE.. If. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board)... and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.25 B3_SD_VC3 Description The B3_SD_VC3 alarm indicates a signal degrade (SD) condition caused by excessive B3 bit errors in VC-3 paths.. Handle the errors of TDM services..

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 328 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . see Browsing Current Performance Events. the services in the alarmed path deteriorate. Impact on the System When the B3_SD_VC3 alarm occurs. Ltd... Parameter 2. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system...parameterN. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1. Cause 4: A board is faulty.. Check whether the alarm is cleared. 1. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. B2_EXC. or B3_SD alarms.. B3_EXC. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then.. refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01. Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). select the alarm. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. B2_SD. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local site meet the specifications of the optical ports. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. clear the higher-level alarms.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. For details. 2. End the alarm handling. If. For details about each parameter. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC. 1. Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3. For example. B1_SD. If yes. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).

The fault is rectified after the Ethernet Replace the Ethernet processing board at port is looped back the opposite site.... Check whether the alarm is cleared. Then.. If. If. replace the faulty cables. Check whether the alarm is cleared. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then. Check whether the cable grounding... If.. but the receive power at the local site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for example. check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed. If yes.... normal. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or replace the fiber jumper. clean or replace the fiber connector.. If a fiber is faulty. The transmit power at the opposite site is Replace the optical module at the too low opposite site. Go to Cause 4. The transmit power at the opposite site is A fiber is faulty.. 329 . 1. Go to Cause 4. cable connectors. Then. a difference within ±3 dB) 2.. Go to the next step. and cables are damaged. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty. If yes. Go to the next step. Go to Cause 4.. ----End Related Information None. The number of bit errors changes The number of bit errors does not change 3. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path.. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment. Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing board at the local site. If.. Then. and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. The fault is not rectified after the Ethernet port is looped back Then.. Ltd... Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). 2. End the alarm handling.. 1. End the alarm handling..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.

. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 1 is faulty. Replace the cabinet.. Ltd. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 1 is faulty.. 1.3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..26 BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description The BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the temperature sensor of battery group 1 fails. 2. Go to Cause 3. Replace the temperature sensor of battery group 1. If. Then.. check whether the alarm clears.. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. End the alarm handling... 1. Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed. Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 330 . The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Impact on the System The temperature data of battery group 1 cannot be collected.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. If. End the alarm handling. 2. Go to Cause 2. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Then. check whether the alarm clears..

27 BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description The BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the temperature sensor of battery group 2 fails.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. 2. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. A.. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 2 is faulty. 2. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Replace the temperature sensor of battery group 2... Impact on the System The temperature data of battery group 2 cannot be collected. Connect cables correctly. If.. Ltd. Then. Replace damaged cables. The alarm clears The alarm persists Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. check whether the alarm clears. ----End Related Information None. Step 4 Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed. End the alarm handling. 1. 331 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 2 is faulty. . 1. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Go to Cause 2.3. Install the temperature sensor. Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed..

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 2. 1.parameterN. Replace damaged cables. ----End Related Information None. Name Parameter 1. Ltd. A.. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Then. Install the board temperature sensor... If. the physical board in this slot cannot work. Impact on the System When the BD_NOT_INSTALLED alarm occurs. For details about each parameter..3. 2. 332 . Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. but the logical board is not added.. select the alarm. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. End the alarm handling. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Step 4 Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.28 BD_NOT_INSTALLED Description The BD_NOT_INSTALLED is an alarm indicating that the physical board is installed in a certain slot. refer to the following table... Replace the cabinet. Go to Cause 3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. check whether the alarm clears. 1. Connect cables correctly. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the slot.

the possible causes are as follows: l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated. ----End Related Information None.. Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty. Impact on the System When the BD_STATUS alarm occurs. Ltd. 333 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot. the alarmed board fails to work. Possible Causes If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU. Configure the logical board. A. Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot. the possible causes are as follows: l l l l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot. Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.29 BD_STATUS Description The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board cannot be detected.3. Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not connected properly. If the alarm is reported by the ODU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. 1.

. Ltd. 1. Step 2 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not connected properly.2 Checking the Board Status... insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again. Check whether the logical slot and physical slot of the alarmed board are consistent...... Ensure that the slot is normal. see 8.. Query whether the IF board reports the HARD_BAD. If. BD_NOT_INSTALLED or VOLT_LOS alarm. End the alarm handling. 1. BD_STATUS. 1.. The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then. The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Then.. TIP Generally. If.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot. Ensure that the board and the backplane are connected properly.. Replace the alarmed board. 334 . 2.. Remove the board.. If. If. Ensure that the board is normal. 1.. Step 3 Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty. and use a torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin. Then. The fault is rectified.3.. Step 5 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated. Install the board in a correct slot. Replace the alarmed ODU. IF_CABLE_OPEN. the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Step 4 Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault of the slot. Then. Clear the alarm immediately. End the alarm handling. The IF board reports any of the preceding alarms The IF board does not report any of the preceding alarms Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The alarmed board is installed in an incorrect slot The alarmed board is installed in a correct slot Then. For details. The fault is rectified. the board can work normally. Remove and insert the alarmed board. 1. If a vacant slot is available..

1. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. ----End Related Information None. Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Go to Cause 2. Ltd. Replace the board temperature sensor. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. 1. End the alarm handling. A. Cause 4: The board temperature sensor is not installed. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Replace the cabinet... If. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The board temperature sensor is faulty. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Then.3.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 6 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty. Replace the alarmed ODU. 1.. check whether the alarm clears.30 BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description The BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the board temperature sensor of the cabinet fails.. Impact on the System The board temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected. 2. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The board temperature sensor is faulty. 335 .

Impact on the System The services on the alarmed board are interrupted.3. ----End Related Information None. 2.. A.. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and timing board. Procedure Step 1 Perform a cold reset on the alarmed standby system control.31 BIOS_STATUS Description The BIOS_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is in BIOS state. Go to Cause 3. switching. If.. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Connect cables correctly. Step 4 Cause 4: The board temperature sensor is not installed. Install the board temperature sensor. Cause 2: The board software becomes abnormal. and then check whether the alarm is cleared.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2. 336 . Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the slot ID of the board that is in BIOS state. Ltd. Replace damaged cables... Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The board software is lost. Then. 1. check whether the alarm clears. End the alarm handling.

Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). MW_FEC_UNCOR. Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) exceeds the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). and timing board. B2_SD. MW_BER_EXC. B2_EXC. replace the board. and then reseat the board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 If the alarm persists. remove the standby system control.. 1.3. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link along which the E1 service signal travels. Ltd. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). clear the alarm immediately. switching. B1_SD. Step 3 If the alarm persists. ----End Related Information None. RPS_INDI. If yes. A. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 337 . B3_EXC. The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows: B1_EXC.32 BIP_EXC Description The BIP_EXC is an alarm indicating that the BIP errors exceed the threshold. the service on the alarmed path is interrupted. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and MW_BER_SD. B3_SD. Impact on the System When the BIP_EXC alarm occurs.

.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service signal.3. If. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.33 BIP_SD Description The BIP_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the BIP errors. The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-3 when EMS6 board report the alarm. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).... If yes. Clear the alarm immediately. End the alarm handling. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then.. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then. There is any of the preceding alarms No such alarms occur Then. Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm.. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then. Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) is higher than the Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Replace the system control and cross-connect board. 1. Ltd. A. End the alarm handling. Replace the Hybrid IF board.... 1.. clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal. 338 . check whether the alarm is cleared. Then. For example. Table A-3 Alarm Parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. Related Information Handle the errors of TDM services. Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01.... check whether the alarm is cleared. If.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

preset BIP_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When the BIP_SD alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows: B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD. If... There is any of the preceding alarms No such alarms occur Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service signal. If... An alarm occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists

Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services. The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-4 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-4 Alarm Parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.34 BOOTROM_BAD
Description
The BOOTROM_BAD is an alarm indicating that the BOOTROM data consistency check fails. This alarm occurs when the BOOTROM data is damaged during a periodical check by the system.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicates the type of the BOOTROM damage. l 0x00, 0x01: damage of the basic BIOS l 0x00, 0x02: damage of the extended BIOS

Parameter 4, Parameter 5

The values are always 0xff 0xff.

Impact on the System
When the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work. l l When the NE is already started, the BOOTROM_BAD alarm does not affect the system and services. If the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs and a hard reset is performed on a board, the board fails to load the BIOS and cannot be started.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The basic BIOS is damaged. Cause 2: The extended BIOS is damaged. Cause 3: The BOOTROM database is damaged. Cause 4: The system control switch and timing boardis faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.35 BUS_ERR
Description
The BUS_ERR alarm indicates bus errors. This alarm occurs when the bus becomes abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the bus error types. l 0x01: BUS_LOS l 0x02: BUS_OOF l 0x03: BUS_LOF l 0x04: BUS_OOA l 0x05: BUS_RX_DOWN l 0x06: BUS_TX_DOWN l 0x07: BUS_SPI_DOWN l 0x08: BUS_SCI_ERR l 0x09: BUS_OPP_CLK_LOC l 0x0a:BUS_SERDS_ERR l 0x0b:BUS_MII_ERR l 0x0c:BUS_HW_ERR l 0x0d:BUS_FE_ERR l 0x0e:BUS_EMIF_ERR l 0x0f:BUS_IIC_ERR l 0x10:BUS_GE_LINK_ERR l 0x11:BUS_EMIF Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the bus that has errors. This parameter is self-defined.

Impact on the System
When the BUS_ERR alarm occurs, the services that travel along the faulty bus are interrupted or have errors.

Possible Causes
The possible causes of the BUS_ERR alarm are as follows: l l Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

342

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted. 1. Remove and insert the board.

Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

Related Information
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-5 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-5 Alarm parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the bus error type. 0x10: The Serdes bus of the GE bridge is faulty.

A.3.36 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
Description
The CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN is an alarm indicating that the locking function of CES ACR service clock is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
Name Meaning

Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicate the index of PW that carries the services associated with the ACR clock source.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 5

Meaning Indicates clock mode. l 0x01: tracing mode. l 0x02: holdover mode. l 0x03: free-run mode.

Parameter 6

Indicates whether the clock is locked. l 0x00: unlocked. l 0x01: locked.

Impact on the System
Service quality is affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms. Cause 2: The network is unstable. Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms. 1. 2. Query the CES services associated with the ACR clock source. For details, see Configuring the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain. Check whether these services have alarms. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms.

Step 2 Cause 2: The network is unstable. 1. 2. Check for jitters and delays on the network. Query service performance statistics. For details, see 8.3.9 Browsing Current Performance Events. Analyze service performance statistics. If the network is unstable, rectify the faults on the network, or switch the affected services to a stable network.

Step 3 Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal. 1. 2. Query alarms reported by the NEs on the service path. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. Handle the alarms. For details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

344

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

A.3.37 CES_APS_INDI
Description
The CES_APS_INDI is an alarm indicating the status of the packet linear MSP. This alarm is reported when the configured packet linear MSP is in the switching state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the MSP protection group.

Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, automatic protection switching or switching triggered by an external command occurs. As a result, services are switched to the protection channel for transmission. This alarm does not affect the services. If the protection channel fails at this time, the services are interrupted.

l

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: An external command is issued to trigger switching (such as manual switching, forced switching, exercise switching, and lockout of switching). Cause 2: There is an alarm (such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm) or a cold reset that triggers automatic MSP switching. Cause 3: The attributes of the MSP protection group are incorrectly configured. Cause 4: The interface board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An external command is issued to trigger switching (such as manual switching, forced switching, exercise switching, and lockout of switching). 1.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Check the switching status of the protection group.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

If... The MSP is in the state of manual switching, forced switching, or exercise switching The MSP is not in any of the preceding switching state

Then... Clear the switching status. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step 2. Go to Step 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: There is an alarm (such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm) or a cold reset that triggers automatic MSP switching. 1. Check whether the protection group is in the automatic switching state. If... Then...

The local NE reports the R_LOS, The MSP protection group changes to the R_LOF, MS_AIS, or B2_EXC alarm switching state, and the CES_APS_INDI alarm is reported. Clear the alarm immediately. Then check whether the CES_APS_INDI alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to the next step. The local NE reports the B2_SD alarm Clear the alarm immediately. Then check whether the CES_APS_INDI alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to the next step. The interface board is in the cold resetting state After the cold resetting ends, go to step 3 and identify the cause of the cold resetting.

The MSP is not in any of the preceding Go to the next step. switching state 2. Check the method for setting the revertive mode of the protection group. If... Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Then... After the working channel recovers, the services are automatically switched from the protection channel to the working channel once the preset wait to restore (WTR) time expires. The CES_APS_INDI alarm will be cleared after the switching succeeds. Wait until the MSP protection group changes from the switching status to the normal status. Then check whether the CES_APS_INDI alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step 3.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

346

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

If... Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive

Then... The services are not switched from the protection channel to the working channel after the working channel recovers, and the CES_APS_INDI alarm persists. To clear the CES_APS_INDI alarm, manually switch the services from the protection channel to the working channel. Then go to the next step.

3.

After the manual switching succeeds, check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step 3. If the packet linear MSP is configured on a per-NE basis, check whether the MSP parameters such as the protection type, switching mode, and mapping unit are configured correctly. If any of the preceding parameter values are incorrect, change the values and apply correct settings to the NE. For details, see Configuring Linear MSP. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step 4. Check whether the interface board that is configured with the packet linear MSP is functioning properly. If a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the interface board, clear the alarm immediately. Replace the interface board. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.

Step 3 Cause 3: The attributes of the MSP protection group are incorrectly configured. 1.

2. 1. 2. 3.

Step 4 Cause 4: The interface board is faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.38 CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the packet linear MSP protocol is stopped manually. This alarm is reported when the packet linear MSP protocol is stopped manually.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the MSP protection group.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the packet linear MSP protocol is stopped and the MSP fails. As a result, STM-1 services cannot be protected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The APS protocol for the corresponding protection group is manually stopped.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The APS protocol for the corresponding protection group is manually stopped. 1. 2. Determine the ID of the MSP protection group whose APS protocol is stopped according to alarm parameters. Restart the MSP protocol for the protection group.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.39 CES_JTROVR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTROVR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer overflows crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, the number of jitter buffer overflows per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
The buffer area does not have sufficient space for the received frames. As a result, packets are discarded.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. 1. 2. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.

Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. 1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.40 CES_JTRUDR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTRUDR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer underflows crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of jitter buffer underflows per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, no packets are available in the buffer area for transmission. As a result, underflows occur in the buffer area.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

l l l l

Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. Cause 3: The link is looped. Cause 4: The link is congested. Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. 1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.

Step 3 Cause 3: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop.

Step 4 Cause 4: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

Step 5 Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. 1. 2. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.41 CES_K1_K2_M
Description
The CES_K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating that the K1 byte and K2 byte of the packet MSP mismatch. This alarm is reported when the channel numbers indicated in the transmitted K1 byte and the received K2 byte are inconsistent and the inconsistency lasts for a period of time (160 ms by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, MSP fails. If a fiber cut or another fault occurs at this time, services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: MSP is incorrectly configured. Cause 2: The interface board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: MSP is incorrectly configured. 1. Check whether the MSP configurations are consistent between the local and opposite NEs. For example, ensure that the other end is configured as the working unit if one end of a fiber is configured as the working unit; otherwise, the CES_K1_K2_M alarm is reported. Ensure that MSP is configured correctly. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step 2. Check whether the interface boards on which MSP is configured are functioning properly on the local and opposite NEs. If a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the interface board, clear the alarm immediately. If the alarm persists, replace the interface board. For details, see 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The interface board is faulty. 1. 2. 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.42 CES_K2_M
Description
The CES_K2_M is an alarm indicating that a mismatched K2 byte of the packet MSP is detected. This alarm is reported when the protection mode used on the opposite NE, which is indicated by bit 5 of the received K2 byte, is different from that used on the local NE for a period of time (2s by default).

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

351

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, MSP fails. If a fiber cut or another fault occurs at this time, services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Different protection modes are configured at both ends of a protection group. Cause 2: The interface board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Different protection modes are configured at both ends of a protection group. 1. Check whether the same protection mode is configured at both ends of a protection group. If 1+1 protection is configured at one end and 1:N protection is configured at the other end, the CES_K2_M alarm is reported. For details, see Creating a Linear MSP Protection Group.

Step 2 Cause 2: The interface board is faulty. 1. 2. 3. Check whether the interface boards on which MSP is configured are functioning properly on the local and opposite NEs. If a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the interface board, clear the alarm immediately. If the alarm persists, replace the interface board. For details, see 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.43 CES_LOSPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_LOSPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of lost packets of CES services crosses the threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of lost packets per second crosses the specified threshold.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. 1. 1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Release the loop. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.

----End

Related Information
Packets are lost when the sequence numbers of received packets are greater than expected.

A.3.44 CES_MALPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MALPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Alarm Type Communication alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
A deformed frame is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW. Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW. 1. Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, see Modifying CES Service Parameters. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link. 1. ----End

Related Information
If a CESoPSN frame contains valid TDM data and does not contain any error indication, but the size of the CESoPSN frame is not consistent with the specified size, a deformed CESoPSN frame is generated.

A.3.45 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a unit time, the number of lost disordered packets crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of lost disordered packets per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
The packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. 1. 1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Release the loop. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.

----End

Related Information
Packets are disordered when the sequence numbers of received packets are smaller than expected.

A.3.46 CES_RDI
Description
The CES_RDI is an alarm of remote defect indication. When the CES_LOSPKT_EXC alarm is reported at the remote end, the remote end sets the R bit in control word to 1. Upon receiving a packet in which the R bit is 1, the local end reports the CES_RDI alarm.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
The packet loss rate at the remote end crosses the specified threshold.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

l

Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.47 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_STRAYPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of errored packets in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of errored packets in CES services per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
An errored packet is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: Links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Links are misconnected.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356

357 . R_LOF. UP_E1_AIS.. Ltd. R_LOS. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. handle these alarms. LMFA.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. or MS_AIS alarm. LMFA. services are interrupted. ----End Related Information Incorrect packets are received when the tracing source field in the RTP head is different from expected. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None. If yes. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. the remote NE sets the L bit in the control word to 1. LFA.48 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT Description The CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT is an alarm indicating that the AC circuit on the remote NE is faulty. On detection of an AC circuit fault. When receiving a packet in which the L bit is 1. Check the link configuration and rectify the fault. LFA. R_LOS. the local NE reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm. Procedure Step 1 Check whether the remote NE reports the T_ALOS. A. R_LOF.3. Possible Causes Cause 1: The remote NE reports the T_ALOS. or MS_AIS alarm. UP_E1_AIS.

49 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI Description The CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI is a remote alarm indication. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. On detection of the RAI alarm.50 CFCARD_FAILED Description The CFCARD_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the operation on the CF card fails. 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm. Clear the ALM_E1RAI alarm on the remote NE. When receiving the packet in which the L bit is 0 and the M field is 10. the remote NE sets the L bit of the control word to 0 and the M field of the control word to 10. Ltd.3. Possible Causes Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.. A. Impact on the System The services in the downstream direction of the remote NE are interrupted. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Equipment alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the local NE reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI alarm.3. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 358 .

the database cannot be backed up to the CF card or be restored from the CF card. A. Go to Cause 3. Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match.. End the alarm handling. If. Then... If. If yes. End the alarm handling. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized. and the file system of the CF card fails to be created. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None.. 2..51 CFCARD_OFFLINE Description The CFCARD_OFFLINE is an alarm indicating that the CF card is offline. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the file system of the CF card fails to be created..3. Step 2 Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty. Replace the CF card and check whether the alarm is cleared. Ltd. 1. 359 . 1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication board.. Yes No ----End Then. Impact on the System When the CFCARD_FAILED alarm occurs.. Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match. Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.. Yes No Then. perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Related Information None. Replace the system control and communication board. check whether the alarm is cleared.

. Check whether the CF card is installed on the system control and communication board.. Cause 3: The CF card is faulty. Go to Cause 3. Check whether the alarm is cleared. 1. Check whether the CF card is loosened. re-insert the CF card. Install the CF card.. If. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade. 360 ... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2. If yes.. Check whether the alarm is cleared. Replace the CF card.... 1. Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.. If. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted. Impact on the System When the CFCARD_OFFLINE alarm occurs. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted. 2. End the alarm handling. the database cannot be backed up to the CF card or be restored from the CF card.. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board.. Yes No Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. No Yes Then. Step 3 Cause 3: The CF card is faulty. If. Yes No Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board. Go to Cause 4.. Ltd.

When a correctable bit error is detected in the cell header. The alarm only indicates that some cells with a bit error are detected during cell delimitation at the ATM port. Impact on the System When the CHCS alarm occurs. and B3_SD. Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty. A. 3. the CHCS alarm occurs. 361 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port. check whether the alarm is cleared. 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. replace the system control and communication board. 1. ----End Related Information None.52 CHCS Description The CHCS is an alarm indicating the correctable cell error. and then check whether the alarm is cleared. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 4 Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty. On the NMS. If the alarm persists. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication board. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. the services are not affected. On the NMS. modify the service configuration to release the loop. 2.3. If yes. If yes. Ltd. check whether the service is looped. B2_SD. check whether the receive tunnel reports any alarms about excessive bit errors. such as B1_SD. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port.. perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. 2.

Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the CHCS alarm and check whether the alarm is cleared. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty. For details. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Optional: If the CHCS alarm persists after the cold reset. and bit errors may occur. l 0x02: indicates that the timestamp in the Sync message remains the same in Precision Time Protocol (PTP) synchronization mode.parameterN. the clock of the slave NE fails to trace that of the master NE. see 6. For details about each parameter. l 0x03: indicates that the phase discrimination value within the given time has crossed the upper threshold. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.3... Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see 8.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board. A. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. NOTE Board replacement is not recommended because the alarm does not affect the services.53 CLK_LOCK_FAIL Description The CLK_LOCK_FAIL is an alarm indicating a clock locking failure. ----End Related Information None. 2. Name Meaning Parameter 1 l 0x01: indicates that the phase-locked loop (PLL) is in holdover or free-run mode. replace the alarmed board and check whether the alarm is cleared. Ltd. select the alarm.1 Cold Reset. 1. For details.. 362 .8. refer to the following table.

If the alarm persists. Cause 4: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in IEEE 1588v2 synchronization mode. contact Huawei technical support engineers to handle the alarm. If there is an external clock source. Check whether clock configurations are correct. 1. 1. Check whether high-level bit error alarms or performance events have been reported on the NMS. If there is an external clock source. replace the IEEE 1588v2 clock port. 2. For example. if the input and output modes of the external clock source do not match each other. If no. 363 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in physical synchronization mode. Cause 3: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in IEEE 1588v2 synchronization mode.. Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in physical synchronization mode. 2. Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in IEEE 1588v2 synchronization mode. If the CLK_LOCK_FAIL alarm persists. Cause 2: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in physical synchronization mode. Check whether high-level bit error alarms or performance events have been reported on the NMS. see Configuring the Clock Sources. see Modifying the Parameters of the Clock Output. 3. ----End Related Information None. 6. If there is an external clock source. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in physical synchronization mode. handle them immediately. 2. clear the alarm immediately. If yes. If yes. 1. clear the alarm immediately. Ltd. modify the configurations.10 Replacing the System Control. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. check whether the NE reports the SYNC_C_LOS alarm. Switch and Timing Board and . For details. check whether its clock signals are normal. If yes. Step 3 Cause 3: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in IEEE 1588v2 synchronization mode. see Replacing the IEEE 1588v2 Clock Port. For details. replace the external clock source. handle them immediately. For details. If the SYN_BAD alarm exists. 1. If no. check whether its clock signals are normal. 2.

Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured.. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources that are listed in the clock source priority table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the clock mode.parameterN.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 1. 364 . In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. select the alarm. If a base station traces a clock that is carried by an Ethernet service. Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.. Configure the system clock source priority table. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. an alarm indicating a large clock frequency deviation may occur. Services may have bit errors when the clocks of the NEs are not synchronized.3. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. refer to the following table. For details about each parameter. This alarm is reported when the current clock does not trace any clock sources. For details. Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. the system clock is not of high quality. see Configuring the Clock Sources. l 0x01: holdover l 0x02: free-run Impact on the System When the clock source is not in the locked mode.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Pointer justification may occur in TDM services.54 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE Description The CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE alarm indicates that a clock source is not in locked mode. 1. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured.

Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet board. Related Information None. select the alarm. For details about each parameter. A.. Parameter 2. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board. 365 .55 COMMUN_FAIL Description The COMMUN_FAIL is an alarm indicating the inter-board communication failure... Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.3... refer to the following table. Parameter 2 is always 0x00.parameterN. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board. The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is an IF clock The synchronization source is a tributary clock The synchronization source is an Ethernet clock ----End Then. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Ltd. The value is always 0x01. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port. Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the path on which the alarm is generated. This alarm is reported when the communication between a board and the SCC board is interrupted. Parameter 3 has the following meanings: 0x03: inter-board Ethernet communication Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

and use a torch to check whether any pins are broken or bent.1 Removing a Board and 6.2 Inserting a Board... and their values are always 0xFF. Remove and insert the alarmed board. 1.. 1.. The slot becomes faulty due to broken pins or bent pins. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: A certain board is reset. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Consequently. see 6. The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is replaced. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. For details. the alarm is cleared automatically. Parameter 5 Parameters 4 and 5 are reserved. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is reset. Cause 4: A slot is faulty. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when a slot is faulty. the services cannot be configured or the protection switching function is unavailable. Then. TIP Then. 1. The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Step 4 Cause 3: A slot is faulty. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when a board is faulty. Remove the board. The fault is rectified. 1. End the alarm handling.. The fault is rectified. see 6 Part Replacement.. check whether the alarm is cleared. Then. and then check whether the alarm is cleared. Replace the alarmed board. Ltd... Impact on the System The NE configuration cannot be delivered to the board or the board cannot work. End the alarm handling. If.. 366 . For details. After you reset the board. Step 2 Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly. If.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 4.

Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 367 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2.3. Procedure Step 1 Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode by referring to Configuring Extended ECC Communication.. refer to the following table.parameterN. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Possible Causes The number of TCP connections between automatically extended ECC NEs is larger than four. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Impact on the System An excessive number of extended ECC NEs impacts NE performance.. Ltd. insert the board in the vacant slot. For details about each parameter. and then update the data on the NMS so that the board can work normally. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Name Parameters 1 to 5 Meaning The value is always 0x00.56 COM_EXTECC_FULL Description The COM_EXTECC_FULL is an alarm indicating an excessive number of TCP connections between automatically extended ECC NEs. ----End Related Information None. If a vacant slot is available. ----End Related Information None. select the alarm.. A.

This alarm is reported if the ODU detects that the specified parameters do not meet the requirements of the ODU. l 0x04: The ATPC threshold is set incorrectly. For details about each parameter.. l 0x03: The transmit power is set incorrectly. the transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in AM guaranteed capacity mode.3.) NOTE Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: The AM function is enabled on the radio link. Impact on the System When the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm occurs. 368 . Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates that the configuration data does not meet the requirements. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.parameterN. select the alarm. Ltd. l 0x06: The modulation mode is set incorrectly.. (This cause can be verified only when Parameter 1 is 0x03. If the equipment is configured with the 1+1 FD protection. l 0x02: The T/R spacing is set incorrectly. the active ODU generates the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to the following table.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x01: The frequency is set incorrectly. Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. the ODU fails to work normally.57 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT Description The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x05: The bandwidth is set incorrectly. the IF 1+1 protection switching may be triggered. In this case.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.

l The transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in AM guaranteed capacity mode If.. Then. Then...) 1. For details. Then. Check whether the parameters of the ODU interface meet the requirements of network planning.2.. The conditions are met and the transmit Perform a cold reset for the alarmed power needs to be changed ODU. If. Ltd. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 2 Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. Then. network planning The parameters do not meet the requirements of network planning Modify the IF interface parameters. The conditions are met but the transmit Change the parameters of ODU interfaces power does not need to be changed to recover the original value of transmit power.. If.. Determine the parameter that does not meet the requirement according to the alarm parameter. Then. Check whether the parameters of the IF interface meet the requirements of network planning.. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.. The parameters meet the requirements of Replace the IF board. The parameters meet the requirements of network planning The parameters do not meet the requirements of network planning 3.. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. 1. For details. Verify that the alarm is caused by incorrect change of AM parameters.. 369 . see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.. The alarm parameter takes a value from Perform the operation described in Step 0x01 to 0x03 1.3. If... Use the ODU of the proper model. Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: l The AM function is enabled on the radio link.... Modify the ODU interface parameters. (This cause can be verified only when Parameter 1 is 0x03.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements. handle the fault accordingly. For details. 2. The alarm parameter takes a value from Perform the operation described in Step 0x04 to 0x06 1.

Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None.3..59 DBMS_ERROR Description The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the processing of the system database. A. 370 . Procedure Step 1 Follow instructions in 7. Possible Causes l Cause 1: A database is deleted. ----End Related Information None A.58 DBMS_DELETE Description The DBMS_DELETE alarm indicates that a database is being deleted.4 Restoring the Database by NMS to restore the database. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Processing alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. This alarm is reported when a user runs a command to delete the database and the NE is in Deleting Database state. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None Impact on the System All data is lost if an NE is powered off or a system control board is cold reset within 48 hours.

6.60 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE Description The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protection mode. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.. 371 . The system configuration may be lost.. Switch and Timing Board. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters None. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. Impact on the System When the DBMS_ERROR alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None.. 1. Go to the next step. Reset the system control board. End the fault handling. it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing.10 Replacing the System Control. A. and certain system functions cannot work.3. If.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. As a result. 1. Then. The alarm is cleared after the board is reset The alarm persists after the board is reset Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands..

6. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about each parameter. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.61 DCNSIZE_OVER Description The DCNSIZE_OVER is an alarm indicating an over-sized DCN network. Switch and Timing Board. As a result. 372 . A. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Ltd. it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing and the system configuration may be lost.. Impact on the System l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Some NEs become unreachable to the NMS because DCN packets cannot be forwarded timely due to insufficient CPU resources. ----End Related Information None. 1. Possible Causes Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.parameterN. refer to the following table..10 Replacing the System Control. the failure indication is returned for some query and setting commands. Name Parameter 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.3. and some system functions are unavailable. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the size of the DCN network.. select the alarm. The DCN network is prone to route flapping and storms.

The solution is to divide the L2 DCN subnet. and NMS clients in a network segment) on an L2 DCN subnet is greater than 30. and NMS clients in a network segment) on an HWECC subnet is greater than 150. ----End Related Information The DCNSIZE_OVER alarm occurs when the number of nodes (NEs. NMS servers. Possible Causes l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty. This alarm occurs when DDN (digital data network) side fails to receive the basic frame alignment signal for framed E1 services. Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly. Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults. The DCNSIZE_OVER alarm occurs when the number of nodes (NEs. Procedure Step 1 Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Replan the DCN network based on actual networking conditions.3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold. 1. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 373 . Impact on the System E1 services on the alarmed board are unavailable. The solution is to divide the HWECC subnet.62 DDN_LFA Description The DDN_LFA is an alarm indicating loss of basic frame alignment for framed E1 services.. A. NMS servers.

1.. If the alarm persists. replace the board. a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. Step 2 Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly. Troubleshoot the interconnected user equipment. a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS). 1.63 DOWN_E1_AIS Description The DOWN_E1_AIS is an alarm of the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal. CAUTION If the service on the alarmed board is not protected. Set the E1 frame format of the local port to the same as that of the opposite port. 374 . If yes. Ltd. 3. ----End Related Information Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults. such as HARD_BAD. Impact on the System When the DOWN_E1_AIS alarm occurs. A. perform a cold reset on the alarmed board and check whether the DDN_LFA alarm is cleared. the E1 signal in the alarmed path is unavailable. This alarm occurs when the tributary board detects the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal of all 1s.3. 2. Check whether the alarmed board also reports any hardware alarms. 1.

... A. Parameter 3 Meaning 0x01.64 DROPRATIO_OVER Description The DROPRATIO_OVER alarm indicates that the number of lost packets crosses the threshold when queue congestion occurs at a port.3. check whether the alarm is cleared. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located. Then. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. This alarm is reported when the ratio of lost packets on an object under performance monitoring is higher than the expected ratio. ----End Related Information If EFP8 reports the alarm. Then.. Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm. Table A-6 Alarm Parameters of EFP8 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2.. Cause 2: On the local NE. The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. Indicates the number of the path. If... If. 1. 1. The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board on the local NE. or T_ALOS alarm The opposite NE does not report the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm Ensure that the board on the local NE is normal. The opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS Clear the alarm immediately. End the alarm handling. the alarm parameters have the meanings listed inTable A-6. the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and crossconnect board is faulty. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm. the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and cross-connect board is faulty. Check whether the opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm.. Ltd. 375 . indicates optical interface number.

A. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect. Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or committed information rate (CIR). Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect. ----End Related Information If packet loss is indicated in the receive direction. or Bandwidth Utilization.3. Ltd. packets may not be actually lost in the receive direction. Physical Bandwidth. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.65 E1_LOC Description The E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the uplink 2M clock is lost. Check and reconfigure services according to the network plan. If traffic is large. Impact on the System Service packet loss occurs. check whether a network storm has occurred. 376 . This alarm occurs when the tributary board fails to extract the clock from the E1 signal. and eliminate the source that illegally sends a large amount of data. follow instructions in Modifying the Port Policy to increase port bandwidth or expand the network.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction in which traffic crosses the threshold. l 0x01: Traffic crosses the threshold in the transmit direction. 2. check the method of handling red packets in the traffic classification configuration. 1. 8. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or CIR.20 Querying Traffic. If the method of handling red packets is non-discard.. If the port bandwidth is too low. l 0x00: Traffic crosses the threshold in the receive direction.

66 E1_LOS Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect. Ltd.. Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. If. End the alarm handling. Contact Huawei engineers.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. 1. the service is not affected.. Step 2 Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect. A.3.. Redo the cable. Replace the board where the line unit is located. Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform. 1.. 1. The fault is rectified. There is the external interference There is no external interference ----End Then. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. Impact on the System When the E1_LOC occurs. 1. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. Check whether any external interference causes the abnormal waveform of the E1 signal. Related Information None. Step 4 Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform. Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty. 377 ..

Check whether the cable is connected properly. Ltd. 1. 1. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. Impact on the System When the E1_LOS alarm occurs. Step 3 Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty. the E1 service is interrupted. Then. 378 . Connect the cable properly.. ----End Related Information None. If. Redo the cable.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The E1_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of the E1 signal. Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty... Replace the board where the tributary unit is located. This alarm occurs when the tributary board detects the uplink E1 signal of all 0s. 1.. The cable is not connected properly The cable is prepared incorrectly Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.

Replace the cabinet.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.. Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. check whether the alarm clears. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. 379 . Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.. 1. check whether the alarm clears. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Impact on the System The ambient humidity data of the PMU cannot be collected. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None... Then. 2.. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The ambient humidity sensor is faulty.3. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.. Go to Cause 3. Cause 4: The ambient humidity sensor is not installed. If. Ltd. 1.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The ambient humidity sensor is faulty. Then.67 ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL Description The ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the ambient humidity sensor of the cabinet fails. End the alarm handling... 2. Replace the ambient humidity sensor.

3. Cause 4: The ambient temperature sensor is not installed. 2. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.68 ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description The ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the ambient temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Impact on the System The ambient temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected. Replace the ambient temperature sensor.. Ltd. The alarm clears The alarm persists Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. ----End Related Information None. 2. Connect cables correctly... Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.. check whether the alarm clears. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The ambient temperature sensor is faulty. If. Then. Install the ambient humidity sensor. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The ambient temperature sensor is faulty.. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. 1. 380 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. 1. End the alarm handling. Replace damaged cables. . Go to Cause 2. Step 4 Cause 4: The ambient humidity sensor is not installed.

Step 4 Cause 4: The ambient temperature sensor is not installed. Possible Causes l l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.3. 381 . Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. A. check whether the alarm clears. 2. End the alarm handling. Then. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. Ltd. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Impact on the System Ambient temperature data 1 of the PMU cannot be collected.. 2. Replace the cabinet. Connect cables correctly. 1. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None.. ----End Related Information None. Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is not installed. If.. Replace damaged cables. Go to Cause 3.69 ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL Description The ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that ambient temperature sensor 1 of the cabinet fails. Install the ambient temperature sensor...

.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is faulty.. check whether the alarm clears. 2. Then. check whether the alarm clears. 1. End the alarm handling. Replace the cabinet... Then.. ----End Related Information None... If. Go to Cause 3. Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Ltd. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. A. Replace damaged cables.3. 382 .. 2. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1.. 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.70 ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL Description The ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that ambient temperature sensor 2 of the cabinet fails. 2. Replace ambient temperature sensor 1. If. 1. Install ambient temperature sensor 1. Connect cables correctly. Go to Cause 2. End the alarm handling. Step 4 Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is not installed.

1. Then. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Go to Cause 2. Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is not installed. A... Step 4 Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is not installed. Replace damaged cables.. Connect cables correctly. 383 . Then. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. End the alarm handling. Replace the cabinet. 1. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.71 ERPS_IN_PROTECTION Description ERPS_IN_PROTECTION indicates that EPRS ring is in protection mode. 2. check whether the alarm clears. ----End Related Information None.3. 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1.. Go to Cause 3. If.. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is faulty. check whether the alarm clears...OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System Ambient temperature data 2 of the PMU cannot be collected. Replace ambient temperature sensor 2. If. 2.. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is faulty. End the alarm handling. Ltd. 1.. Install ambient temperature sensor 2.

For details about each parameter.. 1.. l 0x01: east l 0x00: west Parameter 4 .parameterN. Possible Causes Cause 1: This alarm is reported when EPRS switching is triggered by a fault on the ERPS ring. Services (if any) on this node may be interrupted.. select the alarm. Rectify the fault. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment Alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.Parameter 2 ERPS ID. 384 . refer to the following table. Name Meaning Parameter 1 . indicating the MAC address of the faulty node. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. indicating whether the faulty node is in the east or west direction of the ERPS RPL-OWNER node. Ltd.Parameter 9 NODE ID. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. Locate the faulty node on the ERPS ring based on the alarm parameters. Parameter 3 DIR. 2. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: This alarm is reported when EPRS switching is triggered by a fault on the ERPS ring. Impact on the System At least one node on the ring is unreachable. Locate the ERPS blocked port on the faulty node.

Create a matching APS protection group on the opposite NE..72 ETH_APS_LOST Description The ETH_APS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost.. 1.. Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated. The APS protocol is deactivated at one end The APS protocol is activated at both ends Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. see Querying MPLS APS Status. Go to Cause 2. Activate the APS protocol at the end. Check whether the APS protocol is activated at both ends..3. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. . proceed to cause 4. 1. check whether the opposite NE is configured with the APS protection. If the alarm persists. Go to Cause 3. Then. 3. For details. Check whether the alarm clears. Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted. Step 2 Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated. and activate the APS protocol. 385 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the NMS. Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.. If.. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection.. If.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection The opposite NE is configured with the APS protection 2. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection. This alarm occurs when no APS frame is received from the protection channel. Go to the next step.. Ltd. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. the APS protection may fail..

Step 4 Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted. 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. If the alarm persists. 2. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.73 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH Description The ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. such as ETH_LOS. Ltd. ----End Related Information None. This alarm is reported when the working and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from those at the other end. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2. go to Cause 4. Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly. Check whether the alarm clears. clear the alarm immediately. A.. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. On the NMS. 1. Check whether the protection channel reports an alarm related to signal loss or signal degrade.3. If the settings differ between the two ends. Check whether the alarm clears. check whether the settings of the APS protection group are the same at the two ends. Then. change them to the same. 386 . service protection fails. If yes. If the alarm persists.

If the APS settings are different. Check whether the fiber or cable is correctly connected between the two ends.74 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL Description The ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm of a protection switching failure. If the alarm persists. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. This alarm is reported when the request signal in the transmitted Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the bridge signal in the received APS frame and this symptom lasts for 50 ms. service protection fails. connect the fiber or cable properly. 1. see Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group. 387 . Change the settings to the same. For details. go to Cause 2. Then. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Possible Causes Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. change the settings to the same.. deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. check whether the alarm clears. Then. see Querying MPLS APS Status. Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly. If not. 2. ----End Related Information None. A. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters None. Ltd. 1. 3.3. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. For details. Then. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1.

see Querying MPLS APS Status.3. For details. For details about each parameter. 1. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.75 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH Description The ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm of protection scheme mismatch. l 0x01: Indicates that the switching type is different. A. Cause 2: The switching direction is different. Cause 3: The revertive mode is different.parameterN. l 0x02: Indicates that the switching direction is different. l 0x03: Indicates that the revertive mode is different. This alarm is reported when the information in the received Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the APS settings at the local end..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None.. select the alarm.. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Change the settings of the APS protection group to the same at the two ends. Procedure Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. and therefore the service protection fails. deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. refer to the following table. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Ltd. 388 . The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The switching type is different. Then. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the specific difference. Impact on the System This alarm may cause the APS protection failure.

Name Parameters 1 to 4 (port) Meaning Indicate the ID of the port that reports the alarm. Parameter 7 (direction) Indicate the direction of the local MEP.76 ETH_CFM_AIS Description The ETH_CFM_AIS is an alarm indicating that an AIS packet is received by the local MEP. This alarm is reported when the system receives an AIS packet.3. 389 . For details about each parameter. provider indicates the supplier. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Parameters 5 and 6 (VLAN ID) Indicate the VLAN ID of the MEP. which indicates that the Ethernet server layer is faulty. Parameter 8 (level) Indicates the maintenance domain (MD) level of the local MEP.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.parameterN. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. and operator indicates the carrier.. select the alarm. A. refer to the following table. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the customer.

5 connectivity check (CC) periods successively. 390 . the service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted. In addition. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Name Parameter 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System l l When this alarm occurs. Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.77 ETH_CFM_LOC Description The ETH_CFM_LOC is an alarm indicating the loss of connectivity. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.parameterN. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 Troubleshoot the faulty Ethernet server layer.. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Parameter 3. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. refer to the following table. Parameter 2. Ltd. This alarm occurs when the system fails to receive the CCM packet from the remote MEP in 3. select the alarm. Possible Causes Cause 1: The upstream NE on which AIS is activated detects a fault at the Ethernet server layer. For details about each parameter. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.. the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection functions are disabled.3. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.. A. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.

391 . The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted. If.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 8 (Level) Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. Connect the physical links properly. The physical links are connected improperly The physical links are connected properly Then.. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. Parameter 10 (RMEPID) Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.. Check whether Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is configured correctly.. Impact on the System l l When the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm occurs.. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables and fibers) between the standard MEPs are connected properly. Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. Parameter 9. provider indicates the supplier. Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network. 1. and operator indicates the carrier. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted.. 1. Go to Cause 2. Ltd.

1. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. 392 . Check the utilization of bandwidth. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID.. Ltd. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Step 3 Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. If the bandwidth is exhausted.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP... Parameter 16 Parameter 17 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Related Information The Table A-7 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-7 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9. provider indicates the supplier. The service is configured incorrectly Modify the configuration of the service to ensure consistency at two ends. and operator indicates the carrier. Parameter 15. Then.. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. The service is configured correctly Go to Cause 3.

l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. Parameter 20 Meaning Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 19. these parameters are not supported. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. A.3. Parameter 2.. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet whose MA mismatches or whose priority is lower. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. select the alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Parameter 3. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. NOTE If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK. refer to the following table. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5.78 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE Description The ETH_CFM_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating an incorrect connection. Name Parameter 1. Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Ltd. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm..parameterN. 393 . For details about each parameter.

.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 8 (Level) Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. The names are consistent Go to Cause 2. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. provider indicates the supplier. Check whether the MD levels of the standard MEPs are the same.. If. Then. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent.. 394 . Step 2 Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. the service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and operator indicates the carrier. 1. 1... and the data flow may be routed incorrectly. Impact on the System When the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE alarm occurs. The levels are different Set the MD levels again to ensure consistency at both ends. Ltd. Check whether the names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are consistent. The names are inconsistent Set the other names of maintenance domain and maintenance alliance to ensure consistency at both ends... If. Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. Then.

Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.... parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Parameter 15. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. and operator indicates the carrier. Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. ----End Related Information The Table A-8 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. Table A-8 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9. Then. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. 1. 395 . Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. provider indicates the supplier. Ltd. Step 3 Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect. The levels are the same Go to Cause 3. Indicates the direction of the local MEP.. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Check the physical connection of the Ethernet service route and rectify the fault of the physical connection if any. Parameter 16 Parameter 17 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. select the alarm.79 ETH_CFM_RDI Description The ETH_CFM_RDI is an alarm indicating the CCM packet with RDI received from the remote MEP.3. Name Parameter 1. Parameter 3.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. provider indicates the supplier. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet with RDI from the remote maintenance end point (MEP). l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Parameter 9. refer to the following table. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. For details about each parameter. Ltd. Parameter 2. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5. Parameter 10 (RMEPID) Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. 396 . Indicates the direction of the local MEP. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.parameterN. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. and operator indicates the carrier.

or ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. Parameter 16 Parameter 17 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Parameter 15. 397 . Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. Check whether the remote MEP that is connected to the port reports the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System l l When the ETH_CFM_RDI alarm occurs. Possible Causes l Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID. Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI. Ltd. Table A-9 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9. 1. 2. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.. ----End Related Information The Table A-9 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane.

398 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. This alarm occurs when the system receives invalid CCM packets. A. Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5. Parameter 19... l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Name Parameter 1.parameterN. Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. these parameters are not supported. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.. NOTE If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK. provider indicates the supplier. For details about each parameter. . select the alarm. Parameter 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 18 Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.3. Parameter 2. refer to the following table.80 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI Description The ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI is an alarm indicating the errored frame. and operator indicates the carrier. Parameter 20 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Ltd.

. the connectivity check (CC) periods are different. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.. Impact on the System l l When the ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI alarm occurs. Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. If. If not. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the direction of the local MEP. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Check whether the IDs of the MEPs in the maintenance domain are in conflict. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 399 . l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received. provider indicates the supplier. the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable.. For example. the connectivity check (CC) periods are different. The CC periods are different Change the CC periods to ensure consistency at both ends. Check whether the remote MEP is configured. and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. Step 2 Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. 1. Check whether the CC periods set at the MEPs are the same. and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. and operator indicates the carrier. Ltd.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. The service may become abnormal due to the loop. 2. configure the remote MEP first.. 1. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. Then. For example. The CC periods are the same Go to the next step.

provider indicates the supplier. 1. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. The IDs are in conflict The IDs are not in conflict Then. parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. l 0x00: operator MEP level (low) l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x02: operator MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high) NOTE Consumer indicates the user. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. and operator indicates the carrier. Check whether any loop exists at each IP port of the service trail. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID. Table A-10 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9.. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Change the conflicting IDs. Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Step 3 Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. ----End Related Information The Table A-10 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. release the loop and clear the alarm. 400 . Go to Cause 3. Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port... Ltd. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. Parameter 16 Parameter 17 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If yes. Parameter 15..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.

parameterN. Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. This alarm occurs when the pointto-point OAM protocol negotiation fails at the Ethernet port. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Enable the point to point OAM protocol at the opposite end. Ltd. Check whether the physical port is faulty. Step 2 Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. l 0x01: The local link is faulty.. select the alarm. l 0x04: The OAM settings of the local end do not meet the requirements of the opposite end. For details about each parameter. 401 . 1. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. l 0x03: The OAM settings of the opposite end do not meet the requirements of the local end. the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted. Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. replace the board where the Ethernet port is located. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.81 ETH_EFM_DF Description The ETH_EFM_DF is an alarm indicating negotiation failure. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. refer to the following table.3. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Impact on the System When the ETH_EFM_DF alarm occurs. If yes. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x02: The local end fails to receive any OAM packets in a specified period.

In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about each parameter. Ltd. A. select the alarm. 402 . l 0x01: errored symbol period. Reconfigure the point to point OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends.3.. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the link event. Impact on the System When the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm occurs.parameterN. l 0x04: errored frame seconds summary. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.82 ETH_EFM_EVENT Description The ETH_EFM_EVENT is an alarm indicating the performance event reported on the opposite NE. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x03: errored frame period. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Possible Causes l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty. 1. l 0x02: errored frame.. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the link error indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite end. refer to the following table.

1. For details about each parameter. select the alarm. Possible Causes l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback. the service at the alarmed port is looped back. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Ltd.. This alarm occurs when the local end initiates a loopback or responds to a loopback request from the opposite end. replace the board where the Ethernet port is located. Rectify the fault of the equipment at the opposite end.. Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty. A. refer to the following table. Impact on the System When the ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK alarm occurs. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the state of the loopback. l 0x01: The local end initiates a loopback. l 0x02: The local end responds to a loop request from the opposite end.83 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK Description The ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK is an alarm indicating the loopback.parameterN. 403 . ----End Related Information None. Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback. If yes. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. 1.3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty. Check whether the physical port is faulty. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

According to the alarm parameter.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback.. it is determined that the opposite end initiates a loopback. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.3.84 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT Description The ETH_EFM_REMFAULT is an alarm indicating the fault on the opposite NE. l 0x01: link fault. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l 0x02: dying gasp. Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the fault type at the opposite end. According to the alarm parameter. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. A.parameterN. ----End Related Information None. Ltd. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. select the alarm. it is determined that the local end initiates a loopback. Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the local end and release the loopback as soon as possible. the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the fault indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite end. Impact on the System When the ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm occurs.. Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the opposite port and release the loopback as soon as possible. 1. l 0x03: critical event. 404 . 1. For details about each parameter.. refer to the following table.

and the alarm is cleared. ----End Related Information None. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Cause 3: The local NE is faulty. the service at the alarmed port is interrupted. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.85 ETH_LOS Description The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of Ethernet port connection. Impact on the System When the ETH_LOS alarm occurs.. Check whether the opposite NE is reset frequently. If... Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset..3. The opposite NE is not reset frequently Reset the opposite NE.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A. Possible Causes l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset. The opposite NE is reset frequently Then. Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty. 405 .

1. 2. Check whether any fault occurs on the alarmed port. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference l Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty. Replace the alarmed board on the local. Check the network cable or fiber jumper connected to the alarmed port. The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal Step 4 Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty. A. The network cable is loose or damaged Then. The transmit port and receive port work Go to Cause 2. Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper.. in the same mode Step 2 Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty..3. If. Check whether any fault occurs on the equipment interconnected with the alarmed port.. 406 .. 1. Then. Check whether the transmit port and receive port work in the same mode.. Go to Cause 4.. Go to Cause 3.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Then. Connect the network cable properly or replace the damaged network cable. If. Rectify the fault.. This alarm is reported when an enabled Ethernet port is in link up state but has no flow. ----End Related Information None. The transmit port and receive port work Correctly set the working modes of the in different modes transmit port and receive port. The connector or fiber is damaged The connection is normal Step 3 Cause 3: The local NE is faulty.. Ltd. If.86 ETH_NO_FLOW Description The ETH_NO_FLOW is an alarm indicating that the Ethernet port has no flow... 1.. 1. The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean the connector.

select the alarm. Ltd. Parameter 4 Indicates the direction in which the flow is unavailable. 407 . l 0x00: Rx direction.. Cause 3: The port is enabled and in link up state. Parameter 2. Step 3 Cause 2: No services are available. For details about each parameter. refer to the following table. Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the MAC port number. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is always 0x00. alarmed board. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the value is always 0x01. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 2 Cause 1: No services are configured. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The port is enabled and in link up state. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x01: Tx direction. Configure the Ethernet service. and cause according to the parameters. Procedure Step 1 Determine the MAC port number. 1.parameterN. but does not receive any packet due to the service fault at the remote end. Cause 2: The port is enabled and in link up state.. but does not transmit any packet due to the service fault at the local end. it indicates that the alarmed port has no flow. but is configured with no service.

7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board. Procedure Step 1 Cause: The board is faulty. Check whether the service is normal at the local end. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.87 ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL Description The ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL is an alarm indicating a power outputting failure of an Ethernet port.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.3. A.. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Check whether the service is normal at the remote end. ----End Related Information None. This alarm is reported when an Ethernet port is enabled with the PE function but outputs no power.. Possible Causes l Cause: The board is faulty.. 408 .. No services are available in the transmit direction No services are available in the receive direction ----End Then.. Related Information None. 6. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Ltd. the NE that is connected to the Ethernet port outputs no power. 1.

Parameter 4 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails. This alarm occurs when the OAM function is enabled at a port of a board and the negotiation between the port and the opposite equipment fails. Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. l 0x01: A fault occurs at the local receive link. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. refer to the following table.3ah is unavailable.3. Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. l 0x04: The OAM configuration of the opposite end does not meet the requirements of the local end..88 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL Description The ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL alarm indicates a discovery failure when the point-to-point ETH-OAM function is enabled. l 0x05: The OAM configuration of the local end does not meet the requirements of the opposite end. Parameter 2. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.. Ltd. l 0x03: The OAM packets from the opposite end are not received. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l 0x06-0xff: other unknown reasons. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. 409 . l 0x02: The local end fails to transmit OAM packets. For details about each parameter.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. Possible Causes l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Impact on the System The OAM function based on IEEE 802.parameterN. select the alarm.

For details. see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function. Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. refer to the following table. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. replace the alarmed board.3. Enable the P2P OAM protocol at the opposite end.parameterN.. A. 410 . For details. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Step 2 Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. 1. Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01... In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. ----End Related Information None. Ltd. select the alarm. see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Reconfigure the P2P OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends.89 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT Description The ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet OAM detects a critical fault at the remote end. 1. For details about each parameter. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives the OAM packets that contain critical fault information from the opposite end. Parameter 2. If yes.

1.. 411 . Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP. l 0x01: A link fault occurs at the port of the opposite end. Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP.3. Go to Cause 2. Then. This alarm occurs when the local equipment Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l 0x03-0xff: other faults. If. Go to Cause 3.. Step 3 Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. Go to Cause 1... 1. the services on the link may be interrupted.90 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP Description The ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP is an alarm indicating that a remote loopback is initiated when the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. Handle the ETH_LOS alarm at the remote port. and recover the power supply to the remote MEP.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the type of the fault. Step 4 Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. l 0x02: Irrecoverable problems such as the power failure occur at the opposite end. Contact Huawei technical support engineers. Handle the problems such as power failure at the remote MEP.. Step 2 Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 Determine the fault type according to Parameter 4. The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Parameter 4 is a value from 0x03 to 0xff. 1. Ltd. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. A.

. l 0x02: The loopback is responded. Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command. 412 . In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Impact on the System The services are looped back between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. For details about each parameter... Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Go to Cause 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.parameterN. Ltd.. The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Then. If.. select the alarm. 1. Step 2 Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. Go to Cause 2. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x01: The loopback is initiated... refer to the following table. The values are always 0x00 0x01. The services and other protocol packets are interrupted. Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference initiates a remote loopback or responds to the remote loopback initiated by the opposite equipment. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Determine the causes of the loopback at the local end and release the loopback. Procedure Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameters.

A. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. l 0x01: errored frame event l 0x02: errored frame period event l 0x03: errored frame second event Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Related Information None. For details about each parameter. Ltd.. the performance of services degrades.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 3 Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command.3. refer to the following table. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. 1. select the alarm.91 ETHOAM_RMT_SD Description The ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm indicates that the point-to-point Ethernet-OAM detects the degradation of remote Ethernet performance. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives link event notification packets from the opposite end. Determine the causes of the loopback at the opposite end and release the loopback.. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. 413 . Possible Causes l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Indicates the type of the received link event.parameterN.

Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates. Then... Check whether the link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate. Step 3 Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates. Go to Cause 3. Disable the link event notification function at the opposite end. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. This alarm occurs when the MAC port of a board receives the OAM protocol packet sent by the port itself or the board after the loop detection function is enabled.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environmental alarms Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 1. Set the thresholds to appropriate values. A. Improve the link performance at the opposite end so that the opposite end does not send any link event notification packet to the local end. select the alarm.. 1.92 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP Description The ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP is an alarm indicating the loopback of the MAC port that runs the point-to-point OAM protocol. ----End Related Information None.. Go to Cause 2..3. the alarm at the local end is cleared automatically. 1. If not If yes Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference l l Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. If.. If. Ltd.. The alarm parameters are in the Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether the link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. 414 . If yes If not Then..

Go to Cause 1. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped. refer to the following table. Step 2 Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2... to release the selfloop. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the selfloop is released... l 0x02: selfloop of the board. Go to Cause 2. Manually release the PHY/MAC loopback (or wait five minutes for the automatic release by the NE if the automatic loopback release function is enabled on the NE). Release the loopback on the LAN.. If. The cable connected to the port is selflooped The port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback Step 3 Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. If. or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port.. The value of Parameter 1 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 1 is 0x02 Then. For details about each parameter. Procedure Step 1 Determine the loopback type according to Parameter 1.. and then handle the loopback accordingly. 1.parameterN. Impact on the System When the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm occurs. Check whether two ports of the board are connected through cables or whether two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. Then. or the port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback. l 0x01: selfloop of the port. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the loopback type. or break the connection between the port and the LAN.. Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. The PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port Then. a network storm may occur due to the loopback. Connect the cable properly to release the selfloop.. or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. or the port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback... 415 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) .

l 0x03-0xff: unknown types. Disconnect the cables to release the selfloop. select the alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l 0x01: The port is self-looped. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...3. This alarm occurs when the loopback detection function is enabled and the VCTRUNK port receives the OAM protocol packets transmitted by the port itself or the board where the VCTRUNK port resides..93 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP Description The ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP alarm indicates that a VCTRUNK port is looped back when the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. Impact on the System If the function of automatic shutdown in the case of a selfloop is enabled at the alarmed port.. A..parameterN. 416 . Otherwise.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. The two ports are connected through cables Then.. ----End Related Information None. refer to the following table.. For details about each parameter. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the loopback type. the services at the alarmed port are interrupted. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x02: The board is self-looped. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. The two ports are connected to the same Break the connection between a port and the network LAN to release the selfloop. Ltd. a network storm may occur.

The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: A loopback occurs on the lines connected to one VCTRUNK. The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is self-looped. Cause 2: The lines connected to two VCTRUNKs on the same board are interconnected. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to the following table.. Ltd. For details about each parameter. Step 3 Cause 2: The board is self-looped.. A. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK port and ensure that the port is not selflooped. ----End Related Information None.94 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS Description The EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of periodic connectivity check (CC) packets. If. 2.. 417 . Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK ports and ensure that the lines connected to any two VCTRUNK ports on the same board are not interconnected. select the alarm.3. 1. Go to Cause 2. Procedure Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameters. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. Release the loopback at the port. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm... Go to Cause 1. 1.parameterN.5 transmission periods of CC packets at the source MEP). This alarm occurs when the sink MEP fails to receive CC packets from the same source MEP in a period (3..

Parameter 9 is 0x00. If not If yes Then. Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Impact on the System A unidirectional connectivity failure occurs in the Ethernet service between two MEPs. Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. Parameter 11. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.. Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links. Indicates the ID of the local MEP.. Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.. Go to Cause 3. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. Go to Cause 2.. Step 3 Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables or optical fibers) that carry services between the two MEPs are correctly connected. If. 1. Parameter 10 Meaning Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 to Parameter 17 Parameter 18 . Parameter 9 is 0x80. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 418 . If not If yes Then.. Check whether the Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are configured correctly.. Indicates the ID of the local MEP.Parameter 21 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Ltd. 1. l VCTRUNK number. Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Modify the configuration to ensure consistency at both ends. Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. l PORT number.. If.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9..

419 . refer to the following table. Parameter 6 Meaning Indicates the ID of the local MEP. Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 to Parameter 13 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact on the System MPIDs must be unique on a network.95 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT Description The EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT is an alarm indicating the conflict of MPIDs.parameterN. Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. l VCTRUNK number. Check the bandwidth utilization. This alarm occurs when two MEPs in one MD have the same maintenance point identity (MPID) and one MEP receives the packets from the other MEP.3. Ltd. Parameter 7. If the bandwidth is exhausted. Parameter 9 is 0x00... Parameter 9 is 0x80. increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5. select the alarm. Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. When this alarm occurs. For details about each parameter. l PORT number. A. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. the LB and LT functions are abnormal and OAM packets are received incorrectly. ----End Related Information None.

If another valid clock source of higher priority and good quality is configured in the clock source priority list. ----End Related Information None. if only the external clock source and internal clock source are configured in the clock source priority list. however. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. Delete the incorrect MEPs and create MEPs with unique MP IDs. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. select the alarm. 420 l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the associated MP ID according to the alarm parameters.parameterN.. the clock protection switching occurs. A.. 2. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.96 EXT_SYNC_LOS Description The EXT_SYNC_LOS is an alarm of the loss of the external clock source. The system works in 24-hour holdover mode instead of permanent holdover mode. refer to the following table. For details about each parameter.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The system saves 24-hour holdover data. Query the information about the MEP. 1. Ltd. Name Parameter 1 Meaning l 0x01: the first external clock source l 0x02: the second external clock source Impact on the System l When the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm occurs.. the NE traces the internal clock source after the external clock source is lost and enters the free-run state 24 hours later.

. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. ----End Related Information None. The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal 2. For details about each parameter. If... Check whether the cable that connects the external clock source is normal. Replace the cable. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2..... Rectify the fault.parameterN... Go to the next step. If. A.. refer to the following table. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list. but the external clock source cannot be detected or become invalid. but the external clock source cannot be detected or become invalid. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list.3. select the alarm. Replace the alarmed board. Ltd. Check whether the equipment that provides the external clock source is faulty. 1. The cable is abnormal The cable is normal Then. Then.97 EXT_TIME_LOC Description The EXT_TIME_LOC is an alarm of the loss of the external time source. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 421 .

For details about each parameter.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. ----End Related Information None. or degraded second pulse l 0x03: CRC errors in TOD information Impact on the System The time of a local NE cannot be synchronized to the external time device to which the NE's enabled external time port is connected. A.. Cause 2: The external time device is faulty.3. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The link at a port is faulty. 1.98 FAN_AGING Description The FAN_AGING is an alarm of the aged fan. Ltd. or unavailable second pulse. Check whether the external time device is faulty.. connect the cables again. If cables are incorrectly connected. refer to the following table. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 1 l 0x01: link failure on a port l 0x02: unchanged second value in time of day (TOD) information. This alarm occurs when the fan rotates at a speed lower than eighty percent of the nominal speed. Check cable connections. 422 . select the alarm. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The link at a port is faulty.parameterN. 1. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Step 2 Cause 2: The external time device is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

refer to the following table. Impact on the System When the FAN_FAIL alarm occurs... Possible Causes Cause 1: The fan is aged.parameterN. Ltd. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Replace the fan. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the temperature of the NE is too high and impacts the long-term operation of the NE. A. the heat dissipation of the system is affected. select the alarm. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. For details about each parameter. 423 . The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.3.99 FAN_FAIL Description The FAN_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the fan is faulty. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the number of the fan. 1. ----End Related Information None.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The fan is aged.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the number of the alarmed fan.

Replace the alarmed fan board. clear it immediately. Then. A.. services may be interrupted or equipment may be damaged. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference After an alarm is reported.. ----End Related Information None. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Communication alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. perform the following operations: l l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 96 hours if the ambient temperature ranges from 0°C to 40°C .. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Step 2 Cause 2: Fan failure occurs. When multiple fans are faulty.. 424 .100 FCS_ERR Description The FCS_ERR is an alarm indicating the errors of frame check sequence (FCS). This alarm occurs when a board detects FCS errors in the received frames. replace them immediately. Clean the dust on the fan and reinsert the fan board. Go to Cause 2. Otherwise.3. The fault is rectified. Ltd. Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 24 hours if the ambient temperature is higher than 40°C .. 1. Remove the fan board. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 2: Fan failure occurs. If. When a fan is faulty. End the alarm handling.

Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Go to the next step.parameterN. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The parameters are inconsistent The parameters are consistent Then. Go to the next step. Check whether the encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services.. Correct the configuration data.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. For details about each parameter. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. 425 . The protocols are inconsistent The protocols are consistent 2. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. Indicate the VCTRUNK number where the alarm occurs.. Correct the configuration data. Step 2 Cause 2: Service channels have errors. Ltd. refer to the following table. 1.. the services may have errors and even become interrupted.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.. Impact on the System When the FCS_ERR alarm occurs.. if the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of Ethernet services. Check whether any error alarm or performance event occurs on the board that carries the services.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services. Then. Cause 2: Service channels have errors. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of services. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of services... If. If.. select the alarm.

The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. A.parameterN. 1... Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.... the extra data may be discarded .3. Replace the alarmed board. Handle the alarm or performance event. Go to the next step. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. refer to the following table.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 426 . Yes No Then. Possible Causes l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The traffic threshold is very low.. For details about each parameter. select the alarm. Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the receive or transmit direction in which traffic crosses the specified threshold. ----End Related Information None. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x00: the receive direction l 0x01: the transmit direction Impact on the System When the FLOW_OVER alarm occurs.101 FLOW_OVER Description The FLOW_OVER is an alarm indicating that the data flow received exceeds the threshold. Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow. Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The traffic threshold is very low. 427 .102 HARD_BAD Description The HARD_BAD is an alarm indicating hardware errors.. Impact on the System The alarmed board fails to work. A. refer to the following table. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. select the alarm.. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 3 Meaning Indicate the internal faults detected by the board. Cause 3: The slot is faulty. Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.3. If the board is configured with the 1+1 protection. Possible Causes l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. Configure the QoS policies at the opposite end to reduce the data flow that the opposite end transmits. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Ltd. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. ----End Related Information None. 1. Increase the traffic threshold to a value that is lower than the rate of the local threshold. For details about each parameter. protection switching may be triggered. 1.parameterN.

1. A. Remove the board. Ltd. Then. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details. If a vacant slot is available. insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again. TIP Then. The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. and then check whether the alarm is cleared.. Generally. and use a torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin. The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Step 3 Cause 3: The slot is faulty. see 6 Part Replacement. Check for the faults in slots.. the board can work normally. this alarm is reported.. If. Check for the faults in boards. ----End Related Information None. 428 .. A function is configured on the device and a command is issued by the system to enable the function on a board..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly.. The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. The fault is rectified. see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot... If the board hardware does not support this function. Then.3. Then. 2. check whether the alarm is cleared.2 Inserting a Board. Replace the alarmed board. 1.. If. End the alarm handling. 1.103 HARD_NONSUPPORT Description The HARD_NONSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that a certain function is not supported by a board. For details.

The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. A. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. For details about each parameter..parameterN. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system..5 Gbit/s bus rate Impact on the System The function is unavailable if this alarm is reported. refer to the following table. Procedure Step 1 Replace the board with a new one that supports the function. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates functions that are not supported by a board.104 HP_CROSSTR Description The HP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path error crosses the threshold. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 429 .3. ----End Related Information None. l 0x01: ETH PWE3 control word l 0x02: 2. select the alarm. Possible Causes Cause: The board does not support the function even though it is configured on the device.

a large number of errors occur in the service. Possible Causes Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.. see 8.. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2.3. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. and the service may be interrupted. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. refer to the following table.. For details about each parameter.parameterN. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. For details.12 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. 430 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . l 0x30: HPBBE l 0x31: HPES l 0x32: HPSES l 0x33: HPFEBBE l 0x34: HPFEES l 0x35: HPFESES l 0x36: HPUAS l 0x37: HPCSES l 0x38: HPFECSES l 0x4c: HPFEUAS Impact on the System When the HP_CROSSTR alarm occurs. 1. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select the alarm.

Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event. The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified.3. and timing board on the opposite NE. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. 1. protection switching may be triggered. ----End Related Information None. check whether the alarm is cleared. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Replace the alarmed board. If. If the services are configured with protection. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 431 . This alarm occurs when the board detects that byte H4 is inconsistent with the expected multiframe sequence. Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. Ltd. cross-connect. the service on the alarmed path is interrupted. Impact on the System When the HP_LOM alarm occurs.105 HP_LOM Description The HP_LOM is an alarm indicating the loss of the higher order path multiframe.. 1. Then. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. End the alarm handling. A. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2.. The alarm persists Replace the system control.. Then..

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. Ltd. A. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure. however. A.106 HP_RDI Description The HP_RDI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote receive failure.. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 5 of byte G1 is 1. The service received by the opposite NE. ----End Related Information None. the service on the local NE is not affected.3.3. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Impact on the System When the HP_RDI alarm occurs. 432 . 1. Clear the alarms such as HP_LOM and B3_EXC that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE.107 HP_REI Description The HP_REI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote error. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bits 1-4 of G1 take a value from 1 to 8. is interrupted.

The service received by the opposite station.108 HP_SLM Description The HP_SLM is an alarm indicating the lower order path label mismatch. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 433 . ----End Related Information None.. Impact on the System The service on the local site is not affected. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. 1. however.3. A. Handle the HP_BBE performance event that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE. This alarm occurs when the board detects the C2 byte mismatch. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote errors. has errors. Ltd.

----End Related Information None. For details. Ltd.109 HP_TIM Description The HP_TIM is an alarm indicating the higher order path trace identifier mismatch. For details. Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.. the protection switching is triggered. A. 1. Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. This alarm occurs when the board detects the J1 byte mismatch. Impact on the System If the service is configured with the protection that considers the HP_TIM alarm as a trigger condition. 1. see Creating CrossConnections of SNCP Services. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted by the remote NE. Configure the same service type at the source and sink of the AU-4 path. see Configuring Overhead Bytes. configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted by the remote NE.3. 434 . If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System None.

see Creating CrossConnections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment.110 HP_UNEQ Description The HP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating the unequipped higher order path. End the alarm is changed handling. Ltd. For details. A.... This alarm occurs when the board detects that the C2 byte is 0. Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Communication alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If. Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted on the opposite NE. reconfigure the cross-connections.3. Check whether the cross-connections are configured correctly at the intermediate nodes where the service travels. If not. see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services. The alarm is cleared after the configuration The fault is rectified. ----End Related Information None. 435 . see Configuring VC-4 POHs. 1..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted on the opposite NE. 1. Go to the next step. For details. The alarm persists after the configuration is changed 2.. configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. Then. Disable the receivable J1 byte on the local NE or set the receivable J1 byte on the local NE to the same as the transmitted J1 byte on the opposite NE. For details.

For details.parameterN. see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services. Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE. select the alarm. see Configuring VC-4 POHs. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services. Impact on the System When the HP_UNEQ alarm occurs.. refer to the following table. the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is unavailable. the protection switching is triggered. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services. 1. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Ltd. A. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None. 436 . Configure line services on the opposite NE.111 HPAD_CROSSTR Description The HPAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path adaptation performance crosses the threshold. Step 2 Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE. If the service is configured with the protection that considers the alarm as a trigger condition. For details about each parameter. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.3. Change the setting of byte C2. but the corresponding line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services.. For details. but the corresponding line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services.. 1.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. bit errors may occur in the service. l 0xaa: TUPJCHIGH l 0xab: TUPJCLOW l 0xac: TUPJCNEW Impact on the System When the HPAD_CROSSTR alarm occurs. see 8. 437 . Ltd. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event of TU pointer justification that crosses the preset threshold. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold. 2.. ----End Related Information None.12 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2.112 IF_CABLE_OPEN Description The IF_CABLE_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the IF cable is open. For details. A. Possible Causes Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.3. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.3.

the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. Ltd.. the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted. The connector is loose Then... Step 2 Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged. Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged.. you must turn off the ODU before the operation. 1.. Step 3 Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty. Go to the next step. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board. A. Replace the alarmed IF board. The cable does not meet the requirement The cable meets the requirement Then. Replace the ODU connected to the alarmed IF port. Connect the connector tightly. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. If. 438 . 1. Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty.. None of the above 2. and ODU. You can turn on the ODU only after the operation is complete. Replace the cable with a qualified one.. 1.3. and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System When the IF_CABLE_OPEN alarm occurs. Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is made properly. IF port.. NOTE When rectifying the faults of the IF cable.113 IF_INPWR_ABN Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged. If. The connector is made improperly See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3..

. If. Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. 1. the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. the services on the ODU are interrupted. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. Step 2 Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty. For details about each parameter. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 1. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. Replace the IF board connected to the alarmed ODU. Ltd. Connect the connector tightly.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The IF_INPWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal.. l 0x02: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too low. Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty.. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board.parameterN. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The IF board is faulty.. Name Parameter 1 Meaning l 0x01: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too high.. If 1+1 protection is configured. select the alarm. 439 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. this alarm also triggers 1+1 HSB switching. . Any of the connectors is loose Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. refer to the following table. Check whether the connectors of the IF cable are loose or prepared incorrectly. and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The IF board is faulty.

Go to the next step. This alarm occurs if the board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode. Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. select the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Replace the IF cable.. Step 4 Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly. 440 . A. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 2..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. and test the connectivity between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable.parameterN. see Testing the Connectivity of the IF Cable. For details. 1. ----End Related Information The logical slot ID of the ODU is obtained by adding 20 to the slot ID of the IF board connected to the ODU. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. Any of the connectors is prepared incorrectly All connectors are normal Then.. The IF cable is below standard The IF cable is up to standard Then. Connect the IF fiber jumper and the IF board correctly. Replace the alarmed ODU. Ltd... See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable. 1. For details about each parameter.114 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED Description The IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED is an alarm indicating that the configured IF working mode is not supported. Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged or deformed... refer to the following table... The IF board or ODU may be faulty. If.3. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.

Impact on the System When the IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED alarm occurs. 441 .. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the FPGA file that is loaded to the board. or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged. 1. Related Information None. or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged. l 0x02 indicates that FPGA file 002 is loaded. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None.3. Ltd. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Possible Causes Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode. Procedure l Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode. the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted.115 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN Description The IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the local end fails. all links of the alarmed IMA group are unavailable. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the local NE or when the activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Contact Huawei engineers to upgrade the software and the FPGA file. l 0x01 indicates that FPGA file 250 is loaded.

clear this alarm. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the remote NE or when the activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number. A. 442 . Activate the links of the IMA group on the local NE...OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty.116 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN Description The IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the remote end fails. the ports of the IMA group are congested and services have bit errors. Then. When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If.3.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty. 2.. ----End Related Information None. 1. Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.. The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. If the alarm persists. the alarm clears automatically. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the local NE. configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board. Ltd. If yes.

If yes. The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately. the alarm clears automatically. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. Ltd.. When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number. Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port.. 2. No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the remote NE.. Then. configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board. If the alarm persists. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.. A. ----End Related Information None. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty. 1.117 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH Description The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends. Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number. Activate the links of the IMA group on the opposite NE. If. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty.. clear this alarm. 443 .

118 IN_PWR_ABN Description The IN_PWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is abnormal. all transmit clocks of the links in an IMA group are from the same clock source. 444 . Ltd. ----End Related Information The Clock Mode parameter can be set to two modes. In CTC mode. l l CTC mode: Common transmit clock mode. the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors and even becomes unavailable. check whether the alarm is cleared. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the transmit clocks of the links in an IMA group are from different clock sources. Impact on the System When the IN_PWR_ABN alarm occurs.3. A. Possible Causes Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends. and ATM trunk related to the alarm. In ITC mode. the ITC mode is recommended. ITC mode: Independent transmit clock mode. Possible Causes l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends. board. Modify the Clock Mode parameter of the alarmed ATM trunk to the same value as that of the opposite end. Check the alarm information and determine the NE. When the IMA group is set to the line clock mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH alarm may cause loss of ATM cells. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Then.. 1. 2.

Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power. If.. ----End Related Information The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the IN_PWR_ABN alarm reported by the EMS6. If. Replace the optical module.. and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. 445 . and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. the requirement The transmit optical power is over high Add a proper attenuator to reduce the receive optical power. The connector or fiber is damaged Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper.. and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. 1. If yes.. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.. Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. The transmit optical power does not meet Replace the optical module... Go to Cause 3.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the port number.. The models are incorrect The models are correct Then. Browse current performance events.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference l l l Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.. If. Then.. 1. Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 1.. Then. The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean fiber connectors. Ltd. contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module. Query the board manufacturing information report.. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 2.119 IN_PWR_HIGH Description The IN_PWR_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over high. Parameter 5 A. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The transmit optical power meets the requirement Add a proper attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.. Ltd. Then. The values are always 0xFF. Parameter 3 Meaning The value of Parameter 2 is always 0x00.. Impact on the System When the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm occurs.. and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE.3. the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. Browse current performance events. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite site is over high. The transmit optical power does not meet Contact Huawei engineers to replace the the requirement optical module. If. The two parameters indicate the path ID. Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Reserved.. Parameter 4. and the value of Parameter 3 is always 0x01.. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 446 . 1. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None.

447 . Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.. The models are incorrect The models are correct Then. contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module. Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. SDH Interface Performance.. If yes. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.120 IN_PWR_LOW Description The IN_PWR_LOW is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over low.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low. A. Go to Cause 3.. Query the board manufacturing information report. Ltd. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. ----End Related Information The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm is lower than the overload point. If. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. Impact on the System When the IN_PWR_LOW alarm occurs.. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low..3. and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors. 1.

If. Then. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power... If. The models are incorrect The models are correct Then. Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.. The receive optical power does not meet the Go to Cause 4. 1. Related Information The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_LOW alarm is higher than the sensitivity point. and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. Browse current performance events.. and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. Ltd.. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty... SDH Interface Performance.... The transmit optical power does not meet Contact Huawei engineers to replace the the requirement optical module. Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.. Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect... 1. End the alarm handling. 1. The transmit optical power meets the requirement Go to Cause 2. 448 . requirement Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.... The receive optical power meets the requirement Then. The fault is rectified. Query the board manufacturing information report. The alarm is cleared after the connector is cleaned The alarm persists after the connector is cleaned ----End Clean fiber connectors and adapters. Replace the fiber. If. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement.. Then. Go to Cause 3. If.

Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.121 INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL Description The INTEMP_SENSOR_FAILL is an alarm indicating that the air inlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty... 2. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. End the alarm handling. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Replace the air inlet temperature sensor. 1.. Impact on the System The air inlet temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected. Then. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. End the alarm handling.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The air inlet temperature sensor is faulty. Go to Cause 2. 449 . If.. Then. Cause 4: The air inlet temperature sensor is not installed...3. check whether the alarm clears. If.. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. check whether the alarm clears. Go to Cause 3. 1. Ltd. Replace the cabinet.. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The air inlet temperature sensor is faulty..

Ltd. Disable the receivable J0 byte on the local NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. 1. see Configuring RSOHs. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.122 J0_MM Description The J0_MM is an alarm indicating the trace identifier mismatch. Possible Causes Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on the opposite NE. This alarm occurs when the board detects the J0 byte mismatch. Step 4 Cause 4: The air inlet temperature sensor is not installed. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Install the air inlet temperature sensor. Impact on the System None.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on the opposite NE. ----End Related Information None. A. 450 . ----End Related Information None. For details. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 2.3. 1.

For details about each parameter. Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dualended switching separately. select the alarm. the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.. Name Meaning l 0x01: linear MS protection. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dualended switching separately. refer to the following table. Impact on the System When the K1_K2_M alarm occurs. Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect.parameterN. Ltd. 451 . Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x02: ring MS protection.3..123 K1_K2_M Description The K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating the K1/K2 byte mismatch. 1. For example.. This alarm occurs when the board detects inconsistent channel numbers that the transmitted K1 byte (bits 5-8) and the received K2 byte (bits 1-4) indicate. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Check whether the switching modes at both ends are the same.

If.. Go to Cause 2.parameterN. Ltd. For example. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 1. The fiber connection is incorrect The connection is correct Then.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. The fault is rectified.. the fiber at the receive or transmit port may be incorrectly connected. select the alarm. Replace the alarmed board. Related Information None.. The switching modes are different The switching modes are the same Step 2 Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect.. If. Go to Cause 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If... check whether the alarm is cleared.. Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...124 K2_M Description The K2_M is an alarm indicating the K2 byte mismatch.3. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then. or disconnected. 452 .. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Then. Connect the fiber properly.. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. End the alarm handling. For details about each parameter.. 1. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the protection mode indicated by the received K2 (bit 5) is different from the protection mode of the NE.. Then. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. Configure the switching modes as the same. A. refer to the following table.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning l 0x01: linear MS protection. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. The protocol is running Go to Cause 3. see Starting/Stopping the Linear MSP Protocol. the fiber at the receive or transmit port may be incorrectly connected. If. the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail. For details. The protection modes are different The protection modes are the same Then. 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1. Go to Cause 2. If. 1. Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type. Step 2 Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs... Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. and check whether two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N). For example. Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect.. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect. . Query the status of the linear MSP.. 1.. For example... and check whether the MSP protocol is stopped on the opposite NE. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N).. Connect the fiber properly 453 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Configure the protection modes as the same. or disconnected. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1 +1 or 1:N). Then. l 0x02: ring MS protection. The protocol is stopped Restart the MSP protocol on the opposite NE. 1... Query the status of the linear MSP. Ltd. Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs.. The connection is incorrect Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then. Impact on the System When the K2_M alarm occurs.. If. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

2.. If the license capacities of the ports differ from each other. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Query the license capacities of the ports of the LAG group by using the NMS. A.. End the alarm handling. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: In the LAG group. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then. Go to Cause 4. The fault is rectified.. Possible Causes Cause 1: In the LAG group. If.. 454 . the license capacities of the ports differ from each other. The connection is correct Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.. Impact on the System For a LAG group in load-sharing mode.3.. Ltd. 1. Then. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. 1. check whether the alarm is cleared.. Then. data services may be lost. Replace the alarmed board. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.. reload a license file of an appropriate capacity. the license capacities of the ports differ from each other.125 LAG_BWMM Description LAG_BWMM is an alarm indicating the bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group.

----End Related Information None. A.3.126 LAG_DOWN Description The LAG_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. A. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: All the member ports of the LAG are invalid for the same causes as the LAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm. the service at the member port of the LAG is interrupted. Rectify the fault at each member port according to the description of LAG_MEMBER_DOWN.127 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN Description The LAG_MEMBER_DOWN is an alarm indicating that a member port of a link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. Impact on the System When the LAG_DOWN alarm occurs. 1. Possible Causes Cause 1: All the member ports of the aggregation group are invalid for the same causes as the LAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None.. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter.3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This alarm occurs when the LAG does not have activated members. Ltd. 455 . This alarm occurs when a member port of an LAG can neither be activated nor function as a protection port. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None.

select the alarm. Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed subboard. The value is always 0xff.parameterN. refer to the following table. Parameter 5 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Parameter 4. l 0x02: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. If.. Parameter 6 Indicates the cause that makes the port unavailable.. The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then.. Perform the operations described in step Step 4.. l 0x03: The port works in half-duplex mode. Procedure Step 1 Determine the alarmed port and the cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters.. Perform the operations described in step Step 2. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled. For details about each parameter. Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets. Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode. l 0x01: The port link is faulty or disabled. Cause 4: The port is self-looped. Parameter 2 Indicates the slot ID of the alarmed board. Perform the operations described in step Step 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. and the port does not transmit or receive any services.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. . 456 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Perform the operations described in step Step 3. Name Meaning Parameter 1. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Impact on the System The port in the LAG cannot share the service load.. Ltd. l 0x04: The port is self-looped.

Then. Go to the next step. the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported. The alarm is not reported Go to Cause 2. Step 3 Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets. For details. For details. For details. The alarm is reported Then. ----End Related Information None. 1. 1. Clear the ETH_LOS alarm immediately and rectify the fault of the port link. If. see 8... 457 . check whether the port in the LAG is enabled....18 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port.3. The port is not enabled The port is enabled 2. release the selfloop.. When a port in the LAG is unavailable.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled. Step 4 Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode. 1. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets.128 LAG_PORT_FAIL Description The LAG_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a port in the LAG fails. Ltd.. Check the link status of all ports and check whether the ETH_LOS alarm is reported. If. Enable the port in the LAG.7. 2. If the port is self-looped. On the NMS.. A. see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. Step 5 Cause 4: The port is self-looped. see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Processing alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. For details. check whether the port in the LAG works in half-duplex mode. see 8. change the working mode of the port into full-duplex and Auto-Negotiation. 1. On the NMS. Check whether the port is self-looped. configure the ports at two ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. If the LACP packets are not transmitted. see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the port works in half-duplex mode. For details.5 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board.. On the NMS.

.. Go to Cause 4. select the alarm.. Ltd. l 0x05: Other unknown reasons. Impact on the System The port in the LAG cannot share the service load. If. For details about each parameter. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. Cause 5: other unknown reasons Procedure Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter. The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop. Then. Parameter 5 The value is always 0xff. l 0x04: The port detects the selfloop. Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the number of the IP port. Go to Cause 1.. Possible Causes l l l l l Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x02: The port is in half-duplex mode. Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode.parameterN. Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Go to Cause 2.. Indicates the cause of the protection failure. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Go to Cause 5.. refer to the following table. and the port does not transmit or receive any services. 458 . Go to Cause 3.

3. Ltd.. For details.. For details. If any link is faulty. check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. rectify the fault. Step 3 Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode. Step 5 Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop. 1. Go to the next step. change the working mode of the port into full-duplex... Release the selfloop of the port with reference to Enabling Self-Loop Detection. When the VCTRUNK is unavailable.. Then.. see Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports. 459 . 1. The port is not enabled Enable the port in the LAG group. On the NMS. the alarm is reported. A. If the LACP packets are not transmitted. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports. Then.. If.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. For details.. Step 4 Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Reconfigure the LAG group. check the working mode of the port in the LAG group. On the NMS.. If the port is in halfduplex mode. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. 1. For details. configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. 1. The port is enabled Check the link state of each port. check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end.129 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL Description The LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a VCG port in the LAG fails. The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured 2. On the NMS. Contact Huawei engineers. If. 1. Step 6 Cause 5: other unknown reasons ----End Related Information None.

. Go to Cause 1. Parameter 5 The value is always 0xff. 460 . Go to Cause 2. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits. If any link is faulty. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the port does not transmit or receive any services. For details about each parameter. Ltd.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Cause 4: other unknown reasons Procedure Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter.. The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. Parameter 2. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The link of the port is faulty or fails. Go to Cause 4.. Check the link state of each VCG port. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x04: The link of the port is configured into a loop.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 1. Parameter 3 Indicate the number of the faulty VCG port in the LAG. rectify the fault.. l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Go to Cause 3. Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop. Parameter 4 Indicates the cause of the protection failure. l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails. Impact on the System The port in the LAG cannot share the service load. l 0x05: other unknown reasons. Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets.parameterN. refer to the following table. select the alarm. If.

If the LACP packets are not transmitted.. ----End Related Information None... Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Reconfigure the LAG group. Step 4 Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop. 461 . Ltd. Contact Huawei engineers.. For example. Go to the next step. The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured 2. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If. 0x01 indicates network port 1 and 0x02 indicates network port 2. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end.parameterN. select the alarm. 1. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the network port ID. Then. refer to the following table. 1. On the NMS.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 3 Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets.. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. For details about each parameter. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Step 5 Cause 4: other unknown reasons 1. Release the selfloop of the port.. A.3.130 LAN_LOC Description The LAN_LOC is an alarm indicating the Ethernet communication failure.

Procedure Step 1 View the alarm on the NMS. Switch and Timing Board. Cause 2: The network port is faulty. Replace the system control. however. or the cable is faulty. For details. switching. Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the path on which the alarm is reported.. Ltd. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port.3. For details.10 Replacing the System Control. Check whether the cable of the network port is loose or no cable is connected. Cause 3: The system control. 1. and timing board is faulty. 462 . switching. the communication of the network port is interrupted. 1. Properly connect the NMS to the network port. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is always 0x00. see 6. see 6. This alarm occurs when the laser is shut down by using the NMS. The LINK indicator is in green. and timing board is faulty. The existing services of the NE. 1. or the cable is faulty.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 2. are not affected. Determine the network port ID according to the alarm parameter 1. Step 2 Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port. ----End Related Information None. switching. and timing board. As a result.10 Replacing the System Control. Step 3 Cause 2: The network port is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A.131 LASER_CLOSED Description The LASER_CLOSED is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. the NE is out of control. Step 4 Cause 3: The system control. Impact on the System When the alarm is reported. Replace the faulty board. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the value is always 0x01. Switch and Timing Board.

Impact on the System When the LASER_CLOSED alarm occurs.3. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. the performance of the optical interface degrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A. Ltd..132 LASER_MOD_ERR Description The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. 463 . the optical interface fails to carry services. Possible Causes Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. ----End Related Information None. Impact on the System When the LASER_MOD_ERR alarm occurs.

Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module. Replace the alarmed board. Go to Cause 3. Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type. A. The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. 1. ----End Related Information None. End the alarm handling. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty...6. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. If. Then... 1... 464 . 1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the optical interface. 1. Ltd. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. If.3.133 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX Description The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. see 8. The optical module does not match the rate of the optical interface The optical module matches the rate of the optical interface Then. Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module with one that matches the rate of the optical interface.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. Replace the faulty optical module... Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type. For details. Go to Cause 2.

to rectify the port type setting The SFP type is incorrect Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. For details. The port type is incorrectly set See Configuring an SFP Port. The optical module does not match the rate of the optical interface The optical module matches the rate of the optical interface Then.. 465 . If. Impact on the System When the LASER_MOD_ERR_EX alarm occurs. Replace the faulty optical module... Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Replace it with an SFP module of the correct type. 1. Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the performance of the optical interface degrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption.. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. 1. Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type. Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module with one that matches the rate of the optical interface. If... Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type.6.. 1. see 8.. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. Then.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report . Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module. Go to Cause 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the optical interface.

Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible. The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. ----End Related Information None.. the optical interface fails to carry services. Then.134 LASER_SHUT Description The LASER_SHUT is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down.. Impact on the System When the laser_shut alarm occurs... 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. 1. This alarm occurs when the laser is shut down by using the NMS. Replace the alarmed board. End the alarm handling.3. ----End Related Information None. Possible Causes Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. 466 . A. Go to Cause 3. Ltd.

Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 467 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 1. refer to the following table..135 LCAS_FOPR Description The LCAS_FOPR is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the receive direction fails. For example.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Properly enable the LCAS protocols at both ends.. This alarm occurs if the receive unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.parameterN.. For details about each parameter.3. Impact on the System The Ethernet service is not normal. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. If. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of the link.. Ltd. select the alarm. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Go to Cause 2. The settings of the LCAS protocols are not consistent The settings of the LCAS protocols at both ends are consistent Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Then.. Cause 2: The link is faulty.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1. Parameter 2.

. The alarm clears The alarm persists Then. 1. Then. ----End Related Information None.. This alarm occurs if the transmit unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly. Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. Ltd. Replace the alarmed board. select the alarm. The link is faulty The link is normal 2. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty.... If.. For details about each parameter. Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. refer to the following table.. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Correct the configuration data. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Then.136 LCAS_FOPT Description The LCAS_FOPT is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the transmit direction fails. For example. Rectify the fault....OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2. If. A. 468 . In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Then. check whether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE. Go to the next step. check whether the alarm clears... Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.parameterN.. correct Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty.. incorrect The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Go to Cause 2.3.. If. End the alarm handling.

.. 1. For example... Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends...OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. End the alarm handling. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty. If. If. If. . Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. correct Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty.. Properly enable the LCAS protocols at both ends. The alarm clears Then. The settings of the LCAS protocol at both Go to Cause 2... Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Then. 469 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.... ends are consistent 2. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Parameter 2. Go to the next step. Cause 2: The link is faulty.. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1. For example. The settings of the LCAS protocols are not consistent Then. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of the link. The link is faulty The link is normal 2. The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Correct the configuration data... If. check whether the alarm clears.. incorrect The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Go to Cause 2. check whether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE. Then. Ltd. Impact on the System The Ethernet service is not normal. 1. Rectify the fault. Then..

For details about each parameter. A. The alarm persists ----End Then. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. 470 . Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty..137 LCAS_PLCR Description The LCAS_PLCR is an alarm indicating that a part of the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction is lost. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. select the alarm.. Possible Causes l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty.parameterN. Replace the alarmed board.. Ltd... For example.3. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry the overloads in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is less than the preset number but is not zero. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. refer to the following table. Impact on the System The available Ethernet service bandwidth is smaller than the configured bandwidth. Parameter 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If... The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Related Information None. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK.

3. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. Go to Cause 3.138 LCAS_PLCT Description The LCAS_PLCT is an alarm indicating that part of the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction is lost. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. refer to the following table.. 1. For details.. bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. Then. 1.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Replace the alarmed board.. If. 471 . For details about each parameter. Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then. If yes Go to Cause 2. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local site are configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.... Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. If. 1. select the alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A. Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.... This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry the overloads in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is less than the preset number but is not zero. ----End Related Information None. Clear the alarm immediately.parameterN. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site.

For details. Ltd.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. When the transmitted services are more than the available transmit bandwidth. 1. Replace the alarmed board. packet loss occurs. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. If. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1.. Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. For example. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 472 . Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then. Impact on the System The available transmit bandwidth of Ethernet services is less than the preset bandwidth... bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth.. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. Parameter 2. ----End Related Information None.. Go to the next step. bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site.. Then. Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty.. If. Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site.. 1. Clear the alarm immediately.

Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01. For example. Cause 2: Paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.3. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: No VCTRUNK is bound to the remote port. Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. Check whether VCTRUNKs have been added in the receive direction at the local end and in the transmit direction at the remote end. If. Impact on the System There is no available bandwidth in the receive direction. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. For details about each parameter. This alarm occurs when no path in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: No VCTRUNK is bound to the remote port.. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. and the Ethernet services are interrupted. Parameter 2. Correct the configuration data. Then.139 LCAS_TLCR Description The LCAS_TLCR is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction is lost. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. select the alarm.parameterN. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.... No VCTRUNK has been added.. 1. see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board. refer to the following table. 473 . For details.. VCTRUNKs has been added. Go to Cause 2.

and the Ethernet services are interrupted. ----End Related Information None. Clear the alarm immediately. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.3. For details about each parameter. Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. Replace the alarmed board.. 1.. If. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Impact on the System There is no available bandwidth in the transmit direction. 1. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Go to Cause 3. For example.parameterN.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 2 Cause 2: Paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Parameter 2... In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site. This alarm occurs when no path in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.. Ltd. Step 3 Cause 3: Paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty. select the alarm. A.140 LCAS_TLCT Description The LCAS_TLCT is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction is lost. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to the following table.. 474 .

1. If. 1.. If.. No VCTRUNK has been added. Replace the alarmed board. Step 3 Cause 3: Paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.. Go to Cause 2. Step 2 Cause 2: Paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then. 475 . For different ports. Clear the alarm immediately. Ltd. For details. ----End Related Information None.141 LCD Description The LCD is an alarm indicating loss of cell delimitation.3. Cause 3: Paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. the threshold value is different. Go to the next step. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. This alarm occurs when the OCD alarm continuously occurs within the transmission period of N cells.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: No VCTRUNK is bound to the remote port. Check whether VCTRUNKs have been added in the receive direction at the local end and in the transmit direction at the remote end.. Correct the configuration data. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site. see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board. Cause 2: Paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. VCTRUNKs has been added.. A. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: No VCTRUNK is bound to the remote port. 1.. The letter "N" indicates the LCD alarm threshold value....

Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the LCD alarm. such as B1_EXC. such as B1_EXC. If yes.8. B2_EXC. Check whether the B1_EXC. The receive path reports alarms indicating excessive bit errors.1 Cold Reset. For a VC-4 VCTRUNK port. the MS_AIS. AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs. Check whether the MS_AIS. 1. is set at the end of the chain network. replace the alarmed board. or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path. see 6. 1. 2. and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared. see 8. clear these alarms first. AU_AIS. used to monitor the entire virtual connection. For details. the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is 360 cells. 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. For example. For a VC-12 VCTRUNK port. 2. the threshold of generating the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm in the bound E1 link is 104 cells. AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None. If the LCD alarm persists. all the services in the receive direction of the port are interrupted and all the connections at the port insert segment or end AIS cells to the downstream. 476 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) .6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board. and B3_EXC. the MS_AIS. Impact on the System l When the LCD alarm occurs. For details. and B3_EXC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or AU_LOP alarm occurs in the path connected to the ATM port. Ltd. For example. 2. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared. The receive path reports alarms indicating excessive bit errors. clear these alarms first. The segment point is used to monitor a segment of the entire link. the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is seven cells. Step 3 Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty. Step 2 Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path.. If yes. B2_EXC. B2_EXC. ----End Related Information End and segment The end point. Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty. Thresholds of generating the LCD alarm at different ports l l l For the external ATM port. If only one E1 link is bound with the VCTRUNK.

. A..3.parameterN. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. For details about each parameter. Ltd. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the LCD alarm is not reported. 477 . the LCD alarm is reported at the VCTRUNK port. If the VCTRUNK is bound with multiple E1 links in the IMA group.142 LCS_LIMITED Description The LCS_LIMITED alarm indicates that the configuration capacity of an NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. select the alarm. Otherwise. refer to the following table.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference the LCD alarm is reported when the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs. and if the number of E1 links in which the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs is greater than the value derived from the total number of bound E1 links subtracted by the minimum number of activated links in the receive direction of the IMA group..

l 0x0b: The PLA license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x01: The service capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x11: The number of ports configured high modulation exceeds the number authorized by the license file. the change of radio service capacity cannot take effect on the NE. l 0x07: The E1 priority capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x05: The ATM/IMA capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x0f: No ERPS license is available. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the alarm cause. l 0x04: The 1588v2 capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x09: The air port compression capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file l 0x0a: The MPLS service license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x10: The number of configured VC-12 cross connections exceeds the number authorized by the license file. Ltd. l 0x0d: The GE port capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. 478 . l 0x06: The air port LAG capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. l 0x08: The synchronous Ethernet capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file.. l 0x03: For IF protection. l 0x02: The AM license file is not loaded. l 0x0c: The total service bandwidth (TDM service bandwidth and data service bandwidth) exceeds the bandwidth allowed by the Ethernet license file for the working and protection links. Possible Causes l Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x0e: No XPIC license is available. Impact on the System When the LCS_LIMITED alarm occurs.

For details about each parameter.. If yes.parameterN. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.3. select the alarm. contact Huawei technical support engineers to reload correct license files. set the AM function to disabled. If not. Ltd. Step 2 Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. ----End Related Information For TDM services. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. Procedure Step 1 Query the capacity of the license by using the NMS. Check the AM enabling status. the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. If the license does not allow the AM to be enabled. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. For details. the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. reduce the number of E1 services. A. 2. Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file. Step 3 Cause 2: For IF protection. 1.. when the alarm parameter is 0x01. 1. Step 4 Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference l l Cause 2: For IF protection. check whether the radio service configuration exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file.143 LFA Description The LFA is an alarm indicating that the E1 frame alignment at the local end of the inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) link in the receive direction is lost. radio service capacities of NEs are calculated based on the service crossconnections on IF boards. Purchase and load the corresponding service license.. 1. refer to the following table. 479 . Check whether the capacities that are authorized by the license files for the main and standby IF boards in an IF protection group are consistent with the capacities specified in the contract. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID. CAUTION If the service on the board is not protected. Impact on the System l l l When this alarm occurs. After this alarm clears. see 6. and the available links in the IMA group are reduced. l Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Check for the TU_LOP and TU_AIS alarms on the NMS. a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).. the service is interrupted when the LFA alarm occurs. TU_AIS.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board or 6. For details. If the alarm persists. and check whether the alarm clears. Parameter 2. 480 . and therefore the frame alignment loss alarms are reported. If these alarms occur. and alarm indicating that the cross-connection is not configured. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board. Step 2 Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty. If the VCTRUNK link binds only one member. perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure alarm. The value is always 0x01. replace the board. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. These alarms include TU_LOP. the E1 link in the IMA group will be recovered automatically.704. the alarmed E1 link is unavailable. handle these alarms first. Ltd. a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. 2. ----End Related Information Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G. Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Possible Causes The possible causes of the LFA alarm are as follows: l Cause 1: The demultiplexing module of the E1 frame cannot perform the frame alignment function. If the alarm occurs.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board.

For details about each parameter.144 LICENSE_LOST Description The LICENSE_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE fails to detect the license file. 1. 481 . the functions authorized by the license file cannot take effect. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the license file. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.. ----End Related Information None. select the alarm. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded. refer to the following table.parameterN. l 0x01: AM license l 0x02: Hybrid license l 0x03: TDM license l 0x04: 1588V2 license l 0x05: ATM/IMA license l 0x06: NE license Impact on the System When the LICENSE_LOST alarm occurs. Possible Causes Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.. Ltd. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Contact Huawei engineers to reload the license file to the NE.3. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.

Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by optical port 1.3... 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported by path 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different.parameterN.. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact on the System Services in the alarmed path are interrupted. refer to the following table. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Parameter 2. 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty... For example. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 1. The optical fiber is faulty The optical fiber is not faulty Then. Check whether the optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. For details about each parameter.. select the alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Check whether the working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 482 . Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty. Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different..145 LINK_ERR Description The LINK_ERR alarm indicates that a data link is faulty. For example. If. Replace the fiber. Ltd. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. Go to Cause 2.

Go to the next step.parameterN. Step 3 Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty.. As a result.. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. fewer links of the IMA group are available.. The value is always 0x01. Related Information None. the alarmed E1 links become unavailable..3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Replace the Ethernet board at the local end. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Parameter 2. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Set the working modes of the ports to the same. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. For details about each parameter. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. For details. If. 483 . Replace the Ethernet board at the opposite end.. see 8.. Use an optical fiber to perform a loopback at the the alarmed port. refer to the following table.. services will be interrupted.. If the IMA group is comprised of only one link. A.. The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are the same Then.1 Hardware Loopback. Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID... select the alarm. Ltd. 1.146 LMFA Description The LMFA is an alarm indicating the E1 multiframe alignment is lost when the E1 frame is a CRC-4 multiframe.

. 484 . 1. a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).3. Multiframe A multiframe is composed of sixteen PCM frames. and check whether the alarm clears. ----End Related Information Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes The possible cause of the LMFA alarm is as follows: l l Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty. A. perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure alarm. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty. If the alarm occurs. CAUTION If the service on the board is not protected. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Equipment alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 2. 1. see Setting Advanced Attributes of Smart E1 Ports. For details.704. Check the frame format of the opposite port. Set the frame format to CRC-4 Multiframe if it is incorrect. replace the board. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board. If the alarm persists. Step 2 Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect. Ltd. and can implement cyclic redundancy check (CRC). 3.147 LOOP_ALM Description The LOOP_ALM is an alarm indicating that a loop occurs. Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.

Possible Causes Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of loopback.. 485 .. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. For details about each parameter. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x00: optical/electrical port inloop l 0x01: optical/electrical port outloop l 0x02: path inloop l 0x03: path outloop l 0x04: loopback on the user side l 0x05: loopback on the multiplexing side l 0x08: ATM layer inloop l 0x09: ATM layer outloop l 0x0A: PHY layer inloop l 0x0B: PHY layer outloop l 0x0C: MAC layer inloop l 0x0D: MAC layer outloop l 0x0E: VC-4 timeslot inloop l 0x0F: VC-4 timeslot outloop l 0x10: VC-3 timeslot inloop l 0x11: VC-3 timeslot outloop l 0x12: VC-12 timeslot inloop l 0x13: VC-12 timeslot outloop l 0x14: IF outloop l 0x15: IF inloop l 0x16: RF inloop l 0xFF: any of the preceding loopback modes Impact on the System When the LOOP_ALM alarm occurs. the looped port or path cannot carry services. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE. Ltd..parameterN. refer to the following table.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. select the alarm.

----End Related Information This table provides parameters and their meanings for LOOP_ALM alarms reported by ports 1 to 7 on an EMS6 board. 486 . Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. l 0x00: inloops at optical/electrical ports l 0x01: outloops at optical/electrical ports l 0x02: inloops at paths l 0x03: outloops at paths l 0x04: loopbacks on the client side l 0x05: loopbacks on the combination wave side l 0x08: inloops at the ATM layer l 0x09: outloops at the ATM layer l 0x0A: inloops at the PHY layer l 0x0B: outloops at the PHY layer l 0x0C: inloops at the MAC layer l 0x0D: outloops at the MAC layer l 0x0E: inloops at VC-4 timeslots l 0x0F: outloops at VC-4 timeslots l 0x10: inloops at VC-3 timeslots l 0x11: outloops at VC-3 timeslots l 0x12: inloops at VC-12 timeslots l 0x13: outloops at VC-12 timeslots l 0x14: outloops at IF ports l 0x15: inloops at IF ports l 0x16: inloops at RF ports l 0xFF: any of the preceding loopback modes Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The parameter takes a fixed value of 0x01. see 8.. Indicates loopback types.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. Find out the cause of the loopback. For details. Determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameter. Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the optical port ID. and set the loopback status of the alarmed port to NonLoopback. Indicate the path ID (the value 1 indicates that the optical port is looped back). 2.7 Software Loopback.

Ltd. A.parameterN. refer to the following table. Indicates the VC-3 channel ID. The parameter takes a fixed value of 0x01. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2.. Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the optical port ID.148 LP_CROSSTR Description The LP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the lower order path error crosses the threshold.3. select the alarm. For details about each parameter. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference This table provides parameters and their meanings for LOOP_ALM alarms reported by ports VC-3 channels on an EMS6 board. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. 487 ..

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event..3. 2.149 LP_R_FIFO Description The LP_R_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the receive side of the lower order path. Parameter 3 Meaning Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. Possible Causes Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. ----End Related Information None. 488 . l 0x90: LPBBE l 0x91: LPES l 0x92: LPSES l 0x93: LPFEBBE l 0x94: LPFEES l 0x95: LPFESES l 0x96: LPUAS l 0x8e: LPFEUAS l 0x97: LPCSES l 0x98: LPFECSES Impact on the System When the LP_CROSSTR alarm occurs. a large number of errors occur in the service. 1. Ltd. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. and the service may even be interrupted. A.

1. Go to Cause 2. Handle the performance event. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TUPJCLOW.3. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. the service has errors. 1. For details. If..150 LP_RDI Description The LP_RDI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote receive failure. The TU pointer justification occurs Then..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. ----End Related Information None. Impact on the System When the LP_R_FIFO alarm occurs. see C.2 TUPJCHIGH. 489 .. Ltd. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.. The TU pointer justification does not occur Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.3. A. Replace the alarmed board. and check whether the performance event of TU pointer justification occurs on the local NE and the opposite NE. and TUPJCNEW. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE. Browse current performance events. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE..

the service on the local NE is not affected. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote receive failure.3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. A. 490 .. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. select the alarm. ----End Related Information None. 1. For details about each parameter. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.parameterN. Ltd. refer to the following table. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote receive failure. is interrupted.151 LP_RDI_VC12 Description The LP_RDI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that data reception fails at the remote end of VC-12 lower order path. Impact on the System When the LP_RDI alarm occurs..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. however. The service received by the opposite NE.

The value is always 0x01. ----End Related Information None. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path. For details about each parameter. and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path. Parameter 2.parameterN. refer to the following table. is interrupted. A board reports this alarm when detecting that bit 5 in byte G1 is 1.152 LP_RDI_VC3 Description The LP_RDI_VC3 alarm indicates that data reception at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path fails. A.. Name Parameter 1 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01..3. and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the service on the local NE is not affected. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. however. The service received by the opposite NE. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Handle the alarm of the lower order path on the remote site. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site. 1. select the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 491 . In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.

0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1. Possible Causes The local site receives a message from the opposite site. Ltd. but the opposite site cannot receive services. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of V5 is 1.153 LP_REI Description The LP_REI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote error. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. however. the services at the local site are not affected. the service on the local NE is not affected. For example. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site. Impact on the System When the LP_RDI_VC3 alarm occurs..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 2. A. 492 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm.3. 1. and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. Impact on the System When the LP_REI alarm occurs. The service received by the opposite NE. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site. has errors. and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.

Impact on the System Bit errors exist in the service in the receive direction of the remote site.. 1. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Handle the LP_BBE performance event on the opposite NE. 493 .3..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote errors. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface..parameterN. Parameter 2. select the alarm. Ltd. A. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote errors. The value is always 0x01. For details about each parameter. ----End Related Information None. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site. refer to the following table. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of byte V5 is 1. and the message says that there are bit errors in the lower order path. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.154 LP_REI_VC12 Description The LP_REI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors at the remote end of a VC-12 lower order path.

----End Related Information None. Possible Causes The local site receives a message from the opposite site. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. For details about each parameter. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01. 1.. and the message says that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. and the message says that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. Parameter 2. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.3. A board reports this alarm when detecting that any one of bits 1 to 4 in byte G1 is 1.. and the message says that there are bit errors in the lower order path. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 494 . A. For example.155 LP_REI_VC3 Description The LP_REI_VC3 alarm indicates that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. refer to the following table.parameterN.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site. Impact on the System Bit errors exist in received services at the opposite site. Handle the LPBBE performance event of the remote site. select the alarm. Procedure Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.

Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site. ----End Related Information None. A. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote failure.3. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. A.157 LP_SLM Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the service on the local NE is not affected. 495 . Impact on the System When the LP_RFI alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 4 of V5 is 1. 1.3. Ltd.156 LP_RFI Description The LP_RFI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote failure. The alarm only indicates that the lower order paths on the opposite NE cannot carry services.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1.. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote failure.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The LP_SLM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order path. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or is to be transmitted by the remote site.3. A. Possible Causes Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.158 LP_SLM_VC12 Description The LP_SLM_VC12 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order path. For details. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match with each other. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes. Ltd. see Configuring VC-12 POHs. ----End Related Information None. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes. 1. Impact on the System The services in the lower order path are unavailable. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. 496 .

Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or is to be transmitted by the remote site. Ltd. For details about each parameter. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match with each other. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched signal label in byte C2. refer to the following table. 497 . Possible Causes Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. ----End Related Information None... 1. For details.parameterN.159 LP_SLM_VC3 Description The LP_SLM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched signal label is detected in a lower order (VC-3) path. A. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Parameter 2. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. see Configuring VC-12 POHs. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. The value is always 0x01. select the alarm. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path. Impact on the System The service in this lower order path is unavailable.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.3.

Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01. Reset the signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site or the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the local site. Ltd.. For details. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A. Impact on the System The services in the lower order (VC-3) path are unavailable.parameterN. Possible Causes The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site. For example. 1.160 LP_T_FIFO Description The LP_T_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lower order path. refer to the following table.. see Configuring VC-4 POHs. ----End Related Information None. Parameter 2. 498 . Ensure that the signal labels are the same at both sites.3. For details about each parameter. select the alarm.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Then.3. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. Impact on the System Bit errors occur in the services. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at both ends. A. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large...161 LP_TIM Description The LP_TIM is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower order path. ----End Related Information None. The frequency offset is very large The frequency offset is within 50 ppm Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty... 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Troubleshoot the remote site. If. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.. Replace the alarmed board. Ltd. 499 . Go to Cause 2. Use an SDH analyzer to check whether the frequency offset of the input signal is within 50 ppm.

500 . Impact on the System None. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. Alternatively. Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels are configured correctly. see Configuring VC-12 POHs. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. If not.162 LP_TIM_VC12 Description The LP_TIM_VC12 is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower order path. For details. reconfigure the cross-connections. see Querying TDM Services. For details.3. Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. 1.. Ltd. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at both ends. 1.

In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Parameter 2.163 LP_TIM_VC3 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.parameterN.. see Configuring VC-12 POHs. The value is always 0x01. Impact on the System None. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 501 . see Querying TDM Services. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path. refer to the following table. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. For details.3. For details about each parameter.. ----End Related Information None. reconfigure the cross-connections. Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. Alternatively. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site.. select the alarm. Ltd. 1. If not. A. set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. For details. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels are configured correctly.

Ltd. Set byte J1 to be received at the local site to the disable mode or the same as byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. For details. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched trace identifier in byte J1. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. reconfigure the cross-connections. Parameter 2. For example. Impact on the System None. Check whether the cross-connections of intermediate sites where the services travel are configured correctly.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Description The LP_TIM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched trace identifier is detected in a lower order (VC-3) path. If not. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. see Configuring VC-4 POHs. For details about each parameter. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1. 1. see Querying TDM Services. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01. 502 . For details. Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. select the alarm.parameterN. refer to the following table. 1.. ----End Related Information None.

. Impact on the System The services in the path are unavailable.. The tributary path at the remote site is not Configure services for the tributary path at configured with services the remote site. protection switching may be triggered.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.164 LP_UNEQ Description The LP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating that the lower order path is unequipped. Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1.. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 503 . If not. For details. For details. The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2. If. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. Possible Causes The data configuration is incorrect. but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.. reconfigure the cross-connections. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. see Querying TDM Services.. l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services. Ltd. see Querying TDM Services.3. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0. If the services are configured with protection. but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Then. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None.. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path. refer to the following table. l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services. the services are interrupted.3.165 LP_UNEQ_VC12 Description The LP_UNEQ_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 path is unequipped.. Ltd.parameterN. 1. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. A. Parameter 2. Impact on the System If the alarm is generated due to incorrect service configurations. The value is always 0x01. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Querying TDM Services. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. For details about each parameter. Possible Causes The data configuration is incorrect.. select the alarm. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. 504 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) .

The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2. protection switching is triggered.parameterN. 505 . If not. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. select the alarm. For details about each parameter.. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm.166 LP_UNEQ_VC3 Description The LP_UNEQ_VC3 alarm indicates that a lower order (VC-3) path is unequipped. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. 1. Ltd. see Querying TDM Services. ----End Related Information None. Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. refer to the following table. A. If the services are configured with protection. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the C2 byte signal label is 0. The tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services Then. For example...3.. Parameter 2. Possible Causes The data configuration is incorrect. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01. 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.. Configure services..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.. reconfigure the cross-connections. Impact on the System The services in the path are unavailable. For details. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct.

If not..167 LPS_UNI_BI_M Description The LPS_UNI_BI_M is an alarm indicating that switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at both ends of the linear MSP do not match with each other. 506 . The tributary path at the opposite site is not configured with services The tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services Then. A. see Querying TDM Services. reconfigure the cross-connections. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is correct. Configure services. see Querying TDM Services. refer to the following table. Check whether the tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services. but the tributary path at the opposite site is not. For details about each parameter.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services.3.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co... If. select the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. ----End Related Information None. For details.. Go to Cause 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect... For details. but the tributary path at the opposite site is not. 1. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services.parameterN.

The LPS_UNI_BI_M alarm is generated only when the following conditions are met: l l l The switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at the local and remote sites are different. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example. Possible Causes Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly. ----End Related Information None. 507 . The type of the protocol is set to a restructure protocol. Change the MSP switching modes at both ends.168 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT Description The LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT is an alarm indicating that the LPT closes the access port of the local NE. Ltd. and ensure that they are the same. The last three bits of the K2 byte are set to the indicated mode. 1. 0x01: linear MS protection.. Then. Impact on the System The system performs protection switching in single-ended mode. the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is reported. 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1. the LPT automatically closes the access port of the local NE.3. For details. see Querying the Status of the Linear MSP. Upon detecting that the convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Equipment alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Parameter 5 Meaning Indicates the board ID. 2.. select the alarm. Indicate the port ID. services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes the access port of the remote NE at the same time. Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4. If yes. 1. the access port and the convergence port of the remote NE report the ETH_LOS alarm or other alarms related to boards and optical modules.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty. 508 . refer to the following table.parameterN. Then.. Check whether the convergence port of the local NE.3.. Indicates the ID of the sub-board. If the user configures the LPT function but the board does not support the LPT function. Possible Causes l Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty. A. For details about each parameter. clear these alarms.169 LPT_INEFFECT Description The LPT_INEFFECT is an alarm indicating that the LPT function fails. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. ----End Related Information None. the LPT_INEFFECT alarm is reported. check whether the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is cleared. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Name Parameter 1.

. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2. 509 . 1. Possible Causes Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version. Check whether the LPT function is required. and the user configures the LPT function.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. If the board hardware is of a very early version. see 6 Part Replacement. The LPT function is required Then.. The LPT function is not required Delete the configuration of the LPT. If. For details. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Impact on the System When the alarm is generated. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Indicate the port ID. the board software automatically prevents the LPT protocol state machine from running.. The values are always 0x00 0x01. refer to the following table. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version. For details about each parameter.parameterN. For details. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. the services are not affected. Replace the board with a board of the proper version. select the alarm. and the user configures the LPT function.. but reserves the LPT configuration. Parameter 4. see LPT Configuration. Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port... Ltd. ----End Related Information None. Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.

and LP_UNEQ_VC12. Ltd. or the remote port is disabled. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. If the backup links are available. – The communication link is interrupted. 510 . The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the optical interface. Impact on the System During the data transmission. Parameter 4 The value is always 0xff. select the alarm. the backup links are enabled. the services can be restored on the backup links. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.. refer to the following table. – There are the bit error threshold-crossing alarms BIP_EXC and B3_EXC.3. Procedure Step 1 Check the alarms on the NMS. – There are the alarms such as TU_LOP. the links are unavailable and the services are interrupted when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the service network. Parameter 2.. VCAT_LOM_VC12.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. VCAT_LOA. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port.170 LPT_RFI Description The LPT_RFI is a remote failure indication of the link path through (LPT) function. determine the board that reports the LPT_RFI alarm. This alarm occurs when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the LPT service network. TU_AIS. At the same time.parameterN. and then determine the ID of the alarmed port on the board according to Parameter 1. For details about each parameter.. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED, or the remote port is disabled. 1. Check whether the corresponding opposite port is enabled. If... The opposite port is disabled The opposite port is enabled 2. Then... Enable the opposite port. Go to the next step.

Check whether any link fault alarm occurs on the line board. If... Then...

Any link fault alarm occurs Handle the link fault alarms. Focus on the R_LOS and MW_LOF alarms and handle them first. No link fault alarm occurs Go to Cause 2.

Step 3 Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty. 1. Check whether the following alarms occur on the Ethernet boards of the MEPs at both ends. Then, handle the alarms. l ETH_LOS l LSR_NO_FITED l BIP_EXC and B3_EXC l TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA, VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12 ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.171 LSR_BCM_ALM
Description
The LSR_BCM_ALM is an alarm indicating a threshold-crossing of the bias current of a laser. This alarm is reported when the bias current of a laser exceeds the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 511

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the laser is functioning improperly. An over-high current burns out the laser, and an over-low current causes insufficient gains. Both can interrupt services.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The laser is aged. Cause 2: The laser is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Browse alarms on the NMS and determine the board that reports the alarm. Step 2 Replace the pluggable optical module. For details, see Replacing Pluggable Optical Modules. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.172 LSR_NO_FITED
Description
The LSR_NO_FITED is an alarm indicating that the SFP optical module is not installed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
The optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The laser of the local site is not installed. Cause 2: The optical module is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The SFP optical module of the local site is not installed.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 512

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

1.

Find out why the SFP optical module is not installed, and contact Huawei technical support engineers for the installation. If SFP module is not needed, see Configuring an SFP Port to delete this port. 6.14 Replacing the SFP.

Step 2 Cause 2: The optical module is faulty. 1. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.173 LSR_WILL_DIE
Description
The LSR_WILL_DIE is an alarm indicating that the laser is to stop working.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, bit errors occur in the service. If the board is not replaced in a timely manner, services are interrupted after the laser is damaged.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The laser is aged. Cause 2: The detection circuit of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The laser is aged. 1. 1. 6.14 Replacing the SFP. 6.4 Replacing the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board. Step 2 Cause 2: The detection circuit of the board is faulty. ----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 513

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

A.3.174 LTI
Description
The LTI is an alarm indicating that the synchronization sources are lost. This alarm is reported when all the synchronization sources for the NE are lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning 0x01: system priority list 0x02: external clock priority list

Impact on the System
The clock enters the free-run mode and loses synchronization with other NE clocks.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect. Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs. Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode. Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source. Cause 6: The board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect. 1. Check whether the data in the clock source priority table meets the network planning requirement. For details, see Querying the Clock Synchronization Status. If... The configuration is incorrect The configuration is correct
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Then... Correct the configuration. Go to Cause 2.
514

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. 1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources based on the clock source priority table. If... The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is an IF clock The synchronization source is a tributary clock The synchronization source is an Ethernet clock Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs. 1. Connect the fiber or cable properly. Then... Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode. 1. See Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source, and set the clock source to the automatic reversion mode.

Step 5 Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source. 1. See Configuring Clock Sources for External Clock Output, and configure the clock source that provides external clock signals.

Step 6 Cause 6: The board is faulty. 1. 6 Part Replacement.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.175 MAC_EXT_EXC
Description
The MAC_EXT_EXC alarm indicates that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

515

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the threshold crossing type. l 0x01: ETHDROP threshold crossing l 0x02: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing l 0x03: RXBBAD threshold crossing

Impact on the System
When the MAC_EXT_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: ETHDROP threshold crossing. The number of packet loss events crosses the upper threshold. Cause 2: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing. The number of frames unsuccessfully transmitted after successive collisions crosses the upper threshold. Cause 3: RXBBAD threshold crossing. The number of bytes in received bad packets crosses the upper threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same. 1. On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends. If... Then...

The ports at the transmit and receive Set the working modes of the ports at the ends work in different modes or in half- transmit and receive ends to full-duplex or duplex mode auto-negotiation. Ensure that the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same. For details, see Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports. The ports at the transmit and receive Go to the next step. ends work in the same mode and neither port works in half-duplex mode. Step 2 Handle the problem that the opposite site transmits packets abnormally. Step 3 Handle the quality problem with the transmission line.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 516

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Check whether the local end reports alarms such as ETH_LOS as the external line is damaged or over attenuated. If yes, see the related handling method to clear the alarms. Step 4 Replace the faulty board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.176 MAC_FCS_EXC
Description
The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm indicates that the software detects that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software periodically detects the number of bytes received by the MAC chip and the number of bytes that have bit errors. The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm is reported when the number of bit errors crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades. Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal. Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades. 1. 2. On the NMS, check for a LOOP_ALM alarm. If there is any, clear it. For details, see 8.7 Software Loopback. If the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm persists, check whether the NMS is under a denial-of-service (DOS) attack. If yes, eliminate the source that transmits a large amount of invalid data, and then check whether the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm is cleared. If the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm persists, check whether a cable or fiber is faulty. Replace the faulty cable or fiber, and then check whether the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 517

3.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal. 1. 2. Check whether the alarmed port reports an IN_PWR_ABN alarm as well. If there is any, clear the IN_PWR_ABN alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty. 1. Clean the fiber connector and the optical receive port. For details, see 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.177 MOD_COM_FAIL
Description
The MOD_COM_FAIL is an alarm indicating that Module communicates abnormally.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 0x11 indicates that the communication between the system control unit and packet switching unit is failed.

Impact on the System
The related operations cannot be performed by using the NMS and the performance information of each module cannot be queried.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the boardis faulty. Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 518

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty. 1. 2. Perform a cold reset on the faulty board by using the NMS. For details, refer to 8.8.1 Cold Reset. remove the faulty board and insert it again.

Step 2 Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty board. For details, refer to 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.178 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH alarm indicates that a mismatched port module is detected.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Maloperation

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1.

Impact on the System
The services at the alarmed port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 519

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module. 1. 2. Find out the port that reports the alarm according to the alarm parameters. Check whether the preset type of the SFP module is the same as the actual type of the SFP module. If... Then...

The preset type of the SFP module is the Replace the optical/electrical SFP same as the actual type of the SFP module module. Ensure that the new SFP module is of the correct type. The preset type of the SFP module is Reset the type of the SFP module. different from the actual type of the SFP module ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.179 MP_DELAY
Description
The MP_DELA is an alarm indicating a delay of the Multi-link Point-to-Point (ML-PPP) group. This alarm is reported when the differential delay between MP group members exceeds the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the board. Indicates the ID of the subborad.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

520

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 3, Parameter 4 Parameter 5

Meaning Indicates the ID of the port. Indicates the ID of the timeslot or channel. 0xFF indicates that the parameter value is reserved.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the service quality of the MP group deteriorates.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The signal quality of the MP group members deteriorates. Cause 2: The maximum differential delay is configured low.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal quality of the MP group members deteriorates. 1. 2. Check whether the network is congested. If yes, expand the network and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, replace the cable connecting to the port that reports the alarm. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. Check whether the maximum differential delay is configured properly on the NMS. For details, see Creating MP Groups. If the maximum differential delay is configured low, increase the value based on the actual situation or disable the fragment function.

Step 2 Cause 2: The maximum differential delay is configured low. 1. 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.180 MP_DOWN
Description
The MP_DOWN is an alarm indicating a failure of the Multi-link Point-to-Point (ML-PPP) group. This alarm is reported when the number of the valid activated MP group members is less than that of the specified minimum activated links. The minimum activated links is 1 by default.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

521

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the failure. l 0x00: unknown l 0x01: indicates that the number of the MP group members is less than the specified number. l 0x02: indicates that the configurations at both ends of the MP group are inconsistent. l 0x03: indicates that the NCP protocol of the MP group is running improperly.

Impact on the System
l l When this alarm occurs, all services that the MP group carries are interrupted. This alarm is cleared automatically when the number of the valid activated MP group members is greater than the specified minimum activated links and the MP group is configured with an IP address.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The number of the valid activated MP group members is less than that of the minimum activated links. Cause 2: The configurations at both ends of the MP group are inconsistent. Cause 3: The NCP protocol on the member links of the MP group is running improperly. Cause 4: The physical link is interrupted. Cause 5: The MP group is not configured with an IP address or a subnet mask.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of the valid activated MP group members is less than that of the minimum activated links. 1. On the NMS, check whether the number of the valid activated MP group members is less than that of the minimum activated links. For details, see Querying the MP Group Protocol Information. If the number is less than that of the minimum activated links, change the minimum activated links to a value less than the number of configured MP group members.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 522

2.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The configurations at both ends of the MP group are inconsistent. 1. On the NMS, check whether the configurations at both ends of the MP group are consistent. If not, modify the parameters. For details, see Creating MP Groups. On the NMS, check whether the PPP_LCP_FAIL or PPP_NCP_FAIL alarm exists on the member links of the MP group. If yes, clear the PPP_LCP_FAIL or PPP_NCP_FAIL alarm immediately. Then, check whether the MP_DOWN alarm is cleared. On the NMS, check whether a signal alarm such as R_LOS or T_ALOS exists on the member links of the MP group. If yes, clear the R_LOS or T_ALOS alarm immediately. Configure an IP address and a subnet mask for the MP group. For details, see Creating MP Groups.

Step 3 Cause 3: The NCP protocol on the member links of the MP group is running improperly. 1. 2.

Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link is interrupted. 1. 2. 1.

Step 5 Cause 5: The MP group is not configured with an IP address or a subnet mask.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.181 MPLS_PW_AIS
Description
The MPLS_PW_AIS is an alarm indicating a defect in the forward direction of a PW. This alarm is reported when the Ethernet port receives an AIS packet, indicating that a fault occurs on the tunnel at the server layer of the PW.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MPLS-TP OAM is incorrectly configured for tunnels between upstream NEs. Cause 2: An upstream NE detects a fault on the tunnel at the PW server layer.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 523

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MPLS-TP OAM is incorrectly configured for tunnels between upstream NEs. 1. Check whether the MPLS-TP OAM is configured correctly for tunnels between the local NE and its upstream NEs. If not, modify the configuration. For details, see Configuring MEP Parameters for MPLS-TP PW OAM. Check whether a tunnel fault occurs on the S-PE. If an alarm such as MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV exists, clear the alarm immediately.

Step 2 Cause 2: An upstream NE detects a fault on the tunnel at the PW server layer. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.182 MPLS_PW_BDI
Description
The MPLS_PW_BDI is an alarm of PW backward defect indication. This alarm occurs when the local NE receives the BDI packet, notifying that the remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
The services on the transmit side of the local NE are faulty.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty. If... A board on the remote NE is reset or faulty The physical link between the local NE and the remote NE is faulty
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Then... Rectify the fault on the remote NE. Rectify the fault on the physical link.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

524

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

If... The bandwidth allocated to the PW is fully occupied. ----End

Then... Increase the bandwidth of the PW.

Related Information
None.

A.3.183 MPLS_PW_Excess
Description
The MPLS_PW_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the PW. This alarm occurs when five or more correct CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. 1. 2. 3. Check whether multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. If yes, delete the redundant PWs or change the PW ID and label of each PW to unique values. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.
525

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.184 MPLS_PW_LOCV
Description
The MPLS_PW_LOCV is an alarm of PW connectivity loss. This alarm occurs when no expected CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW. Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty. Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty. Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly. Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. 1. Check whether the remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. If... The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Then... Enable the CV/FFD detection and then check whether the alarm clears.
526

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

If... The remote NE of the PW keeps transmitting CV/FFD packets

Then... Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW. 1. Check whether the OAM is different between the ends of the PW. If no, Setting PW OAM (Y.1711) Parameters according to the plan. If yes, go to cause 3. Check whether the local NE and remote NE of the PW report any alarm related to boards. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. Check whether any link-related alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty. 1. Check whether the interconnected board of the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, the board is being reset. Clear the COMMUN_FAIL alarm and then check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If the interconnected board of the remote NE reports other alarms, clear these alarms. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 5. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 3 Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty. 1. 2.

2.

Step 5 Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the service interface is configured correctly according to service planning. If not, reconfigure the service interface. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 6.

Step 6 Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network. 1. 2. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 527

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

A.3.185 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
Description
The MPLS_PW_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one. This alarm occurs when only the packets with wrong TTSIs are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the ingress node and egress node of the faulty PW are configured correctly according to NE planning. If the ingress node or egress node is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration and then check whether the alarm clears.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

528

Check whether the PW are configured correctly according to NE planning. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. 2. A.3. 2. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.186 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE Description The MPLS_PW_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. If the PW is configured incorrectly.3. Impact on the System Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly.. rectify the fault.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 1. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods. 529 . correct the configuration and then check whether the alarm clears. If yes. This alarm is reported when the OAM protocol negotiation fails on NEs at both ends of the PW. ----End Related Information None. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.187 MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL Description The MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL is an alarm indicating a failure of the OAM protocol negotiation. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly. Ltd. 1.

1. If yes. 1. ----End Related Information None. NOTE When the PW is interrupted in the forward or reverse direction. the peer or local NE reports the MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL alarm. and services are switched to the protection PW. clear them immediately. Cause 2: The PW has been interrupted when enabling the OAM function. If the OAM function is enabled only on one NE. If yes.3. On the NMS. Possible Causes Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled only on the NE at one end of the PW. query this alarm and check whether the OAM function is enabled on NEs at both ends of the PW. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled only on the NE at one end of the PW. clear them immediately. Check whether service-related alarms such as A. On the NMS.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.184 MPLS_PW_LOCV occur on NEs at both ends of the PW. set OAM Status to Enabled on the other NE. 530 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the PW APS protection switching is triggered. check whether tunnel-related alarms such as A. Ltd.202 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL occur on NEs at both ends of the PW. 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The PW has been interrupted when enabling the OAM function. NOTE Only the NE that is enabled with the OAM function reports the MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL alarm.3.. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A.188 MPLS_PW_RDI Description The MPLS_PW_RDI is an alarm indicating a defect in the backward direction of a PW. check whether the physical link between faulty NEs is faulty. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 Handle the PW fault according to the MPLS-TP OAM-related alarm reported by the remote MEP. This alarm is reported when the packet loss rate of the connectivity check (CC) crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SF threshold. Possible Causes The local MEP NE detects a PW fault. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For example.3. 531 . Step 3 Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the PW is used up. A. services in the transmit direction on the remote MEP are affected.3.. The local MEP sends an RDI packet to the remote MEP when detecting a PW fault. the optical fiber or cable is damaged or pressed. replace the faulty optical fiber or cable. Ltd. If yes. Step 2 If the alarm persists.189 MPLS_PW_SD Description The MPLS_PW_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the PW. The MPLS_PW_RDI alarm is reported when the remote MEP receives the RDI packet. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. If yes. increase the bandwidth allocated to the PW.

This alarm occurs when the number of received connectivity check (CC) packets is less than the signal failure (SF) threshold.190 MPLS_PW_SF Description The MPLS_PW_SF is an alarm of signal failure on the PW. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied. insert the fiber connector securely. ----End Related Information None. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1.. Then. If yes. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. For details. 532 . Impact on the System Services degrade and moderate packet loss occurs. see Checking and cleaning fiber connectors.3. increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. If yes. Ltd. Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty. check whether the MPLS_PW_SD alarm is cleared. A. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. 1. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. check whether the MPLS_PW_SF alarm is cleared. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. insert the fiber connector securely. 2.3. 1. ----End Related Information None. 1.. 533 . see Checking and cleaning fiber connectors. A. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty. Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. For details. increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then.191 MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG Description The MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG is an alarm indicating that the MEP receives a packet with correct MEG level but incorrect MEG ID. 1. Impact on the System Services fail and severe packet loss occurs. Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty. Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied. If yes. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. If yes.

1. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None. Check whether the PW configurations are consistent between NEs at both ends of the PW.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 1. reconfigure the PW label. For details. Multiple PWs use the same label. A. the MEP receives CCM packets of other PWs. This alarm is reported when the sink NE of the PW receives a CCM packet with an unexpected MEP ID.3. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: MEG IDs configured on NEs at both ends of the PW are different. see Querying Information and Running Status of PWs. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Querying Information and Running Status of PWs.192 MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP Description The MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP is an alarm indicating an error in the PW OAM CCM information. For details. MEG IDs on NEs at both ends of a PW must be set to the same value. Ltd. Multiple PWs use the same label. Step 2 Cause 2: The PW is configured incorrectly. Check whether the PW label is configured correctly. Cause 2: The PW is configured incorrectly. If multiple PWs use the same label.. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: MEG IDs configured on NEs at both ends of the PW are different. 534 .

535 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the transmit interval configured on the source and sink NEs is 10 ms. If not. services are interrupted or the sink NE receives CCM packets of other PWs. but the sink NE receives the CCM packet from the source NE after 20 ms. services are interrupted or the sink NE receives CCM packets of other PWs. and MEP ID but in an unexpected period. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 1. Ltd. MEG ID. For example. This alarm is reported when the sink NE of the PW receives a CCM packet with correct MEG level. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Check whether the remote MEP ID on the source NE is correctly configured with the MEP ID of the sink NE. Possible Causes MEP IDs are inconsistent between NEs at both ends of a PW. reconfigure the remote MEP ID on the source NE. A.3. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None..193 MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER Description The MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER is an alarm indicating that the PW does not receive the CCM packet in the expected period. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 MEP IDs are inconsistent between NEs at both ends of a PW.

CCM packet periods on NEs at both ends of a PW must be set to the same value. ----End Related Information None. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 1. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes CCM packet periods are inconsistent between the source and sink NEs at both ends of the PW. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Querying Information and Running Status of PWs. This alarm occurs when the connectivity check (CC) packets of unexpected types.3. Ltd.. periods. Change the PW OAM configuration to the same at the two ends. Impact on the System PW OAM fails. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different. and values are received within three consecutive periods. Check whether PW configurations are consistent between the source and sink NEs. Procedure Step 1 CCM packet periods are inconsistent between the source and sink NEs at both ends of the PW. Possible Causes Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different. 536 . 1.194 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN Description The MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN is an alarm of unknown defects on the PW. For details.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.195 MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS is an alarm indicating a defect in the forward direction of a tunnel. If yes. Physical link faults may be caused by a fiber cut. a faulty board.3. Check whether the physical link is faulty between the local NE and the upstream NE. rectify the faults. indicating that a fault occurs on the physical link at the server layer of the tunnel. 537 . Ltd. ----End Related Information None.. notifying that the opposite NE detects that the tunnel is faulty. Possible Causes An upstream NE detects a fault on the physical link at the server layer of the tunnel. or a faulty . A.196 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI is an alarm of tunnel backward defect indication. a faulty optical module. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. services are interrupted. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. This alarm is reported when the Ethernet port receives an AIS packet. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. This alarm occurs when the port of the local NE receives the backward defect indication (BDI) packet.3. A. Procedure Step 1 An upstream NE detects a fault on the physical link at the server layer of the tunnel.

Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.3. the services on the local NE is normal. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. This alarm occurs when the Ethernet port of the local NE receives five or more correct CV/FFD packets within three consecutive CV/FFD periods. Possible Causes Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms. A. ----End Related Information None. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms. 538 ..197 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received in the tunnel. 1. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. Clear the MPLS alarms reported on the opposite NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.

Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty. This alarm is reported when the local NE receives the forward defect indication (FDI) packet. ----End Related Information None. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 539 . Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.198 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI is an alarm of tunnel forward defect indication..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected. 1. If yes. services may be interrupted. Possible Causes Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty. reconnect the fiber or cable. Possible Causes l Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. Ltd. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. A. notifying that the upstream tunnel at the physical layer is faulty.3.

Clear these alarms first. the MPLS OAM settings. such as detection packet type and detection packet period. Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty. Clear these alarms first. MW_BER_SD. the MPLS OAM settings. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: In detection mode of manual. Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. the services that the faulty tunnel carries are interrupted. such as detection packet type and detection packet period. 540 .3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED ----End Then. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: In detection mode of manual. MW_FEC_UNCOR and MW_LOF. period... (The expected CV/FFD packets must carry correct TTSIs and have the correct type.199 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV is an alarm of tunnel connectivity loss. and value.. A. Related Information None. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. are reported The transmit board of the local NE reports hardware-related alarms (alarms on the optical modules or boards). This alarm occurs when the port of the local NE fails to receive expected CV/FFD packets within three CV/FFD periods. differ at the two ends. such as MW_BER_EXC.. Ltd. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. The link-related alarms.) Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. differ at the two ends. Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network.

Go to Cause 2.. 1. check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully used... If. End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3. End the alarm handling. Check whether the local NE and the remote NE report alarms related to optical modules or boards. This alarm is reported if no CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods. 541 .. Check whether the MPLS OAM settings are the same at the two ends. Then. A. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted.. If the MPLS OAM settings are different at the two ends. ----End Related Information None. such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED. 2. Then. change them to the same. Ltd. increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.. Check whether any fiber or cable is damaged. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. clear these alarms first.200 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm clears. replace the damaged fiber or cable... 1.. If. Step 2 Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network..3.. Wait until the COMMUN_FAIL alarm clears. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then. you can infer that the remote NE is being reset. Go to the next step. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists 2. Go to Cause 4. Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty. If yes. If the alarm persists. 3. If yes. If yes. If. End the alarm handling. Then. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then.......OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. 1. End the alarm handling. The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. Check whether the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If.

change them to the same. Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. connect the fiber or cable properly. 1. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. l If the source NE is an ingress node. If yes. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods. l Tunnel IDs of the source NE and sink NE of a tunnel must be set to the same. services are interrupted or packets from other tunnels are received. If the tunnel IDs are different. A. 542 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Ltd. Sink Node is the LSR ID of the sink NE. Source Node is the LSR ID of the source NE. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends.201 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged in the tunnel. 1. For example.. Check whether the tunnel settings are the same at the two ends. 2.3. the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at the two ends of the tunnel. the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at the two ends of the tunnel. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the sink NE is an egress node.

If multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. delete the redundant labels or change the label of each tunnel to a unique value. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Alarm Type Communication alarm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. Check whether multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. ----End Related Information On the NE. If yes.3. connect the fiber or cable properly.202 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL is an alarm indicating that the OAM protocol negotiation between the two ends of the tunnel fails. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. the label of each MPLS tunnel is unique. A. 2. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. the packets from other tunnels are received. 543 . Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. 1.. Ltd.

If yes. After the OAM protocol negotiation succeeds. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end and is disabled on the other end. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 1..203 MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI is an alarm indicating a defect in the backward direction of a tunnel. clear the alarm. A. Enable the OAM function. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None. The MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI alarm is reported when the remote MEP receives the RDI packet. 2. or R_LOS alarm. Check whether the sink node of the alarmed tunnel reports the HARD_BAD. 1. services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes the access port of the remote NE at the same time.3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Parameters None. the MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL alarm clears. Ltd. Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end and is disabled on the other end. The local MEP sends an RDI packet to the remote MEP when detecting a tunnel fault. ETH_LOS. 544 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. replace the faulty optical fiber or cable. Ltd. Possible Causes The local MEP NE detects a tunnel fault. check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI alarm is cleared. Then.204 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the tunnel. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 545 .. the optical fiber or cable is damaged or pressed. Procedure Step 1 Handle the tunnel fault according to the MPLS-TP OAM-related alarm reported by the remote MEP. Step 2 If the alarm persists. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If yes. Possible Causes l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. services are affected in the transmit direction on the remote MEP. ----End Related Information None. Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. check whether the physical link is faulty between faulty NEs. Impact on the System Services degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.3. This alarm is reported when the packet loss rate of the CV/FFD crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SF threshold. For example. A.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether the FCS_ERR alarm is reported. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. A. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted.3. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. If the alarm persists. Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. ----End Related Information None. 2. proceed to cause 2. clear the FCS_ERR alarm and then check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_SD alarm is cleared. 1. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used. Ltd. If yes.205 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_SF is an alarm indicating that the tunnel signal degrades severely. 546 . This alarm is reported if the loss ratio of the CV/FFD packets is higher than the SF threshold and CV/ FFD packets are received in three consecutive periods. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. the quality of service degrades severely and a large number of packets are lost.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. 1.. Check whether the alarm clears.

For details. the sink NE receives CCM packets of other tunnels. A. increase the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_SF persists. ----End Related Information None. check whether the FCS_ERR alarm is reported. go to Cause 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. 2.3. Cause 2: There are multiple tunnels with the same label between the source and sink NEs. Check whether PW configurations are consistent between the source and sink NEs. If the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. Ltd. Step 2 Cause 2: There are multiple tunnels with the same label between the source and sink NEs. If yes. 1. This alarm is reported when the sink NE receives a CCM packet with an unexpected MEG ID.. clear the FCS_ERR. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: MEG IDs are inconsistent between NEs at both ends of a tunnel. On the NMS.206 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG is an alarm indicating an error in the tunnel OAM CCM information. 1. 547 . check whether the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. MEG IDs must be set to the same value on NEs at both ends of a tunnel. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. and then check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_SF is cleared. On the NMS. Check whether the alarm is cleared. see Querying MPLS Tunnel Information. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: MEG IDs are inconsistent between NEs at both ends of a tunnel.

. 548 . If not. see Querying MPLS Tunnel Information. ----End Related Information None.3. This alarm is reported when the sink NE receives a CCM packet with an unexpected MEP ID. If yes.207 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP is an alarm indicating an error in the tunnel OAM CCM information. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. services are interrupted or the sink NE receives CCM packets of other tunnels.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 MEP IDs are inconsistent between NEs at both ends of the tunnel. 1. For details. ----End Related Information None. Check whether the remote MEP ID on the source NE is correctly configured with the MEP ID of the sink NE. reconfigure labels for tunnels. reconfigure the remote MEP ID on the source NE. Ltd. Check whether there are multiple tunnels with the same label on the source and sink NEs. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Possible Causes MEP IDs are inconsistent between NEs at both ends of the tunnel. A.

see Querying MPLS Tunnel Information. A. MEG ID. Ltd. For details. Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.. 549 . CCM packet periods on NEs at both ends of a PW must be set to the same value. ----End Related Information None. This alarm is reported when the port receives the CV packets and the FFD packets. This alarm is reported when the sink NE of the PW receives a CCM packet with correct MEG level. 1. Procedure Step 1 CCM packet periods are inconsistent between the source and sink NEs at both ends of the tunnel. Possible Causes CCM packet periods are inconsistent between the source and sink NEs at both ends of the tunnel.208 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER is an alarm indicating that the tunnel does not receive the CCM packet in the expected period.3. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. services are interrupted or the sink NE receives CCM packets of other tunnels.209 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN Description The MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN is an alarm indicating that certain unknown defects exist on the tunnel. the transmit interval is set to 10 ms on the source and sink NEs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. and MEP ID but in an unexpected period. Check whether tunnel configurations are consistent between the source and sink NEs. but the sink NE receives the CCM packet from the source NE after 20 ms. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs.3. For example.

2. 1. the OAM function is affected.3. Step 2 Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source. Then. 1. If the local NE and the opposite NE have different Tunnel OAM configuration. Ltd. or whether the NE is connected to an unknown source. 550 . Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source. Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None.. modify the incorrect configuration or reconnect the fibers. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte in the three consecutive frames are 111.210 MS_AIS Description The MS_AIS is an alarm indicating multiplex section alarms. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends. the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently and then the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm is reported. check whether Tunnel OAM configuration is changed on the local NE and the opposite NE. Ensure that both ends have the same Tunnel OAM configuration. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A. Check whether there is any service configured between the NE and an unknown source. If yes. check whether the alarm is cleared.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. 2.

protection switching may be triggered. Go to Cause 2. Replace the board and then check whether the alarm is cleared.. Replace the line board at the opposite site based on the type of the alarmed board. Replace the IF board at the opposite end.. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.. 1. 3. If. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty... 1. Ltd.... The line board reports the alarm The IF board reports the alarm 2.. The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then. cross-connect. Replace the alarmed board. ----End Related Information None. Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. End the fault handling. If the services are configured with protection. End the fault handling. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.. Impact on the System The services on the line port are interrupted. Replace the line board at the opposite end. Replace the system control. The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then.. Go to the next step. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and timing board at the opposite end. If. 551 . Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty... If.

For details about each parameter.parameterN.3. Ltd. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. refer to the following table. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.211 MS_CROSSTR Description The MS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a performance indicator of the multiplex section crosses the threshold. Parameter 3 Parameter 2 is always 0x00..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference A. 552 . The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Parameter 3 indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm and has the following meanings: l 0x10: MSBBE l 0x11: MSES l 0x12: MSSES l 0x13: MSFEBBE l 0x14: MSFEES l 0x15: MSFESES l 0x16: MSUAS l 0x17: MSCSES l 0x18: MSFECSES l 0x21: MSFEUAS Impact on the System A large number of bit errors occur in the services. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2. and the services may be interrupted.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. select the alarm.

3. Ltd. configure crossconnections again according to planning information.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time. 1.212 MS_RDI Description The MS_RDI is an alarm indicating that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. Check whether cross-connections are configured for service ports.12 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. are interrupted. see 8. If not. 2. Impact on the System The services on the local site are not affected.. Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 2. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. connect the fibers again according to planning information. NOTE Handle the alarm as follows if the value of parameter 3 is 0x16: 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold. If not. Check the threshold crossing records of MS BER performance events to find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. ----End Related Information None.3. A. 553 . Check whether fibers are properly connected. For details. The services received by the opposite station. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte are 110. however. Step 2 Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

3. Impact on the System The services on the local site are not affected. however. Possible Causes Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station.. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station. Rectify the fault that occurs on the opposite station. 554 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. and the message indicates that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. Ltd. The services received by the opposite station. and the message indicates that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. The possible alarms are as follows: l MS_AIS l R_LOS l R_LOF l B2_EXC l B2_SD ----End Related Information None.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the M1 byte is non-zero. and the message indicates that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section.213 MS_REI Description The MS_REI is an alarm indicating that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section. has bit errors. A. Attribute Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.

A.. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. This alarm is reported when the board detects that an AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. l 0x2a: AUPJCHIGH l 0x2b: AUPJCLOW l 0x2c: AUPJCNEW Impact on the System Bit errors may occur in the services.214 MSAD_CROSSTR Description The MSAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the adaptation performance indicator of the multiplex section crosses the threshold. Handle the MS_BBE performance event on the port of the opposite station.. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2.parameterN. ----End Related Information None. 555 . The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. select the alarm. Ltd. and the message indicates that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section.3. refer to the following table. Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. For details about each parameter. 1.

see 8. 2. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.12 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.215 MULTI_RPL_OWNER Description The MULTI_RPL_OWNER is an alarm indicating that the ring network contains several RPL_OWNER nodes. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Impact on the System The ERPS protection fails and the services configured on the Ethernet ring are interrupted. 556 . ----End Related Information None. For details about each parameter. Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.. For details. Check the threshold crossing records of the AU pointer adaptation performance events to find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 1.parameterN. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.3. Name Parameter 1.. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. select the alarm. refer to the following table..3. Possible Causes Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly. A.

Parameter 6 Meaning Indicates the port ID. Impact on the System The transmission capacity is reduced during the AM test. 557 . Reconfigure the ERPS protection.. 1. disable the AM testing. For details. and services with low priorities may be interrupted. Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance. see Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Other alarms Parameters None.3. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5. 1. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Cause: The AM testing is enabled.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly.216 MW_AM_TEST Description The MW_AM_TEST is an alarm indicating that the IF port is in the AM testing state. ----End Related Information The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the MULTI_RPL_OWNER alarm reported by the EMS6. A. After the AM testing ends. Possible Causes l Cause: The AM testing is enabled. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. Cause 4: An interference event occurs. This alarm is reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-3 by default). A. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. determine the abnormality and take proper measures. If yes. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. Ltd. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.217 MW_BER_EXC Description The MW_BER_EXC is an alarm indicating that excessive bit errors occur on the radio link. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 558 .3. check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. Impact on the System When the MW_BER_EXC alarm occurs. At the local end. For details. the service on the port is interrupted. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None.

If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement.. l Reduce the transmission distance. 5. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Follow the steps: of the network. Ltd. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct.. 3. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of Interfering Signals to scan the frequency seconds to several hours. If yes. Follow the steps: 1. hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle. spectrum around the radio link and check for co-frequency interference and biasfrequency interference. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. l Increase the transmit power. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. The RSL is higher than the specified RSL Slow up fading occurs.. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction.11 Scanning decibels. l Increase the antenna gain. The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. 2. 559 . Follow instructions in 8. contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design. adjust the antenna in a wide range. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. The offset value is tens of 1. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. Slow down fading occurs.. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. the radio link may be faulty in both directions.. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours. Generally. The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. 3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 4. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement.

. End the alarm handling. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2.. For details.... 560 .7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Go to the next step. therefore reducing the multipath fading. Ltd. l Increase the fading margin. Replace the IF board... Then. check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. Then. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement.. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. If. adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. For details. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. broken. or pressed. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end.. If. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement.. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. If. Then. 4. Then. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement.. Follow the steps: 1. see 8. Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. Follow the steps: 1. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF boardReplace the IDU. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end.. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. The fault at the opposite end is rectified Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.7. make a new connector.. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient. 3. see 8. Then.... Check whether the IF cable is wet.7.. If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs.

Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement..11 Scanning Interfering Signals to scan the frequency spectrum around the radio link and check for co-frequency interference and bias-frequency interference. A.218 MW_BER_SD Description The MW_BER_SD is an alarm indicating that signal deteriorates on the radio link. check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. Replace the ODU at the local end. Then. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement. broken.3. The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. Then. 4.. switching on the channel side may be triggered. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/ SD protection. Go to the next step. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified Then. 3. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. If. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or pressed. Follow instructions in 8. End the alarm handling. 1. 561 . This alarm is reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-6 by default) but does not reach the MW_BER_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs... 2.. Ltd.. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm Parameters None. Impact on the System The service performance on the port deteriorates.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If.. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 3. ----End Related Information None.. make a new connector.. Check whether the IF cable is wet.

. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement. Follow the steps: 1. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. If yes. The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. determine the abnormality and take proper measures.. hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design.. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction.. see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power Then. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. 2. Check the antenna direction.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 4. Cause 4: An interference event occurs. If. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. At the local end. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. For details. 3. If yes.. 5. check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. 562 . Ltd. adjust the antenna in a wide range.

Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end.7.. The offset value is tens of 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.11 Scanning decibels. Generally. l Reduce the transmission distance. The duration is from tens of Interfering Signals to scan the frequency seconds to several hours. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Increase the antenna gain. Follow instructions in 8. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback. because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. l Increase the transmit power. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient. For details.. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. 563 . l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs.. l Increase the fading margin. spectrum around the radio link and check for co-frequency interference and biasfrequency interference. The RSL is higher than the specified RSL Slow up fading occurs. Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours. therefore reducing the multipath fading. 3. Slow down fading occurs. Then. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. Ltd.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. see 8. Follow the steps: 1. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network. Follow the steps: of the network. 2.. The offset value is tens of decibels. the radio link may be faulty in both directions.

. End the alarm handling. 3. 1. The fault at the opposite end is rectified Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF boardReplace the IDU. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement.. Then. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. Replace the IF board. broken. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) .. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs. 564 3. broken. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end. it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-second performance of the system. Check the RSL at the local end.. If.11 Scanning Interfering Signals to scan the frequency spectrum around the radio link and check for co-frequency interference and bias-frequency interference. Then... Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs. 4. For details. If.. Go to the next step. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. or pressed. If. 4. Replace the ODU at the local end. Follow instructions in 8. b. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1.. check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. Check whether the IF cable is wet. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. make a new connector. End the alarm handling. For details. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement. check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. Then. see 8. 3. Go to the next step. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. or pressed.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. 2. make a new connector... If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm.. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified Then.7. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. a.. Check whether the IF cable is wet.. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement. Then. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement... see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.

Name Meaning Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the fault. Parameter 2 When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x09: l 0x01: The air interface compression at L2 is different. refer to the following table. AM enabling. l 0x06: The number of STM-1 signals is different. For example. A. For details about each parameter. Parameter 2 is reserved. This alarm occurs when an NE detects configuration mismatch on both ends of a radio link. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 4. ----End Related Information None.3. the number of E1 signals. l 0x02: The air interface compression at L3 is different. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 565 . 1588 overhead enabling. l 0x04: The modulation mode is different. the number of STM-1 signals.. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference.parameterN. l 0x03: The 1588 overhead enabling is different.219 MW_CFG_MISMATCH Description The MW_CFG_MISMATCH is an alarm of configuration mismatch on radio links. l 0x05: The service mode is different. l 0x01: The number of E1 signals or the E1 timeslot priority at the local end of a radio link is different from that at the other end. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. modulation mode may be configured differently on both ends of a radio link. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm... l 0x02: The AM enabling is different. select the alarm. l 0x09: The IP header compression enabling is different. When Parameter 1 takes another value.

radio links cannot transmit services. Cause 7: The air interface compression at L2 or L3 is different. For details. Procedure Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. This alarm occurs if the continuous wave is output by the IF board. Impact on the System If the continuous wave function is enabled. Possible Causes l l l l l l l l Cause 1: The number of E1 signals or the E1 timeslot priority at the local end of a radio link is different from that at the other end. Cause 4: The modulation mode is different on both ends of a radio link. see Managing Radio Links.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System When this alarm occurs. ----End Related Information None. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this alarm may still affect services. Cause 2: The AM enabling is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 6: The IP header compression is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 3: The 1588 overhead enabling is different on both ends of a radio link. A. Ensure that the configuration is the same on both ends of the radio link. Ltd..3. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters None. After the NE is power cycled or reset. Step 2 Check the configuration on both ends of the radio link. 566 .220 MW_CONT_WAVE Description The MW_CONT_WAVE is an alarm of continuous wave. the service configuration cannot take effect or services are interrupted. Cause 8: The number of STM-1 signals is different on both ends of a radio link. Cause 5: The service mode is different on both ends of a radio link.

Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. this alarm is reported by the discarded E1 services. For details about each parameter. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm.7.3.. Step 2 Cause 2: The MW_LOF alarm exists on the radio link and an outloop is performed on the IF port or composite port.parameterN. 1.. When the AM modulation scheme is downshifted. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Possible Causes l l l Cause 1: The continuous wave function is enabled. refer to the following table.. Cause 2: The MW_LOF alarm exists on the radio link and an outloop is performed on the IF port or composite port. select the alarm. 567 . Cause 3: The IF unit is faulty.8 Replacing the IF Board. Name Parameter 1 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Meaning Indicates the timeslots of E1 services.221 MW_E1_LOST Description The MW_E1_LOST is an alarm indicating that E1 services are lost.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The continuous wave function is enabled. Clear the MW_LOF alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. 6. see Setting IF Attributes. Ltd. 1. 1. For details. Release the loopback by referring to 8. ----End Related Information The continuous wave function tests the frequency stability and frequency consistency and should be disabled after a test is completed. Step 3 Cause 3: The IF unit is faulty. Disable the continuous wave function.

A. 568 . Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. HSM channel protection switching may be triggered.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System Some E1 services are lost. Impact on the System Bit errors occur in the services..3. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. Possible Causes Cause 1: The AM downshifts the modulation scheme. Handle the alarm according to AM_DOWNSHIFT. Cause 4: An interference event occurs. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The AM downshifts the modulation scheme.222 MW_FEC_UNCOR Description The MW_FEC_UNCOR is an alarm indicating that radio frames forward error correction (FEC) encoding cannot be corrected. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/SD protection. Ltd. 1. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. ----End Related Information None.

Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. Follow the steps: of the network. If.. Ltd. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. frequency spectra in microwave channels. 5. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement. The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity The RSL is higher than the specified RSL Slow up fading occurs. 2. If yes. The offset value is tens of 1. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. determine the abnormality and take proper measures. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 1. If yes. contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design. 3. For details. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. For details. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power Then. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement.. Follow the steps: 1. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. The duration is from tens of frequency interference exists by scanning seconds to several hours. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe.. adjust the antenna in a wide range. 569 . Check whether intra-frequency or interdecibels. see 8. At the local end. 3.. Check the antenna direction. hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle. check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal.. 2. 4.11 Scanning Interfering Signals.

The offset value is tens of decibels. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end. Then. Slow down fading occurs. l Increase the transmit power. 4. Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty... If. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection.7. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback.. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Go to the next step. l Increase the antenna gain.. Ltd. make a new connector. Replace the IF board.. If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. therefore reducing the multipath fading.. Follow the steps: 1. check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified... l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. Then.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board.. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient. Generally. because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path. 3. l Reduce the transmission distance. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours. 570 . see 8. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement. l Increase the fading margin.. Then. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check whether the IF cable is wet.. If. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2.. Then. broken. For details. the radio link may be faulty in both directions. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. or pressed. The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network.

check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified..11 Scanning Interfering Signals.. 3. End the alarm handling. If. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see 8... Check for co-channel interference. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs. broken. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. 4. Go to the next step. 4.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Check for co-channel interference. Check whether the IF cable is wet. 3. make a new connector.223 MW_LIM Description The MW_LIM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched radio link identifier is detected. Ltd.7. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. or pressed.. see 8. For details. The fault at the opposite end is rectified Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.. If.. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. 2.. For details.. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. This alarm is reported if an IF board detects that the link ID in the radio frame overheads is inconsistent with the specified link ID. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. 1. Then. For details.. see 8. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified Then. The fault at the opposite end is rectified 2. 571 .3. ----End Related Information None. Replace the ODU at the local end.11 Scanning Interfering Signals.... A. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF boardReplace the IDU. End the alarm handling. Then. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. Then. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one. Follow the steps: 1.

see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. the services on the radio link are interrupted. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. If the services are configured with SNCP. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. Then. If not. because the direction of the antenna is set incorrectly. 1. Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite station. Check whether the link ID of the local site matches with the link ID of the opposite station. check whether the XPIC configuration is correct. 1. set the receive and transmit frequencies of the two stations again. For details. If XPIC protection groups are configured. Adjust the direction of the antenna and ensure that the antennas at both ends are aligned. protection switching may be triggered. For details. Cause 3: The antenna receives the radio signals from the other stations. 572 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . Check whether the receive and transmit frequencies of the local site are consistent with the receive and transmit frequencies of the opposite station. the IF board inserts the AIS alarm into the received signal. Possible Causes l l l l Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match with the link ID of the opposite station. Step 3 Cause 3: The antenna receives radio signals from the other stations. 1. Step 2 Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite station. Check whether the settings of XPIC IF board in polarization direction-V and polarization direction-H meet the requirement of the planning. 1. because the direction of the antenna is set incorrectly. Cause 4: The polarization direction of the XPIC is incorrect. For details. Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match with the link ID of the opposite station. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If not. Step 4 Cause 4: The polarization direction of the XPIC is incorrect. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Attribute Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. set the link IDs of the two stations to the same value according to the requirements of the networking planning. Impact on the System After the IDU IF board reports the MW_LIM alarm.. a.

. Check whether Link ID-V and Link ID-H meet the requirement of the planning. Delete the working XPIC group that is configured incorrectly and create the other working XPIC group again. The MW_LIM alarm is also suppressed by the MW_LOF alarm. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the link ID is invalid. and the XPIC IF board in the polarization direction H of the two ends are interconnected with each other through the radio link in the polarization direction H. ----End Related Information The MW_LIM alarm is generated due to the inconsistency between the specified link ID and the received link ID.. Go to the next step.. The link ID meets the requirement of the planning 2. Ensure that the XPIC IF board in the polarization direction V of the two ends are interconnected with each other through the radio link in the polarization direction V..224 MW_LOF Description The MW_LOF is an alarm indicating that the radio frame is lost.3. In this case. Go to the next step. If. 573 . and the mapping relationship between the ODU and the feed bottom.. see Creating an XPIC Working Group. Attribute Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None.. For details. Check and modify the XPIC IF board and ODU. A. Reset the ID of the radio link of the XPIC IF board according to the planning. When the MW_LOF alarm is generated on the link.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. Ltd.. The polarization direction does not meet the requirement of the planning The polarization direction meets the requirement of the planning Then. the received link ID is a random value. The link ID does not meet the requirement of the planning Then... b.

Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. 1. In the case of services. take priority to clear them. In the case of TDM radio services. 1. check whether the working mode of the IF board at the local site is consistent with the working mode of the IF board at the opposite station. For details.. reset the working mode of the IF board according to the network planning. l l l l l Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. the IF working modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. the IF working modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. If not. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link. Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services. Ltd. 1. The relevant alarms are as follows: l HARD_BAD l VOLT_LOS l IF_CABLE_OPEN l BD_STATUS l RADIO_RSL_LOW l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l TEMP_ALARM Step 2 Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services. Cause 3: The operating frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the operating frequency of the ODU at the opposite station. If not. In the case of services. Step 3 Cause 3: The operating frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the operating frequency of the ODU at the opposite station. the channel bandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the channel bandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite station are different. protection switching may be triggered. change the channel bandwidth and modulation modes according to the network planning. 574 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Impact on the System The services are interrupted. If yes. Ensure that the type of the ODU at the local site is consistent with the type of the ODU at the opposite station. Possible Causes l l Cause 1: The other alarms are generated. For details. Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 7: An interference event occurs. check whether the channel bandwidth and modulation modes are the same at both ends. If the system is configured with protection. In the case of Hybrid radio services.

Then. Follow the steps: a.... Go to the next step. 2. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Then. Replace the IF board.. Then.. broken. Reset the operating frequency of the ODU according to the network planning. 575 Issue 03 (2012-07-30) . check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified. Then. or pressed. see Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes. For details. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified The fault at the opposite end is rectified b. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station. c.7. If. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board... The relevant alarms are as follows: l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l VOLT_LOS l IF_CABLE_OPEN l RADIO_MUTE l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l TEMP_ALARM Step 4 Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station. Replace the ODU at the opposite end.. 1. make a new connector. If. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement. set the receive frequency of the local site to the same as the transmit frequency of the opposite station. Step 5 Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Follow the steps: a.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference 2. Set the transmit frequency of the local site to the same as the receive frequency of the opposite station. Check whether the IF cable is wet. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. see 8. see 8. d. For details. The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling. For details. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. If yes. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. 1. Ltd. Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. take priority to clear them..

Then.. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step. Replace the IF boardReplace the IDU.. 2. If any cable connector does not meet the requirement. At the local site. Ltd. d. For details.. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. adjust the antenna in a wide range. If. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 1.. 3. make a new connector. 4. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified. Step 6 Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal. check whether the receive power of the ODU is abnormal. Check the antenna direction.. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. determine the abnormality and take proper measures. broken. 5.. If yes. or pressed. Follow the steps: 1. The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Browse history performance events... c.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. If yes.. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement. b. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Check whether the IF cable is wet. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Then. hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle. Replace the cable that does not meet the requirement. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. 576 .

Follow the steps: 1. Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the installation height of the antenna. Signals. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. 2. The offset value is tens of 1. The duration is from tens of details. therefore reducing the multipath fading. l Increase the transmit power. Follow the steps: of the network. Check for co-channel interference. Step 7 Cause 7: An interference event occurs.11 Scanning Interfering Signals. For decibels.. Then. see 8. l Increase the fading margin. l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SD protection. The offset value is tens of decibels. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change plans to minimize the interference. Contact the network planning the specified RSL of the network and if department to make the following changes: the duration is from several milliseconds l Adjust the position of the antenna to block the to tens of seconds. 2.. If the RSL is lower than or higher than Fast fading occurs. Generally. l Adjust the RF configuration to make the links in the 1+1 SD configuration. For details. 3. see 8. because slow fading is imposed by the transmission path.11 Scanning Interfering seconds to several hours. The duration is from tens of seconds to several hours. ----End Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 577 . Ltd.. 3. reflected wave or make the reflection point fall on the ground that has a small reflection coefficient. adjust the height offset between two antennas to make the receive power of one antenna stronger than the receive power of the other antenna. l Reduce the transmission distance. The RSL is lower than the specified RSL of the network.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference If. The RSL is higher than the specified RSL Slow up fading occurs. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. the radio link may be faulty in both directions. Check for co-channel interference.. Slow down fading occurs. l Increase the antenna gain.

578 . Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Possible Causes After detecting a service alarm that is caused by the fault in a radio link. This alarm is reported when the IF board detects an RDI in the radio frame overheads. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Clear the radio alarms that occur at the opposite station.. Impact on the System If the local site is configured with the reverse switching function.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Related Information None. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm Parameters None. the 1+1 switching is triggered on the IF board when the working and protection IF boards receive the MW_RDI alarm at the same time. the receive station returns a radio link fault indication to the transmit station. A.3. This alarm also indicates that the services received by the opposite station are interrupted. The possible alarms are as follows: l MW_LOF l R_LOF l R_LOC l MW_FEC_UNCOR l XPIC_LOS l MW_BER_SD l MW_BER_EXC ----End Related Information None.225 MW_RDI Description The MW_RDI is an alarm indicating that there are defects at the remote end of the radio link.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

A.3.226 NESF_LOST
Description
The NESF_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE software is lost. This alarm is reported when the system control, cross-connect, and timing board detects that the NE software is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

579

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the routine inspection object. l 0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1 l 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2 l 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.ini l 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.ini l 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1f: ofs1/hwx/extbios.hwx l 0x20: ofs2/hwx/extbios.hwx l 0x21: ofs1/hwx/luexbios.hwx l 0x22: ofs2/hwx/luexbios.hwx

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

580

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the specific alarm cause when a different bit is 1. l 0x01: If the first bit is 1, it indicates that the file does not exist. l 0x02: If the second bit is 1, it indicates that verification of the file fails.

Impact on the System
If the NE software does not exist in the active and standby areas, an NE cannot be restarted after it is powered off or reset.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased. Cause 2: Loading the NE software is unsuccessful. Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased. Cause 2: Loading the NE software is unsuccessful. 1. Check whether the alarm is caused by the loading operation. If... The alarm is caused by the loading operation The alarm is not caused by the loading operation Step 2 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. 1. For details, see 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board. Then... Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to reload the software. Go to the next step.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.227 NESOFT_MM
Description
The NESOFT_MM is an alarm indicating that the first software system is different from the second software system. This alarm is reported when the NE detects that the first software system and the second software system of the system control, cross-connect, and timing board mismatch with each other.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 581

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the location of the file. l 0x01: the files in the flash memory l 0x02: the software that is currently running l 0x03: the software in the CF card

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

582

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files in the flash memory of the system control board if the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01, l 0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1 l 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2 l 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwx l 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.ini l 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.ini l 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.ini l 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pga l 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pga l 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pga l 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pga l 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pga l 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pga l 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwx l 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.ini l 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pga l 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pga l 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pga l 0x1f: ofs1/hwx/luexbios.hwx l 0x20: ofs2/hwx/luexbios.hwx l 0x21: ofs1/fpga/plc034.pga l 0x22: ofs2/fpga/plc034.pga Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files in the currently running software if the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02. l 0x01: NeSoft(D)
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 583

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning l 0x02: Platform(D) l 0x04: ExtBios l 0x05: Logic l 0x06: Dsp

Parameter 4

Indicate the cause of the alarm. l 0x04: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single system control board are inconsistent. l 0x08: The file versions in the active and standby system control boards are inconsistent. l 0x0c: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single system control board are inconsistent and the file versions on the active and standby system control boards are also inconsistent.

Impact on the System
l l This alarm affects active/standby switching of system control boards if the active and standby system control boards have different NE software versions. If no NE software exists in the flash memory, the system is unable to restart after poweroff or reset.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The software running on the active and standby SCC boards has different versions. Cause 2: The software stored in the ofs1 and ofs2 areas of the active SCC board has different versions. Cause 3: The software stored in the mapping directories of active and standby SCC boards has different versions.

Procedure
Step 1 Contact Huawei technical support engineers for reloading the software. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.228 NO_BD_SOFT
Description
The NO_BD_SOFT is an alarm indicating that the board software is lost.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 584

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicates the number of the lost file.

Impact on the System
l l If the board software is lost, the board fails to work normally. If the FPGA is lost, the FPGA does not have a backup copy.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The software fails to be loaded.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software fails to be loaded. 1. Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to reload the software.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.229 NP1_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The NP1_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Alarm Type Processing alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

585

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System
The N+1 protection may fail, or the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually. 1. Start the N+1 protection protocol.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.230 NP1_SW_FAIL
Description
The NP1_SW_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection switching fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 586

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System
The services cannot be switched. If the current paths are unavailable, the services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The parameters of the N+1 protection for the alarmed node are set incorrectly. Cause 2: The network-wide N+1 protection protocol runs abnormally.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the N+1 protection for the alarmed node are set incorrectly. 1. Check whether the parameters of the N+1 protection are set correctly according to the planning. For details, see Creating an N+1 Protection Group. If... Then...

The parameters of the N+1 protection are Set the parameters of the N+1 protection set incorrectly correctly. The parameters of the N+1 protection are Go to Cause 2. set correctly Step 2 Cause 2: The network-wide N+1 protection protocol runs abnormally. 1. Stop and restart the protocol manually. For details, see Starting/Stopping the N+1 Protection Protocol. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared after the protocol is End the alarm handling. restarted. The alarm persists after the protocol is restarted ----End Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to handle the alarm.

Related Information
None.

A.3.231 NP1_SW_INDI
Description
The NP1_SW_INDI is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection switching is detected.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 587

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System
During the N+1 protection switching, the services are interrupted. After the N+1 switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The N+1 protection switching is performed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The N+1 protection switching is performed. 1. Find out the cause of switching, and take appropriate measures.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.232 NTP_SYNC_FAIL
Description
The NTP_SYNC_FAIL is an alarm indicating that NTP time synchronization fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Alarm Type Communication alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

588

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
Time on the alarmed NE is different from time on the NTP server. The records on the NE, such as performance events, alarms, and operations, cannot be kept with exact time.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The NTP server is not configured or is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: The NTP server cannot communicate with the NE. Cause 3: The NTP server fails.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The NTP server is not configured or is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Configure the NTP server correctly. Re-configure the NTP parameters for the NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The NTP server cannot communicate with the NE. 1. 2. Check whether the cable connecting the gateway NE to the NTP server is normal. If not, rectify the connection fault. Check whether the DCN communication between the NTP server and the NE is normal. If not, configure the DCN communication correctly.

Step 3 Cause 3: The NTP server fails. 1. Troubleshoot the NTP server.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.233 OCD
Description
The OCD is an alarm indicating out-of-cell delimitation. This alarm occurs when the cell delimitation state machine is in the HUNT or PRESYN state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

589

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
When the OCD alarm occurs, all the services in the receive direction of the alarmed ATM port lose cells.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports the alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. Cause 2: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports the alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. 1. 2. 1. 2. Check whether the B1_EXC, B2_EXC, or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the OCD alarm is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the OCD alarm. For details, see 8.8.1 Cold Reset. If the OCD alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.234 ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN
Description
The ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN is an alarm indicating that the current of the storage battery is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 590

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the cause of the alarm. l 0x01: The internal current loop of the storage battery is broken. l 0x02: The recharge current of the storage battery is very high. l 0x03: The storage battery is discharged unevenly.

Impact on the System
The equipment may fail to work normally, or event the equipment is damaged.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The circuit breaker or fuse of the storage battery in the cabinet is off. Cause 2: The positive and negative polarities of the storage battery are connected inversely. Cause 3: The power module frame is faulty. Cause 4: The power monitoring module is faulty. Cause 5: The power module is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The circuit breaker or fuse of the storage battery in the cabinet is off. If... The circuit breaker of the storage battery is open The fuse of the storage battery is broken Then... Close the circuit breaker. Replace the fuse.

Step 2 Cause 2: The positive and negative polarities of the storage battery are connected inversely. 1. Connect the positive and negative polarities of the storage battery correctly.

Step 3 Cause 3: The power module frame is faulty. 1. Check whether the power module frame is damaged. If the power module frame is damaged, replace the power module frame.

Step 4 Cause 4: The power monitoring module is faulty. 1. Replace the power monitoring module.

Step 5 Cause 5: The power module is faulty. 1. Check whether the ODC_MDL_ABN alarm is reported. If... Then...

The ODC_MDL_ABN alarm is reported Rectify the fault by referring the solution to the ODC_MDL_ABN alarm.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 591

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

If... The ODC_MDL_ABN alarm is not reported ----End

Then... Replace the power module.

Related Information
None.

A.3.235 ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN
Description
The ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN is an alarm indicating that the storage battery fails to provide power for the equipment.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the cause of the alarm. l 0x01: power-off due to low voltage l 0x02: power-off due to NMS control l 0x03: power-off due to human interference l 0x04: power-off due to high temperature

Impact on the System
The equipment does not have backup a power supply.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1 of power-off due to NMS control: The storage battery fails to provide power for the equipment due to NMS control. Cause 1 of power-off due to local human interference: The BAT button on the front panel of the PMU is set to OFF.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 592

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

l l l l l l

Cause 1 of power-off due to low voltage: The AC input power is abnormal. Cause 2 of power-off due to low voltage: The power module is faulty. Cause 3 of power-off due to low voltage: The power monitoring module is faulty. Cause 1 of power-off due to high temperature: The temperature that results in power-off of the storage battery due to high temperature is set to an inappropriate value. Cause 2 of power-off due to high temperature: The temperature of the storage battery is very high. Cause 3 of power-off due to high temperature: The temperature sensor of the power module is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters displayed on the NMS. Step 2 Cause 1 of power-off due to NMS control: The storage battery fails to provide power for the equipment due to NMS control. 1. Enable the battery to power on the equipment. Step 3 Cause 1 of power-off due to local human interference: The BAT button on the front panel of the PMU is set to OFF. 1. On the front panel of the PMU, hold the BAT ON button for 5-10 seconds to turn on the storage battery.

Step 4 Cause 1 of power-off due to low voltage: The AC input power is abnormal. 1. Query the threshold that results in an alarm when the AC power voltage is abnormal. Then, determine whether the threshold is appropriate according to the configuration and planning information. If... The threshold is inappropriate The threshold is appropriate 2. Then... Set the threshold to an appropriate value. Go to the next step.

Check whether the AC circuit breaker is closed. If... The AC circuit breaker is open The AC circuit breaker is closed Then... Close the AC circuit breaker. Go to the next step.

3.

Check the connection of the AC power cable. If... The connection of the AC power cable is incorrect. The AC power cable is deteriorated and damaged. Then... Connect the cable properly. Replace the cable.

Step 5 Cause 2 of power-off due to low voltage: The power module is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault of the power module by referring to the solution to the ODC_MDL_ABN alarm.

Step 6 Cause 3 of power-off due to low voltage: The power monitoring module is faulty.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 593

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

1.

Rectify the fault of the power monitoring module.

Step 7 Cause 1 of power-off due to high temperature: The temperature that results in power-off of the power module due to high temperature is set to an inappropriate value. 1. Query the threshold that results in an alarm due to high temperature. Then, determine whether the threshold is appropriate according to the configuration and planning information. If... Then...

The threshold is inappropriate Set the threshold to an appropriate value. The threshold is appropriate Perform the operations required when the alarm is generated by cause 2 of power-off due to high temperature.

Step 8 Cause 2 of power-off due to high temperature: The temperature of the storage battery is very high. 1. Replace the storage battery.

Step 9 Cause 3 of power-off due to high temperature: The temperature sensor of the power module is faulty. 1. Replace the temperature sensor of the power module.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.236 ODC_DOOR_OPEN
Description
The ODC_DOOR_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the door of an outdoor cabinet is open.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System
If the cabinet door is open, the temperature, ambient humidity, and dust-proof measures of the equipment are affected by the external environment. In addition, the equipment may be damaged or stolen.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 594

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The door access alarm is set incorrectly. Cause 2: The cabinet door is open. Cause 3: The cable between the door sensor and the monitor device is connected incorrectly. Cause 4: The door sensor is faulty. Cause 5: The monitor device is faulty. Cause 6: No door sensor is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The door access alarm is set incorrectly. 1. Check whether the door access alarm is set correctly according to the configuration and planning information. If... The door access alarm is set correctly The door access alarm is set incorrectly Step 2 Cause 2: The cabinet door is open. 1. Close the cabinet door. Then... Go to Cause 2. Set the door access alarm correctly.

Step 3 Cause 3: The cable between the door sensor and the monitor device is connected incorrectly. 1. Check the cable between the door sensor and the monitor device. If... The cable is connected incorrectly or is loose The cable is deteriorated or damaged The connection is correct Step 4 Cause 4: The door sensor is faulty. 1. 2. Rectify the fault of the door sensor. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Step 5 Cause 5: The monitor device is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault of the monitor device. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 5. Then... Connect the cable properly. Replace the cable. Go to Cause 4.

Step 6 Cause 6: No door sensor is installed. 1. Install a door sensor.

----End
Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 595

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.237 ODC_FAN_FAILED
Description
The ODC_FAN_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the fan is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the position of the fault. l 0x01: The internal fan is faulty. l 0x02: The external fan is faulty.

Impact on the System
The cabinet cannot dissipate heat properly. As a result, the equipment may be damaged and the services may be affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The fan cable is connected incorrectly. Cause 2: The fan is faulty. Cause 3: The fan is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the faulty fan according to the alarm parameters displayed on the NMS. Step 2 Cause 1: The fan cable is connected incorrectly. 1. Connect the cable properly to the fan according to the specified regulations or rules. Step 3 Cause 2: The fan is faulty. 1.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Replace the fan module.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 596

Impact on the System In the case of high relative humidity. Cause 4: The associated monitoring equipment is faulty. Cause 2: The cable between the humidity sensor and the monitoring equipment is connected incorrectly. 597 . l 0x02: The relative humidity is very low. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the cause of the alarm. ----End Related Information None. Attribute Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Environment alarm Parameters When you view an alarm on the network management system. l 0x01: The relative humidity is very high.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Step 4 Cause 3: The fan is not installed. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. Ltd. select the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2. A.3. 1. the life of the equipment may be shortened..parameterN... Possible Causes l l l l Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Cause 1: The threshold that results in an alarm is set incorrectly. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to the following table. Cause 3: The humidity sensor is faulty. the equipment may be damaged. For details about each parameter. Install the TEC module that contains a fan.238 ODC_HUMI_ABN Description The ODC_HUMI_ABN is an alarm indicating that the relative humidity in the cabinet environment exceeds the specified threshold. In the case of low relative humidity.

. Step 2 Cause 2: The cable between the humidity sensor and the monitoring equipment is connected incorrectly.. Step 4 Cause 4: The monitoring equipment is faulty... If... Perform the operations required when the alarm is generated due to cause 2. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference Procedure Step 1 Cause 1: The threshold that results in an alarm is set incorrectly. 2. Ltd. The humidity threshold is set correctly Then. 598 . Rectify the fault of the sensor.3.239 ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN Description The ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN is an alarm indicating that the secondary load is powered off. The cable is deteriorated and damaged The cable is not deteriorated and damaged Handle the exceptions of the cable. 1... A. The humidity threshold is set incorrectly Set the humidity threshold to an appropriate value. The alarm persists Perform the operations required when the alarm is generated due to cause 4. Perform the operations required when the alarm is generated due to cause 3... If. Rectify the fault of the monitoring equipment. Then. Step 3 Cause 3: The humidity sensor is faulty. The cable is connected incorrectly or is loose Connect the cable properly.. ----End Related Information None.. Check whether the humidity threshold is set correctly according to the configuration and planning information. Issue 03 (2012-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Te